Category: General

Examples of Verbs – When you want to arrange the correct sentence systematics, it’s a good idea for Sinaumed’s to pay attention to the word categories you want to use. Is it included in the category of verbs, adjectives, nouns, or adverbs. Even if it is in the branch of morphological linguistics, the discussion of this verb has its own chapter because it is related to the affixation process.

Verbs or also known as verbs are categories of words that describe the process of activity. Unfortunately, many people are unable to distinguish between verbs and nouns. So, what are some examples of verbs that are commonly used in writing? What are the types of these verbs or verbs? How is the process of affixation to this verb or verb in morphological studies? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

70 examples of verbs

1. Water
2. Chew
3. Sweeping
4. steaming
5. bear
6. Weaving
7. Slicing
8. noted
9. Weave
10. Cut
11. Sawing
12. Hone
13. Cut down
14. Burn
15. Paint
16. Fishing
17. Sew
18. Paint
19. Embrace
20. Waving
21. Drape
22. Throw away
23. inhale
24. traverse
25. Rinse
26. Rubbing
27. Chew
28. gush
29. Suck
30. Read
31. Throw
32. Catch
33. Interesting
34. Push
35. looked up
36. Jump
37. Plant
38. Shoot
39. Solve
40. pet
41. lead
42. Dive
43. Spread
44. Inspect
45. Bite
46. Nod
47. queue
48. Look down
49. Slap
50. unplug
51. give charity
52. shouted
53. Berbaya
54. play
55. Testify
56. conspiring
57. Surfing
58. dispute
59. Hide
60. touch
61. Uniformed
62. Stand by
63. Dress up
64. Visit
65. Bet
66. Touched
67. stung
68. Touched
69. Sentile
70. Stumbled

Understanding What is a Verb

If you look at KBBI (Big Indonesian Dictionary), the term “verb” has the same definition as a verb, namely ‘a category of words that describe a process, action, or situation ‘. The term “verb” is usually used in linguistic studies. This verb or verb actually comes from the Latin word ‘ verbum ‘, which has a similar definition, namely ‘ a class of words that express an action, existence, experience, or other dynamic meaning .’

This verb is called that because the words express an action or action that is carried out by the human body. However, verbs are not only limited to actions carried out by human body movements, but also to express actions, actions, processes, movements, conditions, and the occurrence of something. According to Ramlan (in Oktari, 2020), verbs are words that express action and tend to occupy the function of the predicate (P) in sentence syntax. Not only that, Keraf also stated that if verbs in Indonesian are all kinds of words that can be expanded with groups of adjectives.

This class of verbs has the highest frequency of use in a sentence. In fact, it is not uncommon for these verbs or verbs to have a big influence on the construction of sentences. Changes in sentence structure are largely determined by changes in the form of this verb. According to Harimurti Kridalaksana (1993), verbs are a class of words that usually function as predicates and have morphological characteristics, starting from words, aspects, charms, and numbers.

Characteristics of Verbs

• Has the meaning of deeds, activities, or actions carried out by the motions of living things.
• Has a process meaning.
• Can mean circumstances.
• It is usually followed by a noun, adjective or adverb.
• Often it can be formed using the affixes me-, di, ber-, ter-, me-kan, di-kan, ber-an, mem-an, and per-i.
• If in a complete sentence, it will usually be “on duty” as a predicate (P_.
• Can be preceded by a time statement, for example: has, is, will, almost, and soon.
• Cannot be combined with words that mean too much. For example: really go, really eat.

Functions of Verbs in a Sentence

Previously, it was explained that most of these verbs or verbs can function as a predicate (P) in sentence syntax. But apparently, a verb or verb can also function as a subject, object, or complement as well, you know… It should be understood that the use of this verb or verb must still be adapted to the context of the sentence, right…

1. Verb As Predicate

The verb can function as the predicate or the core of the sentence. Example sentences can be:

• Father and Mother embrace on their wedding anniversary.
• Kirino kicked the soccer ball carefully.
• Felix listens to the latest song from Stray Kids.

2. Verbs as Subjects

Even though the average sentence will use a noun as the subject, it turns out that this verb or verb can also act as a subject in a sentence structure, you know … So, here are some examples:

• Painting is my daily activity.
• Taking medicine regularly can cure pain.
• Basking in the sun can nourish the body.

3. Verbs As Objects

As with the subject, the object in a sentence arrangement will usually be filled with nouns. But apparently, verbs or verbs can also act as objects. Following are some examples:

• Sister tries to take care of the kitten.
• Mr. Ariel teaches painting to the street children.
• Riko is thinking about moving his house the day after tomorrow.

4. Verb as Complementary

In sentence structure, it is not just subject, predicate, and object. However, there are still complements whose job is to complete the sentence so that the meaning is clearer. Well, the existence of a verb or verb can also act as a complement in a sentence structure. The following are examples:

• Key has stopped cheating.

Types of Verbs

By Shape

1. Basic Verbs

Free basic verbs are verbs or verbs that have undergone a morphological alias word formation process. Well, these basic verbs are divided into two types, namely free base words and bound base words.

a) Free Basic Verbs

That is a verb that already has a grammatical function without having to add affixes. Example: walking, running, jumping, eating, bathing, crying, painting, scissors, cutting, and others.

b) Basic Bound Verbs

That is a verb that will only have a grammatical function if it has been added with an affix first. These affixes can be in the form of the prefix meng-, ber, or ter-; and the ending -kan, or -i. Example: struggling, sawing, sawing, and others.

2. Derivative Verbs

A derived verb is a verb or verb that has undergone a process of affixation, reduplication, or a combination of other processes. Usually in this derivative verb will use a noun or adjective first then after experiencing one of these processes, the result will form a verb.

Based on the existence of the object

In this case, the type of verb will depend on several factors, namely:

• There is an object in the active sentence.
• The function of the object in the active sentence is so that it can turn into a subject in the passive sentence.

1. Transitive Verbs

A transitive verb is a verb that requires an object or complement to complete the active sentence. Later, object elements can not only be nouns, but can also be nominal phrases. If the object element in a sentence is to be changed into a subject, then the sentence will turn into a passive sentence. Here’s an example:

• Eat

Active voice: We ate that fried rice this morning.

Passive voice: This morning we ate the fried rice.

• fell

Active voice: The judge sentences the assassin to death.

Passive voice: The assassin was sentenced to death by the Judge.

• Hoeing

Active voice: Farmers hoe the fields every day.

Passive voice: Every day the rice fields are hoeed (by) farmers.

2. Intransitive Verbs

Intransitive verbs are verbs or verbs that do not require an object or complement in the sentence structure.

Get to know what is affixation in the formation of verbs

If you look at KBBI (Big Indonesian Dictionary), this process of affixation or affixation is the process or result of adding affixes, whether in the form of prefixes, infixes, confixes, or suffixes to basic words. Since this affixation relates to the formation of verbs, the addition of affixes will be given to the root word of the verb. In the process of forming this verb, the affixes can be:

• Prefix with-
• prefix di-
• Most prefix
• prefix to-
• The prefix to
• per-an confix
• Confix ber-an
• Confix per-i
• Suffix -kan
• Suffix -i

1. Prefixed Verbs with-

The grammatical meaning of verbs that use the prefix ber- , which states:

• Have
• Wear or use
• Drive or hitchhike
• Issuing or producing
• Experiencing or being in a situation
• Group or group
• Give

a) Verbs with the prefix ber- which have a grammatical meaning ‘to have’

If the basic verb form is added by a prefix or prefix, it can mean having (base) or existing (base) . Example:

• fathered ‘had a father’
• engine ‘there is an engine’
• obliged ‘had an obligation’

b) Prefixed Verbs with a Grammatical Meaning ‘Wear’ or ‘Wear’

If the basic verb form is added by a prefix or prefix ber- then it can mean wearing or putting on . Here’s an example:

• kebaya ‘wearing kebaya’
• banded ‘wearing a ribbon’
• leather jacket ‘wearing a leather jacket’

c) Verbs with prefixes with grammatical meaning ‘riding’ or ‘riding’

If the basic verb form is added by a prefix or prefix ber- then it can mean riding or riding . Here’s an example:

• cycling ‘riding a bicycle’
• equestrian ‘ride a horse’
• ride ‘ride the train’

d) Prefixed Verbs with a Grammatical Meaning ‘Removing’ or ‘Producing’

If the basic verb form is added by a prefix or prefix, it can mean to produce or produce . Here’s an example:

• purulent ‘oozing pus’
• bleeding ‘bleeding out’
• to produce ‘to produce’

e) Prefixed Verbs with Grammatical Meaning ‘Experience’ or ‘Being in a State’

If the basic word form is added by a prefix or prefix ber- then it can mean experiencing or being in a state . In this case, the verb can be an adjective which can later turn into a verb, because it has been given a prefix. Here’s an example:

• rejoice ‘in a state of joy’
• to be sad ‘to be sad’ or to be ‘in a sad state’
• have fun ‘in a state of fun’

2. Verb Suffix -kan

In the process, if the suffix or ending -kan is added to the basic word, the sentence can become an imperative sentence and a passive sentence. In using this suffix, the grammatical meaning will be:

• Make
• Do it for other people.
• Do will.
• Bring in to.
• Make it on.

a) Verb Suffix -kan which Has the Grammatical Meaning ‘Make’

If the basic verb form is given a suffix or ending -kan , then it can have a meaning in the form of ‘ make ‘. Here’s an example:

• calm down ‘make calm’
• unite ‘make one’
• disconnect ‘make disconnect’

b) Verb Suffix -kan which Has the Grammatical Meaning ‘Make Be In’

If the basic verb form is given a suffix or ending -kan , then it can have a meaning in the form of ‘to be in’. Here’s an example:

• sideline ‘make it sideways’
• land ‘make be on land’
• warehouse ‘make it in warehouse’

c) Verb Suffix -kan which Has a Grammatical Meaning ‘Do For Others’

If the basic verb form is given a suffix or the ending -kan, then it can have a meaning in the form of ‘do it for others’. Here’s an example:

• open ‘do open for others’
• bring ‘do carry for others’
• read ‘do the reading for others’

d) Verb Suffix -kan which Has the Grammatical Meaning of ‘Bring Into’

If the base verb form is given a suffix or the ending -kan, then it can have the meaning of ‘bring it into’. Here’s an example:

• hostel ‘bring it into the hostel’
• home ‘bring it into the house’

3. Verb Suffix -i

A basic verb that has an ending or suffix -i , will later have a grammatical meaning in the form of:

• repeatedly
• place
• feel something on
• do on
• cause or make

a) Verb Suffix -i which Has a ‘Repeatedly’ Grammatical Meaning

If the base verb form is given a suffix or an -i ending , it can have the meaning of ‘repeatedly’. Here’s an example:

• beat ‘the work of hitting repeatedly’
• throw ‘repetitive throw job’
• kick ‘kick work done repeatedly’

b) Verb Suffix -i which Has a Grammatical Meaning of ‘Giving’ or ‘Giving’

If the basic verb form is given a suffix or an -i ending , then it can have a meaning in the form of giving or affixing . Here’s an example:

• salti ‘salt on’
• fund ‘give funds to’
• advise ‘give advice to’

4. Verbs with the prefix per-

A basic verb that is given a per- prefix or prefix , will later have a meaning in the form of:

• make more
• think of as
• for

a) Per- prefixed Verbs that Have a Grammatical Meaning ‘Make More’

If the basic verb form is given a prefix per- , then it can have a meaning in the form of making it more . Here’s an example:

• expand ‘make it wider’
• expand ‘make wider’
• slow down ‘make it slower’

b) Verbs with the prefix per- which have the grammatical meaning of ‘Think As’

If the basic verb form is given a per- prefix or prefix , then it can have a meaning in the form of think of as . Here’s an example:

• slaves ‘consider as slaves’
• peristri ‘consider as wife’
• peranak ‘take as a child’

c) Verbs with the prefix per- which have a grammatical meaning ‘for’

If the basic verb form is given a per- prefix or prefix , then it can have a meaning in the form of for . Here’s an example:

• two ‘for two’
• eighth ‘divide eight’
• hundredths ‘divide one hundred’

Well, that’s a review of what are examples of verbs and how to form affixes or giving affixes in verbs. Does Sinaumed’s often use verbs as predicates when writing a sentence?

Book Recommendations and Related Articles

Source:

Chaer, Abdul. (2015). INDONESIAN MORPHOLOGY (Process Approach) . Jakarta: PT RINEKA CIPTA.

How to deal with air pollution – Air pollution, has now become a global problem. Of course, we also have to do various ways to overcome air pollution. Moreover, as we all know, clean air mixed with pollutants is very dangerous for the health of the human body.

Various things can cause air pollution, especially in the activities we do every day. This can happen because of various activities that humans carry out using tools that are capable of emitting smoke and dirty air, thus making the existing clean air polluted.

According to the World Health Organization (WHO), the level of air pollution in the world is very worrying.

At least, there are 98% of cities that have a population of over 100,000 people with low or medium incomes, do not have air that is able to meet the air quality standards set by WHO. But, for high-income countries, the percentage drops to 52%.

Therefore, we can see that air pollution can indeed occur anywhere, especially in cities where residents have low incomes because of the various activities they carry out.

Based on research conducted using tools from Greenpeace Southeast Asia and IQAir AirVisual, since 2020, air pollution has claimed 6,100 lives in Jakarta, and in 2021 it has claimed 5,200 lives.
In fact, did you know that not long ago, the air quality in Jakarta was the second worst in the world.

Launching from the IQAir website, the air quality in Jakarta on June 17 2022 showed a number above 100 with a concentration of PM 2.5. This certainly shows that the air quality in Jakarta is very bad and also dangerous for health.

Air pollution occurs due to the release of various chemicals into the atmosphere. Pollutants in the form of chemicals or compounds in the air that occur unnaturally can reduce air quality and are very dangerous for living things in the atmosphere.

Air pollution conditions can cause harm to all living things, especially humans. Air pollution can cause difficulty breathing and even cause various damage to nature as a whole.

So, what exactly is the meaning of air pollution? What are the causes and effects? Check out the following explanation, OK!

According to the Encyclopedia Britannica , air pollution is the release of various gases, finely divided solids or liquid aerosols into the atmosphere which are dispersed at rates that exceed the natural capacity of the environment to remove, absorb or dissolve.

According to National Geographic , air pollution is a mixture of particles and gases that can reach dangerous concentrations both outdoors and indoors. Pollutants that cause pollution include smoke, methane, soot, carbon dioxide, pollen, mold, and so on.

According to the National Institute of Environmental Health Sciences, the definition of air pollution is a mixture of natural and man-made substances that occur in the air. Usually separated into two categories, namely indoor air pollution and outdoor air pollution.

According to the Decree of the Minister of Health of the Republic of Indonesia No.1407 of 2002 concerning guidelines for controlling the effects of air pollution, it states that air pollution is a decrease in air quality to a certain level which can cause ambient air to be unable to fulfill its function, due to the presence of energy or substances from other components that enter into the air. ambient air as a result of human activities.

The definition of air pollution according to the expert, namely Chambers, air pollution is the addition of a material or physical or chemical substrate into the normal air environment in a certain amount, so that it can be detected by humans or can be counted and also measured, and has a negative effect on humans, animals , vegetation, and materia.

Ways to Overcome Air Pollution

How to deal with air pollution can be done if humans can work together in carrying out actions to handle pollution or contamination. Some of the things we can do as a way to deal with air pollution include:

1. Reducing Emissions

The smoke that comes out of the vehicle is a major source of air pollution. Therefore, we need to reduce the habit of using vehicles and can switch to using public transportation. In addition, avoid starting the vehicle engine too often while waiting for a long time.

2. Choose Environmentally Friendly and Energy Saving Products

Starting to use energy-efficient equipment and power-efficient electronic devices can be one of our ways to save costs and protect the environment from air pollution. Don’t forget to always turn off the electric power when we are not using the device.

3. Not Burning Garbage

Lots of people think that by burning trash, they can reduce the amount of waste. In fact, doing so is actually harmful to health and the environment. When we burn trash, it can produce carbon monoxide (CO). If we breathe the air, it is very dangerous for health. In addition, the smoke from burning waste is also capable of producing toxic gases.

4. Avoiding Excessive Chemical Use

The way to prevent further air pollution is to reduce the excessive use of chemicals, especially in household cleaning fluids. You can switch to using environmentally friendly home cleaning liquid products according to your needs.

5. Reducing the Use of Plastic Bags

The use of plastic bags is also dangerous for the environment. This is because plastic waste takes a very long time to decompose. Therefore, make sure you reduce the use of plastic bags every time you shop to prevent air pollution.

6. Reuse and Recycle

In addition to reducing excessive use of chemical goods, we also need to apply the concept of reuse and recycle . You can start by separating recyclable and non-recyclable waste. This can reduce air, soil and water pollution emissions.

7. Farming

One of the problems that are often faced by big cities is the lack of land and green plants that can produce oxygen. Therefore, we can overcome air pollution by starting to grow crops at home. Because, the existence of green plants will be very helpful in filtering dirty air and being able to provide fresher clean air.

Air Pollution Process

Reporting from the NASA website, basically air pollution is caused by solid and liquid particles and certain gases suspended in the air. Solid and liquid particles suspended in the air are called aerosols.

These particles can come from various sources. Many aerosols enter the atmosphere during the burning of fossil fuels, such as coal, wood and petroleum.

Most of the particulate and aerosol gases originate directly from these sources. However, some are formed through chemical reactions that occur in the air.

Aerosols can also come from other places, such as dust, plant pollen, forest fires, factories, vehicle exhaust, and even volcanic ash that erupts. Aerosols can also affect the way incoming light hits the earth.

Some aerosols reflect sunlight, while others absorb sunlight, depending on the color of the particles.

Factors Causing Air Pollution

Air pollution that occurs is caused by several factors, both occurring due to natural factors, as well as human factors. Here are some causes of air pollution:

1. Air Pollution Due to Natural Factors

Air pollution due to natural factors is an activity that occurs naturally without any intervention from humans or related to activities carried out by humans. Air pollution that occurs naturally through the following processes:

1. The process of decomposition of organic waste that emits a foul odor into the air.
2. Gas, smoke, volcanic ash ejected from a volcano when it erupts.
3. Forest fires that occur naturally.
4. Gas and dust flying into the air due to strong winds.

2. Air Pollution Due to Human Factors

The human factor is the most dominant factor in producing air pollution through the various activities they carry out. Pollution caused by human activities include:

1. The existence of heating process activities resulting from the processing of food ingredients, such as fish and meat which can produce dust, smoke, and odors which if done continuously can pollute the environment.
2. Then, there is an infrastructure development process that can generate dust and smoke in an area. Moreover, if the construction takes a long time, it can cause air pollution.
3. Then, the chemical process as we can see in the fertilization process or the fertilization process which is the process of fusion of two gametes. This fertilization process is capable of producing dust, steam, and also gases which can cause air pollution.
4. The next activity is the smoke from transportation. Transportation fumes are one of the biggest contributors to air pollution. This is what we most often encounter, where many motorists produce smoke every day, which can create air pollution.
5. Various mining and quarrying activities that are carried out, are capable of producing dust and also emissions that can cause air pollution.
6. The last activity is the burning activity. The existence of various combustion activities such as forest fires, burning of waste, or steel smelting activities related to the use of fire can produce gas, smoke, and vapor which can cause air pollution.

Causes of Air Pollution Based on Activity

1. Mining Activities

Mining activities can produce various chemicals and dust which are eventually released into the air, this is because the mining process is usually carried out to extract minerals under the earth using tools that use fuel to move it.

2. Use of excess electricity

In Indonesia, in making electricity they still rely on fuel in the form of coal. Therefore, the more electricity users, the more coal waste is discharged into the air, which can cause air pollution.

3. Waste from Household Activities

Various household activities often produce waste, such as paper, plastic, and so on. Although burning waste is considered an effective measure to reduce waste, in fact it can actually cause air pollution. Garbage from household activities is then disposed of and burned, then produces smoke which can cause air pollution.

Types of Air Pollution

The National Institute of Environment Health Sciences divides the categories of air pollution into two types, namely:

1. Outdoor Air Pollution

Outdoor air pollution is exposure to pollution that occurs outside the built environment, such as:

1. Fine particles produced by burning fossil fuels such as coal and petroleum to produce energy.
2. Gases that are dangerous, such as nitrogen oxides, sulfur oxides, carbon monoxide, chemical vapors, and so on.
3. Tobacco smoke.
4. Ground-level ozone, a form of reactive oxygen and a major component of urban smog.

2. Indoor Air Pollution

Indoor air pollution is exposure to particles from carbon dioxide and other pollutants carried by indoor air or from dust. Outside air pollution can enter the room by opening doors, windows, and ventilation. Examples of indoor air pollution, namely:

1. Building materials in the form of asbestos, lead, formaldehyde, and others.
2. Gases such as carbon monoxide, radon.
3. Mold as well as pollen
4. Indoor and outdoor allergens such as rats and cockroaches.

What Are the Impacts of Air Pollution?

The occurrence of air pollution will certainly cause various negative side effects for health, including:

1. Triggers damage to respiratory cells, and makes the respiratory system worse.
2. Disturbing the passage of oxygen in the blood due to the large amount of carbon monoxide. This can trigger the risk of cardiovascular disease.
3. Puts more pressure on the lungs and heart, where these organs have to work very extra.
4. Can shorten life span.
5. Danger for pregnant women, because it can trigger inflammation, miscarriage, as well as asthma for the baby.
6. Lowering can even eliminate the function of the main body organs, namely the lungs.
7. Increase the potential for various diseases, such as asthma, bronchitis, cancer, and emphysema.
8. More susceptible to infection, especially at the age of children.
   For certain circles it can increase the occurrence of potential diseases, such as diabetes, hypertension, chronic lung disease, and cardiovascular disease.

Who Can Be Affected by Air Pollution?

Of course, everyone can be affected by bad air pollution, both children and adults. The following are categories that are most vulnerable to the effects of air pollution.

1. People who have heart disease, congestive heart failure, asthma sufferers, coronary artery disease, and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD).
2. Pregnant women.
3. Older people.
4. Children, both those who are still toddlers and children who are under 15 years of age.
5. People who work outdoors, including athletes, office workers and other professionals.

Sinaumed’s, that’s a brief explanation about air pollution and how to deal with air pollution that can be done. Don’t take for granted the quality of the air you breathe everyday, okay, #FriendsWithoutLimits. Because air is an important element that can affect your health and determine the quality of life now and in the future.

To understand more about how to deal with air pollution , you can read books that provide related material at sinaumedia.com so that you have #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Nurul Ismi Humairoh

Also read:

For those of you who often make scrapings, there are some unique facts about scrapings that you need to pay attention to. Kerokan itself is a way to cure various diseases that most Indonesians like very much, especially colds.

Symptoms of a cold can be marked by body aches, flatulence, nausea, dizziness, and even the flu.

How to do scrapings can be said to be quite easy, namely by scratching while pressing the surface of the skin using a metal object or a blunt object, such as coins, spoons, garlic, even jade.

This treatment is actually a way of healing that has been passed down from generation to generation and has been practiced since ancient kingdoms.

As the times progressed, kerokan was added with oil as a lubricant. In ancient times, scrapings were done by rubbing the skin and a blunt object directly.

Now, there are various types of oil that can be used as lubricants so they don’t cause abrasions or cuts to the skin and have a more pleasant effect than scraping.

Some of the oils used by Indonesians are telon oil, coconut oil, and even olive oil. If at the time after scraping, red streaks appear on the surface of the skin, it could be a symptom of a cold.

Some people also think that the redder the scrapings are, the more wind that comes out of the body. Not only is it believed to expel wind in the body, scraping is also believed to be able to refresh the body.

Well, this article will explain some unique facts about scrapings. In addition, we will also discuss based on a health science perspective regarding the impact it has on the body. The following are seven unique facts about scrapings that you need to know, including:

A. Unique Facts of Kerokan

1. Scraping is an application of Albert Einstein’s formula

The unique facts of the first scrapings from scrapings are certainly not widely known by many people. Conceptually, scraping is a form of application of the theory coined by the world-renowned physicist, Albert Einstein.

Albert Einstein’s theory is e = mc2. The formula can be understood that every time there is friction produced by two objects, it will form a certain energy.

In the case of scraping, the friction between two objects, namely the skin and the object, can generate heat energy. Of course, the impact of this friction can make the body hotter due to the swelling effect.

This is what makes many people ask whether our ancestors realized this theoretical principle when doing scrapings.

2. Reasons for Scraping on the Back

The second unique fact of kerokan is the reason for the kerokan on the back. We know for ourselves that the most common scrapings are done on the back.

This is of course not without a reason, the back is a part of the body that has quite a large amount of free space. As a result, scraping on the back will make it very easy for people who are doing it.

When studied scientifically, this scraping method has been proven to increase blood circulation throughout the body. The back is one of the parts that contains the nervous system and is directly integrated with the longest blood vessels and spreads throughout the body.

Therefore, for those of you who want to do scrapings, you only need to rub the skin on the eroded back sufficiently. It can already make blood flow smoothly to all other parts of the body.

3. The redder the higher the level of disease

The third unique fact of scrapings is red skin as a sign of the level of disease. For some people who often do scrapings, they must assume that the redder the skin, then it is a sign of a higher level of disease.

Therefore, the more blunt scars there were on the body, the more severe the disease would be. One sign of a high level of disease can be seen when the skin turns purplish-red in color.

However, basically the red color of the skin cannot be used as a barometer of how severe a person’s flu is. Red skin itself is an impact caused because there are blood vessels that are open or broken due to friction.

It could be, the stronger the friction exerted by the metal on the skin, the darker the skin color will be.

4. Open body pores

The fourth unique fact of scraping is that when the body’s pores are open, there is a risk that many bacteria will enter the body. This is because no one can guarantee the cleanliness of the environment.

It could be that with the naked eye an environment is clean, but it could also be that there are actually a lot of invisible people hanging around. Therefore, when doing scrapings, it is better to do it in a clean environment, so as to minimize the presence of bacteria that re-enter the body.

It is known for yourself, the wider the pore holes on the body that are open, the more bacteria will join and enter the body.

Therefore, apart from liking scrapings, many people prefer to get enough rest when they feel a cold. Apart from scrapings, rest and drinking warm drinks can have a good recovery effect on the body.

5. Endorphins increase when scraping

The fifth unique fact of kerokan is the discovery of an increase in endorphins in the body when doing kerokan. This is one of the reasons why many people feel addicted to scrapings.

Based on scientific analysis, the body of a person who has made a scraping can produce natural substances in the body which are commonly called endorphins.

Endorphins themselves can be interpreted as a natural substance that is almost the same as morphine and is able to provide a calm and comfortable effect on the body. This is almost the same as when someone’s body is being massaged.

Well, scrapings can be used as a cheap alternative compared to buying artificial morphine which has quite an impact on the body.

6. Scrapings Cause Premature Birth

The sixth unique fact of scrapings is that scrapings can cause premature birth. As a natural medicine, of course, scrapings without any bad effects, scrapings can be very helpful if done correctly.

However, scrapings can also have quite a worrying impact on pregnant women because they can be one of the causes of premature birth.

When the pores open after scraping, there is a risk of bacteria and viruses that can easily enter the body. However, scrapings are not recommended for pregnant women.

This difference can be seen when people scrape under normal circumstances, then anti-inflammatory substances called “cytokines” can appear and automatically act as an immune enhancer in the human body.

It’s just that this scraping has a different impact on pregnant women. Scrapings can bring out “prostaglandins” when an abrasion occurs. This can be one of the causes of premature contractions that result in premature birth.

7. Not only in Indonesia

The seventh unique fact of kerokan is that it turns out that kerokan is not only done in Indonesia. Although kerokan has often been done by the ancestors of the Indonesian people.

However, it seems that the ancestors of the Indonesian nation also received scraping knowledge from people from other nations. Scraping itself is widely practiced in various countries such as China, Cambodia, Laos, and Vietnam.

The difference lies in the name or term and the tools used for scraping. For example, the Chinese people know kerokan with the term ‘gua sha’, this term is familiar to them to scrape the skin until it turns red using jade.

B. What is Cold?

After discussing some of the unique facts about scrapings, in this section we will start discussing what colds really mean. Even though most Indonesians are very familiar with this disease, colds are not well known in the medical world itself.

A person can be considered having symptoms of a cold if they feel their body condition, such as feeling unwell, chills, chills, headaches, and muscle aches.

However, in some cases, colds can also be considered in a person’s body who has a condition of the body or the body feels warm or has a fever, flatulence, frequent passing of wind and smells, diarrhea, aches, and others.

Therefore, the various symptoms that a person feels as a cold actually have a lot in common with the symptoms of a cold, it’s just that the causes of colds themselves are of course more diverse.

It turns out that when viewed from the medical side, scrapings can indeed have a good impact on health. Coins rubbed on the skin can make your body temperature increase, so that the body becomes warmer. This heated body temperature also causes the blood vessels in the body to widen.

This will improve blood circulation in the body which is also known as oxygenation. Well, if blood circulation is smooth, then the symptoms of colds that you feel can improve. Scrapings can also boost your immune system and immunity.

C. Things to Look For From Scrapings

After knowing the various unique facts about scrapings and symptoms of colds, in this section we will discuss a number of things that need to be considered for those of you who often make scrapings when you have a cold.

For those of you who like to do scrapings and are even addicted to scrapings when the body is not feeling well. You also need to pay attention to the negative effects that can result from frequent scraping. There are two things to note.

First, as stated above, that scraping can cause the skin pores to open. This is of course very vulnerable to be entered by bacteria and viruses. Therefore, those of you who often scrape are expected to do it as needed, if frequency can cause excessive infection.

Then, the second thing that needs to be considered is the wrong diagnosis of the disease. When you feel symptoms of colds such as nausea and vomiting accompanied by chest pain, it’s best to be referred to the hospital immediately. This may not be due to colds, but is a symptom of a heart attack.

In some cases, the symptoms of a heart attack treated with scrapings can result in death. This is what makes a disease called angina sits.

The symptom of wind sitting alone is pain in the chest like being crushed or pressed. Symptoms of angina usually appear when a person is carrying out an activity, that is, when the heart pumps blood faster. Well, if handled properly, people with angina can avoid serious complications.

Book & Article Recommendations Related to Kerokan Unique Facts

7 Types of Warming Up Before Sports – Exercise is an activity that supports one’s health, besides that exercise is also an activity that can produce various benefits for one’s body. Some doctors and experts also always recommend sports activities to get a healthy and fit body.

However, when doing sports there are things that need to be considered so that the body can feel the benefits of exercise. Doing the right moves, is one thing that needs attention. In addition, warming up before exercise is also important.

The reason is if the exercise is done without warming up, it can cause the muscles of the body to be shocked. Instead of being healthy, Sinaumed’s can actually accept risks such as arthritis and cramps when exercising. Therefore, warming up is important to do. Then, what is a good exercise warm-up movement? Read this article to the end to find out the warm-up moves!

7 Types of Warming Up Before Sports

Warming up is an important step that needs to be done before exercising. Warming up needs to be done to avoid injury when doing sports, such as sprains and others.

Apart from avoiding injury, the warm-up is also aimed at maximizing the main sport that Sinaumed’s will be doing. Warming up can also make it easier for the body’s muscles to do strenuous activities.

Here are seven types of warm-up movements that must be done, before exercising.

1. Passive Heating

Passive heating is a type of heating that can be done with a partner. This type of warm-up is done by standing, then leaning the waist against the wall. Then, your partner can lift your leg and stretch your hamstring.

Passive type of heating is useful for reducing muscle fatigue, soreness after exercise so as to prevent muscle spasms.

2. Dynamic Heating

Dynamic warm-ups will require slow control of the feet and hands. When doing a dynamic warm-up, the body parts will move at a speed which then increases gradually and slowly. Increased speed when doing dynamic warm-up, can be done simultaneously or gradually. Do it as comfortable.

3. Static Heating

The third type of heating, is static heating. This one warm-up needs to be done from head to toe and doesn’t involve a lot of movement when it’s done. Static heating is mostly done especially in the process of learning sports at school.

Examples include rotating the head and stretching the legs for 30 seconds. Movement in static warm-up is lighter, and not painful.

4. Insulated Active Heating

In contrast to static warm-ups which are carried out in schools, isolated active warm-ups are commonly carried out by coaches, massage therapists to athletes. Isolated active heating aims to be able to train the muscles of the body, so it can only be done by people who are experts.

An example of an isolated active warm-up is placing your foot on top in a sleeping position, then holding your foot in that position for a few seconds.

5. Ballistic Heating

When performing ballistic warm-ups, the warm-up movements need to be done with care, as they can cause injury. Therefore, ballistic warm-up is only done by athletes and professionals.

Ballistic warm-up, carried out by pushing body parts past the limits of normal movement. Even though it sounds dangerous and must be done with care, this ballistic warm-up has the benefit of being able to make the muscles stretch more so that the movements made during exercise will increase.

6. Isometric Warm Up

Just like the passive warm-up type, isometric warm-up can be done together with a partner. Isometric warm-up is a warm-up that is done by holding the position of the warm-up movement for some time. Isometric warm-up movements can be done with a partner, if you find it difficult to hold certain movements.

An example is lifting your legs high. Your partner needs to help hold the foot up, and the footwork needs to be pressed in the opposite direction.

Isometric warm-up is safe to do without the need for an expert, the purpose of isometric warm-up itself is to strengthen tendons and ligaments, and increase the range of motion in joints.

7. Neuromuscular proprioception

This seventh type of warm-up is a combination of several other types of warm-up, namely passive warm-up, isometric warm-up and static warm-up. Movements in neuromuscular proprioception warm-up need to be carried out simultaneously, so that a person can achieve a high level of muscle flexibility. In accordance with the purpose of this warm-up, the neuromuscular proprioception warm-up is an exercise in flexibility and muscle flexibility.

How to Do a Warm Up Movement 

After knowing the types of warm-up, here’s how to do the right warm-up movements. After that, seven examples of warm-up movements that are commonly done before exercising will also be included.

Warming up needs to be started by walking on the spot. Walking on the spot, can be done using tools such as a treadmill , stationary bicycle or without using any tools.

It should be noted, that walking in place must be started slowly, then continued with brisk walking by increasing the intensity of the speed. Take a brisk walk for five minutes.

Here are four ways to do light warm-up movements before exercising.

• Walk in place for approximately three minutes. Then proceed with the road forward and backward. Move your arms up and down to the rhythm of your feet as you walk in place. Clench your fists, move your arms and bend your elbows as you walk in place.
• Lift one leg by bending the knee about 90 degrees and hold that position for 30 seconds. Make sure your knee can touch the opposite elbow. Then straighten your back, tighten your thighs. Then repeat the same movement on the other leg.
• Do the walk in place accompanied by rolling the shoulders back and forth for a count of eight times. Then repeat the shoulder rotation ten times.
• Stand with feet shoulder-width apart. Then stretch your arms forward, bend your knees and lower your buttocks to thigh level. Hold that position for a few seconds.

After doing these warm-up movements, do not continue with sports. But it’s best to rest first, or cool down with simpler movements. If Sinaumed’s immediately does heavier sports movements, then he is wary of injury. Because the muscles are still not hot to be able to do sports.

To make it clearer, here are examples of warm-up movements that can be done without using tools, but can still make the muscles hotter to be able to prepare for the next exercise movement.

5 Books That Make Your Life Healthier

1. Healthy Living Series: 40 Ways To Keep Your Brain Sharp, Maintaining Brain Health To Maintain Mental Health

2. Healthy Living Series: Tips for a Successful and Long Lived Life

3. Healthy & Fit in the Golden Age

4. Healthy Living Series: Healthy Ala Heaven (FC)

5. 50 Healthy Tips to Ward Off Disease with Exercise

7 examples of warm-up movements that must be done before sports

Here are seven warm-up movements that must be done before exercising, in order to prevent injury.

1. Head Swirling

Warming up by turning the head is the first warm-up movement, which needs to be done before starting sports activities. This is because, it is better if the warm-up movement is done from the top or head then to the bottom to the feet.

To be able to do a head turn, Sinaumed’s needs to position his body in an upright position. Then face your head forward. After making sure the body and head are in the right condition, then slowly turn your head to the left for eight turns.

Then, still in the same body position, turn your head to the right eight times. Do a rotating motion of your head slowly, so that when you warm up, Sinaumed’s won’t get dizzy.

2. Rotating Arm

After doing a warm-up movement for the head, the next warm-up movement is a warm-up for the arms. To do the arm rotation, Sinaumed’s needs to be in the same position as the head rotation.

Then extend both hands and rotate both arms inward ten times, then rotate the arms outward ten times as well.

3. Rotating Shoulders and Wrists

After stretching the arms, the next warm-up is stretching by rotating the shoulders and wrists. The method is still the same, namely by positioning the body and head facing forward. Then do the first shoulder stretch by rotating your shoulders, in and out for eight rotations.

Then rotate your wrist, in and out eight times. Do both of these warm-up movements, slowly and gradually.

4. Turning the Waist

Stay in the same body position, place both hands on the waist. Then turn the waist clockwise, eight times. Then rotate the waist again in the opposite direction with the same number of turns as before.

5. Leg Lifts

After finishing stretching from head to waist, or the upper part of the body, the next step is to warm up from the waist down.

Warming the body down can be done from the feet, to prevent injury to the knees when exercising. The trick is to lift the right leg with the knee bent. Then hold the leg in that position for a few counts. Then, lift your left leg in the same position you raised your right leg. Hold the leg position for a few seconds.

Then do the next leg movement, namely by lifting the right and left legs and bending the legs backwards. Do this movement, alternately, and hold the leg position for a few seconds.

6. Rotating Legs

The warm-up movement for the lower body is to rotate the legs. Spread your legs, then take a tiptoe position on one leg. Rotate the foot that is in the tiptoe position clockwise, for a few seconds it can be eight or ten.

When the circular movement of the foot on one leg has been completed, then do the circular movement of the foot on the other leg in the same way and the same number of counts.

7. Jump

The last warm-up movement is to do jumps. Position your body straight ahead, and spread your feet shoulder-width apart. Then jump ten times, at a moderate pace and don’t rush.

Now besides the seven examples of warm-up movements from the top of the head to the bottom, there is also a warm-up movement called side lunges which move the lower part of the body. The side lunge warm-up movement can make the buttocks, thighs and calves muscles more relaxed to do sports.

To be able to do side lunges, Sinaumed’s can push the body to the left and keep pushing until the left knee is bent. Then, straighten your right leg and hold that position for 10 to 15 seconds. Repeat side lunges eight times for each side of the body.

The Benefits of Warming Up Before Sports

After knowing the seven types of warm-up, how to warm up to examples of warm-up movements, Sinaumed’s needs to know what are the benefits of warming up before exercising?

The main benefit is of course being able to reduce the risk of injury when going to do sports. Not only that, heating and stretching also has other benefits too. Here’s an explanation.

1. Increase muscle flexibility

Warming up before exercise can increase muscle flexibility. Muscles and a more flexible body will make it easier for the body to move when carrying out heavier sports movements.

2. Lower the risk of injury

As explained above, the main purpose of warming up is to reduce the risk of injury when carrying out strenuous sports movements. Warming up can make muscles and joints more flexible, so when doing intense sports movements, muscles and bones will easily adjust to the state of the muscles that are no longer tense.

3. Increase blood flow

Warming can increase blood flow and oxygen in the body. Blood flow contains both nutrients and oxygen, so of course it is very much needed by the body, especially when exercising which has intense movements.

4. Improve body performance

Warming up can improve body performance. Increased body performance can make the exercise done more optimally. So, the body can also receive the benefits of exercise.

5. Reduced muscle soreness

Muscle pain after intense sports movements can be reduced. Warming up can make the muscles relax, so that when doing sports movements the body becomes more flexible. On the other hand, if you don’t warm up before exercising, stiff muscles will make your muscles feel more painful. Especially after exercising.

6. Keep the heart more stable

Warming up can keep your heart rate more stable. The sixth benefit is also the purpose of warming up so that the heart and blood vessel systems can improve slowly and are not surprised by sudden intense movements.

7. Maintain joint and bone health

Warming up can be beneficial for improving work and sports performance and increasing joint range of motion. Warming up will also provide the body with a ‘lubricating’ fluid so that the joints become more flexible when exercising.

Those are the seven benefits that can be obtained through warming up before exercising.

Sinaumed’s can find out more about heating, such as the definition of heating which has not been explained in this article. Or dig deeper about the types of heating besides the seven types that have been described.

To be able to dig deeper about heating, Sinaumed’s can read and of course buy books related to heating at sinaumedia.com. Apart from books on sports topics, Sinaumed’s can also buy books on other interesting topics at sinaumedia, because as #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia will always provide interesting and quality reference books for Sinaumed’s. Read and buy the book right now!

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Drama script is one of the literary works that is rarely known by many people. Because, someone might know more after the performance than the drama script itself. Then, what is a drama script?

This article will discuss about drama scripts. Starting from the definition, types, characteristics, elements to examples of short drama scripts.

Definition of Dramatic Script

In general, a manuscript is something that has a sheet-like shape. Before use, the sheet needs to be corrected. Understanding the script will also explain the theme and content that can be accepted by the audience.

In general, a play script is a piece of writing. The writing is usually or generally known by everyone involved in the field of writing. Drama scripts have a function in several ways.

Such as reading material, as text in the world of cinema, as science, and much more.

Understanding the drama script itself is a story that is described. The story is outlined from one scene to another. In the story, it is also explained regarding the setting, place, situation, dialogue, to the characterizations in it.

The writing on the manuscript will be arranged systematically. That is, the writing will be arranged in the context of a dramatic structure. This will make it a reference during the production process.

Drama scripts can also be referred to as the basic material of a story. Both stories that will be shown in films, as well as stories that will be shown in a drama or theater performance. Generally, play scripts will be very dramatic.

In it will display several things. Such as places, settings, conditions or circumstances, the dialogue of the characters and so forth. Things like that of course have to be in a drama script, so that it becomes a complete script.

Meanwhile, in the publishing world, drama scripts are the result of someone’s writing or writing. Usually, the play script has not been published. Various drama scripts by this writer will be sought after by publishers.

Publishers will look for writers to write plays. The goal is to be published. A drama script can be written by hand or using a tool such as a typewriter. If an author has finished writing a manuscript, the manuscript will be submitted to the editor.

In the hands of the editor, the manuscript will be edited and checked again for its quality. Only then can it be published.

Definition of Drama Script According to Experts

Even though it basically has the same meaning, there are several aspects of the abbreviation that certainly differ from one expert to another. The following is the meaning of drama script according to experts.

1. KBBI (Big Indonesian Dictionary)

In KBBI, a manuscript is an essay that is still handwritten. In addition, the manuscript also means an essay written by someone who has not yet been published.

2. Molton

Molton revealed, the meaning of the script is a drama. Understanding the script according to Molton is a living drama. The drama is described through a motion or life presented in action.

3. Sendarastic

The definition of a script according to Sendarasik is there a drama script. The script is the basic ingredient in a performance. Therefore, a drama script is not perfect if it has not been staged.

Drama script is an expression of the author’s statement. Can be called a playwright which has content about the value of general experience. The value in the drama script will explain the statement that the writer said to those who watched.

4. Imam Suryano

The script is a drama that contains actions and deeds. These actions and actions explain a problem faced by the characters in the script.

Imam Suryono’s opinion is focused on the drama script which is used as the basis for staging plays in the theater. Drama script is a very important element in building a drama, so that it can be played well by the actors such as actors or actresses who will present the drama script.

5. Bared

The definition of a script is a drama script in the form of handwriting. The writing contains various expressions about thoughts and feelings. Generally, everything written in it is a culture in the past.

6. Ferdinand Brunetierre

Manuscript is an art that describes several things. Like describing human nature and attitude. The painting is done through the movements that appear in the drama which plays out the contents of the story script.

Types of Dramatic Scripts

1. Tragedy

The type of tragedy drama script is a drama script that tells a story filled with sadness. Throughout the story, you will witness the main character or actor who suffers. Generally, these characters will experience death.

2. Comedy

Comedy is a type of drama script. This drama script will describe a joyful atmosphere. Generally, in this play script will contain jokes.

Janis’s drama script is one of the most popular drama scripts. The reason is, in it will make the readers laugh because of the humorous story of this script.

Even so, the skit script is not like a regular comedy show. It still contains rules and elements of drama in general.

3. Opera

The next type of drama script is opera. Opera is a drama script in which music is accompanied. The song that will be played by one character is different from the song that will be played by another character.

The form of this script will be more concerned with the music and singing when it is staged later. Meanwhile, the characters involved will only act as a means to describe the atmosphere in the story.

4. Melodrama

Melodrama is a type of drama script in which the dialogue will be made with musical accompaniment or melody. This type of drama script comes from opera drama. Then developed into a stream that stands alone.

The flow of this melodrama will be accompanied by musical instruments. So, in staging this drama script, the characters will generally sing along. If necessary, they will also dance to the rhythm of the music.

5. Farces

Farce can also be called a joke. This type of drama script is a type of drama that is funny and light. The scenes in this drama script are generally exaggerated with comedy.

In addition, this comedy drama script also involves physics. Drama scripts of this type are generally known as dime comedy.

6. Tableau

The tableau drama script that will be staged will prioritize an appearance. Appearances such as aspects of dance and movement aspects will be seen in the staging of tableau drama scripts.

The players will make a movement, throughout the staging. The cast of this drama script does not speak any dialogue at all.

So, the players will tell the story through the audience, with a movement. However, the movements carried out have many meanings in them.

7. Ballet

Sendratari is a type of drama script that combines two things. These two things are dance and drama. This ballet will prioritize the movements performed as expression boosters.

The movement was carried out as a substitute for a dialogue. In Indonesia alone, ballet is widely used. Generally, its use is used to tell a legendary story. Like the story of Ramayana who wants to save Dewi Sinta.

Dramatic Script Elements

• Has a special theme.
• Have a background. Such as the setting of time, setting of place and background of the atmosphere.
• There are characters and characterizations.
• Has a storyline in it.
• Have a message and impression that will be conveyed to the reader.

Characteristics of a Dramatic Script

• Dialog form
• All dialogue is unquoted
• Have action instructions in the play script written in parentheses

Example of a Dramatic Script

In class 10 high school history lessons are taking place.

Mrs. Ratna: Children, make groups of 4 people, then present the history of Indonesia’s independence from Dutch colonialism to independence!

Student : Yes ma’am

(Bu Ratna leaves the class, and the students start discussing the group’s assignment.)

Sinta: Lis, let’s join Rima’s group! Rima is smart, surely our task will be completed quickly.

Lisa: That’s right Sin, let’s go to Rima!” Sinta: “Rima, me and Lisa are in your group, okay?

Rima: Yes Lis, Sin, I just happen to be alone with Nita.

Nita: Next Sunday we will do our homework at school, okay? Do you have any suggestions for dividing up the tasks?

Lisa and Sinta: It’s up to you guys, we’ll join you.

Rima: I can collect material about the wars in the struggle for independence.

Nita: I can collect materials about agreements and meetings in the struggle for independence.

Sinta: Then let me and Lisa make the power point.

Rima: Okay then, see you tomorrow!

(The next day Rima and Nita were at school, but Lisa and Sinta did not come.)

(Suddenly Sinta calls Rima.)

Sinta: Rima, I’m sorry, Lisa and I can’t join the work group because we have an appointment with friends to go to the mall. Just do it together, okay? I’ll pay the printing money later.

Rima: But Sin, you won’t understand the material later.

Sinta: Later you can give the presentation with Nita, don’t worry, it’s just a history lesson.

Rima: But Sin, you turned off Nit’s phone instead. How the heck are we supposed to do it together like that.

Nita: Well what can I do Rim, instead of us getting bad grades too.

(Nita and Rima Pun both worked on the task together until it was finished. The next day the class presentation in front of Mrs. Ratna started. )

Mrs. Ratna: Group 1, Rima, Lisa, Sinta, and Nita, please come forward.

Group 1: Yes, ma’am.

Bu Ratna: Who will be presenting?

Sinta: “Rima and Nita, ma’am.

Mrs. Ratna: If so, please let Sinta and Lisa do the presentation.

Lisa: Why us mom? Those who want to present are Rima and Nita.

Mrs. Ratna: Oh, it’s not the same, you guys are doing it together. Anyone who is presenting is not the same. Let’s get started quickly Lisa, Sinta!

Sinta: So the history of Indonesian independence begins with um… so

Mrs. Ratna: Why Sinta? Lisa, try to continue your presentation.

Lisa: ummm.. so ma’am…

Mrs. Ratna: Why don’t you understand the tasks of your own group? Rima, Nita, is it true that Sinta and Lisa are also doing the work?

Nita: “Actually no ma’am, I just did it alone with Rima because Lisa and Sinta couldn’t come.

Rima: That’s right, Ma’am, during the Sunday group work, Sinta and Lisa couldn’t attend. Mrs. Ratna: Why can’t you attend Sinta, Lisa?

Lisa: How is this Sin?

Sinta: We are sick ma’am, so we can’t come that day.

Mrs. Ratna: Don’t lie to you, I saw you at the mall on Sunday. You should study seriously instead of messing around like this, especially if you just hitch a ride on your group’s assignment. Apologize to Rima and Nita, then don’t do it again or you won’t go to class.

Sinta: I’m sorry Mrs. Ratna, I won’t do it again. I’m sorry, Rima, Nita, I promise I won’t do that again.

Lisa: I’m sorry too, ma’am. Rima, Nita, I’m sorry to you guys. After this I will study hard, I promise.

Those are some brief explanations about the drama script. Starting from the definition, types, characteristics to a simple example of a short drama script.

Find more information at  www.sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always present interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s

• Theory and History of Literature
• Definition of Literature: Types, Functions, and Periodization of the Development of Literature in Indonesia
• Characteristics of Comics and Types and Examples

Padang Traditional Weapons – Does Sinaumed’s know what are the traditional Padang weapons of West Sumatra? Speaking of Padang culture, we cannot be separated from the Minangkabau tribe, which is also famous and is located in the city of Padang, the capital of West Sumatra Province. That is why traditional weapons in Padang also include weapons from the Minang people.

The following is an explanation of the traditional weapons of Padang, West Sumatra, based on the culture of the Minangkabau tribe, which is closely related to the historical values ​​of traditional weapons there:

Getting to Know Traditional Padang Weapons

Weapons are an element of human culture, and their age coincides with the emergence of human civilization. Traditional weapons can also be seen as cultural products that shaped the progress of metallurgical science and technology in the Archipelago in the past. Traditionally shaped weapons are designed to meet human needs.

Traditional societies use weapons to protect themselves from enemy attacks. Guns, on the other hand, are also used to raise and hunt animals to fulfill their food needs. Traditional weapons are dominated by men. This is inseparable from the social culture that adheres to paternal understanding and depictions of male leaders.

That’s why guns seem to be a must for men. For example, in Minangkabau culture, Keris is considered a symbol of male greatness, symbolized by the keris weapon worn by the groom at the time of marriage. The same thing can be seen in the culture of people in various regions in Indonesia.

Included in the culture of the Minang people or we can also call it one of the tribes in the desert of West Sumatra. Minangkabau or Minang is an archipelago ethnic group that speaks and supports traditional Minangkabau values. The Minangkabau tribe is one of the largest and most famous tribes in Indonesia in West Sumatra.

The Minangkabau Cultural Area covers West Sumatra, half of mainland Riau, northern Bengkulu, western Jambi, west coast of North Sumatra, southwest Aceh, and the Negeri Sembilan region, Malaysia. Minang people are often equated and also called Padang people because Padang is the capital city of West Sumatra. However, the Minang people usually refer to their ethnic group as urang crew to refer to the Minang people themselves.

Since pre-Hinduism, the Minangkabau have also introduced a proto-democratic system with a dense cultural development, with the aim of determining important tribal and legal issues. The statement of the Minangkabau tribe is briefly contained in the statement of Adat Basandi Shark (Adat Based on Law, Law Based on the Qur’an), which means that Adat is based on Islamic teachings.

Minangkabau people are also very famous in the field of trade, especially as experts and intellectuals. The Minang people are the most important and respected inheritors of the ancient traditions of the Malay and Sriwijaya Kingdoms, which were once favored by dynamic and commercial activities. Nearly half of all parishioners are abroad.

In Tambo, the system used by the Minangkabau people is said to have been first initiated by two brothers, Datuk Ketuman Galungan and Datuk Perpatih Nan Sebatang. Datuk Ketumanggungan inherited the aristocratic custom of Koto Piliang, and Datuk Perpatih inherited the egalitarian tradition of Bodi Caniago.

Throughout the Minangkabau tribe, the two customary systems are known to be compatible and complement each other, forming a Minangkabau social system. The Minang tribe has three pillars that develop and maintain the integrity of Minan culture and customs. The three pillars are Ninik Mamak who is also known as Alim Ulama, Clever Clever, and Furnace Tigo Sajarangan.

The three pillars complement each other and stand side by side at the same height. In a democratic and egalitarian Minangkabau society, all public affairs are discussed by consensus among these three elements.

Until now, Minangkabau society is the largest matrilineal society in the world. The maternal line itself is one of the main aspects in identifying the identity of the Minangkabau people. The customs and culture of the Minan people regard women as inheritors of inheritance and relatives. That is why there are many cultures in the Minang tribe, including their traditional weapons which are also very popular.

7 Deadly Traditional Padang Weapons

The following is a list of the types of traditional weapons from Padang, West Sumatra, that Sinaumed’s needs to know.

1. Ruduih

Minangkabau culture has very interesting characteristics compared to other cultures in Sumatra. Of course there are many unique and interesting things in the Minang tribe. This extends to wedding customs, traveling culture, including the traditional weapon, namely ruduih which is a traditional Padang weapon similar to a machete from Minang culture in West Sumatra.

This weapon has a function as a weapon used to fight on the battlefield. On the other hand, for hunting weapons other than blowguns. Does Sinaumed’s know the current location of the magic weapon? Yes, Ruduih’s weapon is now in the Tridaya Eka Dharma Museum of Struggle and is recorded as a weapon used in the Manggopoh War before 1908.

The 1980 Mangopo War occurred on June 15, 1908. The war broke out from the wrath of the Ninik Mamak people, religious scholars, scholars, and the Kanagari community from Mangopo in Lubuk Basung sub-district, Agam Regency, West Sumatra. The actions taken by the Dutch soldiers are believed to uphold the noble values ​​of Minangkabau customs and culture and violate the Minangkabau people’s customs which are outside the bounds of decency.

From the existing literature, several sources state that this ruduih weapon is similar to the Kelewang weapon. The shape of this weapon resembles a sword with a sharp blade on one side. There are some differences between them. If the Kerewan weapon has a sharp and straight blade, the Ruduih weapon has a sharp edge that tends to convex inwards.

The form of the sword attacks the enemy more deadly. So do not be surprised if this weapon is often used by royal soldiers when fighting against the Dutch army in the Manggopoh war in 1908.

2. Kerambit

The Karambit weapon is a small knife with a curved shape. Karambit is also one of the traditional weapons of Padang, West Sumatra and is used as one of the deadliest weapons in the world. Although Karambit is small, it turns out to be very dangerous because it can tear or damage the opponent’s limbs.

Apart from that, surprisingly, this Karambit weapon can quickly immobilize enemies, but is undetectable. The Karambit weapon itself comes from Minangkabau and was then spread by Minangkabau migrants to various areas such as Java on the Malay Peninsula. The shape of the traditional Kerambit weapon is very unique because it is inspired by the many claws of tigers that roam the forests of Sumatra.

After people saw tigers fighting with their claws, they started to create the initial concept of the Kerambit weapon. This is of course one of the Minangkabau philosophies, known as “Alam Takambang Jadi Guru”. The function of the Karambit Weapon in most areas is as an agricultural tool such as the following uses:

• Root cleaning
• Gathering rice stalks
• Collecting threshing rice

But especially for this traditional Padang weapon, it is made more curved after the Minang people saw a tiger fighting with its hooves. This traditional weapon is also one of the main silat weapons used in martial arts. In other words, the more popular the martial art of Pencak silat, the more familiar it is with this Kerambit knife.

Currently, this weapon is being developed by European-American countries with many types and varieties. In Indonesia itself, Kerambit is still used by wrestlers, especially the Minangkabau tiger silat in Sumatran pencak silat. Traditional Karambit Weapons can be divided into two variations: Kerambit in West Java and Kerambi Minangkabau. Karambit in West Java usually has a rounded bow, while Karambit Minang has an angled bow.

3. Klewang Padang

The Klewang weapon is a traditional Minangkabau weapon, in the form of a one-sided machete, which has a heavy pedestal in the middle. Klewang weapons usually have a sharp eye shape, but also curved. In ancient times, this weapon was used as the main weapon of the Padri troops in the 19th century West Sumatra war.

This incident was seen by Padri officers very quickly at the Klewang Arms during the battle. Although used as the main weapon of war, Klewang is often used for agricultural activities. Weapons that had previously spread to the public ranged from hilts giving off a dragon shape to scabbards made of striped motifs.

4. Career

Karih is a stabbing weapon like a dagger, with the same point on both sides. The shape is very distinctive and can be easily distinguished from other types of weapons. Karih is asymmetrical, spreading at the base and tapering upwards. The blade is more dominantly curved to form a typical Minangkabau art.

Given the history of Kaliminan in West Sumatra, it has been used as a weapon of war and to protect it from enemy attacks when leaving home since the beginning. In addition, another function of this weapon is to provide kitchen equipment. This tool used to be multi-purpose for the Minang people throughout their lives.

Another feature is the shape of the potash, the scabbard of which is beautifully carved with various motifs. Likewise with the stem or ulunya. The main color is dark brown or light brown, similar to the inner skin color. As time progressed, the Karih weapon stopped functioning as a personal protective equipment and kitchen utensil, but its presence approached various traditional ceremonies and cultural celebrations of the Minang Empire.

Traditional weapons from Padang, West Sumatra, are usually used by traditional leaders, lobbyists, religious leaders, traditional owners or sako, and others. Minang Karih is not only worn by traditional leaders, but also as an accessory for the groom at a wedding reception. Karih is placed on the front right hip with the sarong.

The presence of this traditional West Sumatran weapon is also a characteristic of the Minang people wherever they are. From a symbolic point of view, the weapon of Karih acts as a judge, that is, as a mediator of disputes and disputes within the clan and Nagari. In addition, when the career is held upright it forms the character Arif in Arabic.

This symbolizes the teaching of monotheism about the existence of Allah SWT. As quoted from Julfian Azrael’s book “Becoming Pangul”, the meaning of Minang Karih is said to be both physical and spiritual. The outside means the scroll symbolizes the relationship between Pel and her nephew. This can be identified from the shape of the ulu or stalk of the career.

The inner meaning is the main source of teachings for the heirs of Sako or applicants for the position of Minangkabau leader. Several parts of this Minang Keris, namely Ulu, Punting and Tali, symbolize the three Minang customary systems: the Sambah Manyambah custom, the Baso Jo basi custom and the Siriah jo pinang custom.

At first glance, for those who see this Minang Karih weapon for the first time, they will definitely think that it is a Keris, because when Karih is put into the sheath or sheath it really looks like the keris weapons that are commonly found in Java. The Karih weapon has also been registered with UNESCO as one of the World Cultural Heritage Intangible Humans which was established in 2005.

5. Pirik

The Piarit weapon is a traditional weapon from Padang, West Sumatra, in the form of a spear with three sharp eyes. Apart from West Sumatra, it is also widely used in other areas such as South Sumatra and is commonly called the Trisula weapon. In shape, this weapon resembles the main weapon of the Hindu god Shiva.

Because in ancient times, before Islam entered West Sumatra, especially in the Padang area, they still adhered to Hinduism. The people of West Sumatra often hunt large animals using this traditional Piarik weapon as a handle.

6. Chopsticks

Chopsticks or blowguns are also used in West Sumatra and are used in hunting and field combat to attack long distances. The advantage of this traditional weapon from Padang, West Sumatra is that it can provide firepower with an accuracy of up to 200 meters. The blowpipe is not only used as a traditional weapon in West Sumatra, but also by the Dayak people in Kalimantan.

The function of this traditional weapon is still the same as that used for hunting animals and is made naturally so it doesn’t damage nature. As a cultural heritage of their ancestors, the Minangkabau people still preserve the blowpipe as a traditional weapon. The shape of the chopsticks is usually in the form of a small tube which allows the small arrows that are fired to shoot far into the target.

This is a traditional weapon of West Sumatra and is still preserved by the Minangkabau people until now. How proud they are with their traditional weapons, so that traditional weapons are still well preserved today. Not surprisingly, every region needs to preserve traditional weapons as regional heritage and enrich the nation’s culture.

7. Minangkabau Heritage Keris

The Minangkabau heritage keris is a special keris that can only be worn by traditional rulers on the waist on certain occasions. The Minangkabau Heritage Keris is always milled left and right. This means that Pengle can give justice to everyone, prosecute them, and ensure justice.

This heirloom keris is not used in all traditional rituals. Usage must also be taken into account. That is, the keris eye is on the left, not on the right. This is interpreted as an attitude that Pengle must always be careful and think before speaking or acting.

This traditional weapon from Padang, West Sumatra, is a symbol of greatness. Customary leaders can always be relied upon, whether the Minangkabau people are happy or sad. In conclusion, we still need to maintain and preserve local culture. The Minangkabau people set an excellent example for all of us by preserving the noble heritage of their ancestors.

So, that’s an explanation of the traditional weapons of Padang, West Sumatra, or what we might call Minangkabau traditional weapons. If sinaumedia is interested in learning Padang culture, you can access sinaumedia’s books at www.sinaumedia.com . As #Friends Without Limits, sinaumedia will always provide the best products, so that Sinaumed’s can have #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Lala

Traditional Dance of the People of Papua – Papua has succeeded in attracting domestic and foreign tourists with its natural beauty. Not only presenting its natural charm, Papua also has traditional arts and culture that can attract the attention of tourists, one of which is in the form of traditional dances.

Papuan traditional dances are a national asset in the field of Nusantara art. When compared to other traditional dances throughout the archipelago, traditional dances in Papua have unique characteristics. This is because dances from the eastern part of Indonesia present a number of meanings that are closely related to everyday life, namely to express emotions and local culture.

The traditional dances of the Papuan people can be said to be a reflection of identity that must be understood by everyone, not just residents who live in the Papua region.

So, what are the traditional dances from Papua? In the following, an explanation will be presented of several traditional Papuan dances and the unique facts behind them, taken from the Indonesian Cultural Digital Library website managed by the Ministry of Education, Culture, Research and Technology.

1. Soanggi Dance

The first traditional dance of the people of Papua, namely the Soanggi Dance, is a traditional dance originating from the Cendrawasih Bay coastal area, Waropen Regency, West Papua Province. The initial existence of the Soanggi dance is not very clear, but this dance is a form of expression for the people of West Papua which is still thick with magical nuances. The dance originates from the story of a husband whose wife died as a result of being attacked by a creature called anggi-anggi or soanggi (invention), in Java it is usually called memedi .

According to local people’s beliefs, soanggi is an evil spirit that has not found comfort in the afterlife. The evil spirit will usually possess a woman’s body. If the victim has been attacked, the tribal chiefs will immediately find out what soanggi has harmed the victim as a precaution.

The thickness of this magical nuance is then realized into the Soanggi dance which is known today. Before the dancers start dancing, they must first perform a ritual led by the tribal chief.

This dance is performed by dozens of male dancers and a person who acts as a leader armed with a shield and machete. They wore tassels as a lower body cover. The dance is described as a war between residents armed with bows and arrows and a soanggi . In that war, soanggi can be the winning side.

The movements in the dance function to expel evil spirits that are still bound by promises and have not been fulfilled. Every movement made in this dance is more like the activity of a shaman or someone who has magical powers that will cure a disease.

The clothing worn by the dancers uses traditional West Papuan clothing. The accompaniment of this dance uses drums and shell trumpets, as well as the songs performed by the dancers. This dance is only shown when a resident dies, not for a public performance or art performance.

2. Awaijale Rilejale Dance

The second traditional dance of the people of Papua, namely the Awaijale Rilejale Dance, is a traditional dance typical of the Sentani tribe who live in the Sentani District, Jayapura Regency, Papua Province. This dance depicts the natural beauty of Lake Sentani at dusk, when residents return from work by boat.

This dance is performed by a group of men and women. When performing the dance, they wear traditional clothes called Pea Malo. The clothing is made of genemo tree fiber, bark, and sago leaves, and is complemented by hamboni (beaded necklace) jewelry.

3. Aluyen Dance

The third traditional dance of the Papuan people, namely the Aluyen Dance, is a traditional dance originating from the Aimas District, Sorong Regency, West Papua Province. The mention of the name Aluyen dance comes from two syllables, namely alu which means “song” and yen which means “to sing”. Overall, this dance means “a song that is sung”. The initial existence of this dance has existed since Indonesia was not yet independent.

Aluyen dance is a traditional dance that is usually performed as part of a traditional ceremony, namely building a new house and opening a new garden. The dance can be performed during the day or night. However, if it is held in a traditional house, the show can last 1–2 months.

This dance is performed by men and women, as well as a person who acts as a leader. The leader of the dance stands in front of the other dancers, followed by female and male dancers in two rows extending backwards.

In general, the basic movement of this dance is a free walking style according to the rhythm while swaying the hips (in the local language it is called awlete, which means the motion of the hips swaying). The clothes worn in this dance are called kamlanan , a type of cloth from the local area.

Until now, the variety of clothing and dance accessories has not changed much, both male and female dancers. Accessories used include bracelets made of li (beads), saika (silver bracelets), medik (bracelets made of a certain type of string), and eme (jewelry made of yellow or red pandan leaves).

4. Det Pok Mbui Dance

The fourth traditional dance of the Papuan people, namely the Det Pok Mbui Dance, is a traditional dance originating from three sub-districts in Merauke Regency, Papua Province, namely Agats, Sauwa Ema, and Pirimapun. The initial existence of this dance has existed since Indonesia was not yet independent. The mention of the name Det Pok Mbui dance comes from two syllables, namely det which means “a devil-like mask” and pok mbui which means “party” or “ceremony”. Overall, this dance has the meaning of “demon masquerade ceremony”.

This dance is performed by a group of men and women in the afternoon or evening after harvesting sago, with a duration of 2–4 hours. Generally, this dance is performed on the banks of the river because there is a boat ride scene.

The arrangement in the Det Pok Mbui dance, namely the traditional leader or ceremonial leader stands in the middle of the arena, then calls the dancers with fu or tifa as a sign that the dance will begin soon; the dancers or ceremony participants then gather on the stage.

The accompaniment of this dance uses the musical instruments tifa and fu (bamboo horn), while the accompaniment song that is sung is jipai so (demon or spirit). For dance movements include jiwi-ndil (movement of the hips), a-ndi (movement of the buttocks), and ban-ndi (movement of the limbs).

When performing the dance, the dancers decorate their faces and bodies with charcoal and lime. The clothing worn by the male dancers is a skirt made of cassowary feathers, while the female dancers wear a dress called awer (grass skirt). The dancer’s accessories include anklets, wristbands and armlets, while the neck is decorated with necklaces made of dog teeth, pig fangs or beads.

5. Afaitaneng Dance

The fifth traditional dance of the people of Papua, namely the Afaitaneng Dance, is a traditional dance originating from the Ambai Islands District, Yapen Islands Regency, West Papua Province. The initial existence of this dance has existed since Indonesia was not yet independent. This dance is included in traditional dances related to heroism. The mention of the name of the Afaitaneng dance comes from two syllables, namely afai which means “arrow” and taneng which means “belonging”. Overall, this dance means “our arrows”.

The dance is generally performed all night during the afternoon or evening after war. The dance depicts the greatness, strength, and victory of the war troupe against the enemy armed with bows.

The Afaitaneng dance is performed in groups by male and female dancers by forming a circle or line formation. The composition of this dance is divided into three parts, namely a group of female dancers mourning the corpses of slaves in the first part, a group of male dancers showing their prowess in archery in the second part, and a mixed group of dancers celebrating the victory over the enemy in the third part.

The clothing worn by the dancers is kuwai (loincloth), which is decorated with beads and bracelet jewelry. The dancers also bring additional accessories in the form of afai (arrows) and umbee (machetes). The accompaniment of this dance uses the fikainotu (tifa) and tibura (triton) musical instruments , while the accompaniment song that is sung is nimasae .

6. Aniri Dance

So, that’s a brief explanation of the 7 Traditional Dances of the People of Papua and West Papua: Facts and Explanations. These dances generally fade away with the times. For this reason, friends of Sinaumed’s, let us protect and preserve the culture of our ancestors together. Do not let us lose to cultures from outside Indonesia which are now better known globally, such as Anime, Korean Pop, and Gangnam Style Dance.

Sinaumed’s can also visit sinaumedia’s book collection at www.sinaumedia.com to obtain references on social conditions in Papua and West Papua. The following are recommendations for sinaumedia books that Sinaumed’s can read to study them in full. Happy reading.

Find other interesting things at www.sinaumedia.com. sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always present interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

Book & Article Recommendations Related to Traditional Papuan Dance

Author: Fandy Aprianto Rohman

Traditional Clothing of South Sulawesi – Indonesia is a country consisting of various islands. Where the islands in Indonesia also consist of various kinds of their own regions. Every region in Indonesia has its own diversity.

For example, the matter of traditional clothing that is owned by one region to another is so different. Each difference in traditional clothing can also become the identity of each region.

So, in this article, we will specifically discuss the traditional clothes of South Sulawesi, which in South Sulawesi itself has more than two traditional clothes. Each South Sulawesi traditional dress has its own uniqueness. So that you also understand more, here is an explanation of the traditional clothes of South Sulawesi.

South Sulawesi Traditional Clothing

1. Stupid clothes

Bodo clothes are one of the traditional clothes of South Sulawesi. Which is more precise Bodo clothes are traditional clothes native to the Bugis tribe. Bodo clothes are also included in the row of the oldest traditional clothes in the world.

Investigate a calibaration it turns out that the people of South Sulawesi have been wearing Bodo clothes since the 9th century. At the beginning of its appearance, Bodo clothes were made using a cloth that was quite transparent. However, when Islam began to enter Bugis land, the existence of Bodo clothes was modified using thicker materials.

Bodo clothes are traditional clothes that are specifically made to be worn by women, which, judging from the design, Bodo clothes have quite a unique shape. The uniqueness lies in the rectangular shape combined with the short sleeves.

Apart from that, the colors of Bodo clothes also have such beautiful diversity and their blends. The variety of colors in Bodo clothes is a symbol of the age and status of each wearer. For example, the Bodo shirt with green color is used as a symbol if the woman wearing it comes from the nobility.

Then, for Bodo clothes with white color it means if the wearer of the traditional clothes comes from a shaman or helper. The purple color on Bodo’s clothes is a symbol if the wearer is a widow.

Meanwhile, the orange color on Bodo’s shirt gives a meaning if the woman wearing it is 10 years old. For Bodo clothes in red, it shows that the woman wearing it is 17 years old.

Bodo clothes are made from Muslim fabrics. Which Muslim cloth is a cloth made by spinning cotton and then it will be sewn together with cotton cloth. This will make Bodo wearers always feel comfortable.

To support the comfortable feeling of the wearer of the traditional clothes, the Bodo clothes will be made looser with the thread cavities which are also made quite tenuous. Usually wearing Bodo clothes will be paired with the use of a sarong with a checkered pattern on the bottom.

The way to wear a Bodo shirt is by rolling it with your left hand. Bodo clothes are also equipped with a variety of additional accessories. For example, such as rings, gold headbands, bracelets and also metal pieces. These accessories are usually made of gilded gold or metal.

2. Labbu clothes

The next South Sulawesi traditional dress is the Labbu shirt. Where this traditional dress is made specifically for use on women. In the past, the existence of Labbu clothes was only used by noble women in the kingdom of Luwu.

Even though in the past, Labbu clothes were worn specifically by women from the nobility. But for now, Labbu clothes can be used by all women from all walks of life. Usually Labbu clothes will be worn by women when attending traditional ceremonies or when attending wedding ceremonies.

This South Sulawesi traditional clothing also has a uniqueness which lies in the shape of the design. Where on the sleeves of Labbu’s clothes are made quite tight with an elongated shape. As for the cloth used to make traditional South Sulawesi clothing, it is a thin silk cloth.

Meanwhile, to complement Labbu’s bottoms, he will use a lipa’ sarong. Not only that, currently the existence of Labbu clothes also has various motifs. For example, there are floral patterns on the chest and sleeves of Labbu’s clothes.

3. Tutu Dress

The Tutu shirt is one of the next South Sulawesi traditional clothes. Tutu clothes are made specifically to be worn by men. This South Sulawesi traditional dress is in the form of a suit.

When worn, the Tutu shirt will be combined with the use of a chest defense shirt. In addition, the use of a Tutu shirt will also be worn along with the use of pants and sarongs and lipa’ garusuk.

For the head, the men will use the songkok recca which is so unique and also different from the usual songkok where the songkok recca has a gold motif on the side. The existence of the gold motif is also a sign of nobility status.

Then for the shape of the tutu jacket it has long sleeves and the collar will be decorated with buttons made of gold or silver. The collar will later be attached to the neck of the Tutu shirt. This of course will make the existence of the Tutu shirt look so charming than before it was given a touch of the collar.

Then for the lipa cloth or the sarong part, you will use plain cloth but have quite striking colors, such as red or green. Bodo clothes and Bugis tutu clothes were previously only worn in various important ceremonies such as weddings.

But for now the existence of the Tutu shirt has undergone many modifications so that it can be used in any activity. In fact, not infrequently we can also find Tutu clothes when there are dance competitions or welcoming guests of honor.

4. Pokko clothes

Furthermore, there is the Pokko shirt which is also included in one of the traditional clothes of South Sulawesi. Where Pokko clothes come from the Toraja tribe which are made specifically to be worn by women. The Pokko shirt is a short-sleeved shirt with a striking color

The colors of the Pokko clothes are usually yellow, red and also white which are the colors that are characteristic of the South Sulawesi Pokko clothes. The existence of Pokko clothes is often used with additional accessories such as jewelry or beads.

These beads will later be placed on the chest and use additional bracelets and headbands or belts which are commonly called kandure. Pokko clothes are usually only used when there is an official event.

5. Seppa Tallung shirt

The Seppa Tallung shirt is one of the traditional clothes of South Sulawesi where the Seppa Tallung shirt is made specifically to be worn by men from the Toraja tribe. Where this traditional dress has a length that reaches the knee.

The use of Seppa Tallung clothes will usually be worn together with additional accessories such as lipa, gayang and others. The existence of the Seppa Tallung shirt became even more famous when it was worn at the Manhunt International 2022 event in South Korea.

Apart from that, the Seppa Tallung shirt also has uniqueness, such as color and the presence of distinctive accessories from the Toraja tribe which can give a very positive impression to those who wear it.

During the performance, Seppa Tallung’s clothes were shown to have undergone modifications. For example, there are many additional accessories in Seppa Tallung’s clothes, such as wings and horns. This will make the existence of Seppa Tallung’s clothes even more amazing and stunning.

6. Pattuqduq Towaine’s shirt

Next is the Pattuqduq Towaine dress which is one of the traditional clothes of South Sulawesi. More precisely, Pattuqduq Towaine’s clothes come from the Mandar tribe. The existence of this traditional dress is usually worn to attend weddings or during the Pattuqduq dance performance.

Generally, Pattuqduq Towaine’s clothes consist of 18 pieces. However, if the Pattuqduq Towaine dress is worn at a wedding, then the traditional clothes that will be worn are 24 pieces.

Pattuqduq Towaine’s clothes also consist of various types. Some types of Pattuqduq Towaine’s clothing are Rawang Boko or basic clothes, Lipaq Saqbe Mandar or patterned sarongs, Lipaq Aqdi Dirattwe or special sarongs that use chains and there is also the Lipaq Aqdi Dirrater Duatdong or sarong on the bottom edge.

The use of Pattuqduq Towaine’s clothes will be worn with various kinds of jewelry. Starting from the head jewelry to the hands. This is done not without reason, because the use of these jewelery is one of the cultural forms of the Mandar tribe.

The majority of Pattuqduq Towaine’s clothes are worn by women. Then for men will use a closed jacket made of silk. At the top it will be combined with trousers and a sarong that will be placed at the waist.

The existence of traditional clothing for men will symbolize that the Mandar tribe must always be agile in working and acting.

7. Bella Dada shirt

If the Bella Dada clothes are traditional clothes of the Makassar Bugis tribe worn by women. So, Bella Dada clothes are traditional clothes that will be worn by men. Having the name Bella Dada can also be interpreted as a dress that has a slit on the chest.

The model of the Bella Dada shirt has long sleeves with a collared neckline and is adorned with gold or silver buttons. In addition there are also additional pockets on the right and left of the shirt.

Next, on the part of the trousers that complement Bella Dada’s clothes, usually called Paroci, which is wrapped in a sarong, which is usually called lipa’garusu. When wearing this traditional dress, Makassar men will add a headdress called passapu’.

Bella Dada clothes are usually made of traditional cloth without any motifs or are plain but have bright, striking colors such as red and green. Apart from jewelery for passapu’, Bella Dada’s clothes will also be equipped with accessories such as bracelets, daggers and other decorations.

Men will wear Bella Dada clothes when attending traditional ceremonies, weddings and state events as well as other formal events.

South Sulawesi bridal attire

South Sulawesi wedding dress will usually be chosen according to the wishes of the bride and groom. Where generally the men will wear Turu clothes or clothing models that will be adjusted to the dress worn by the bride.

As for the bride, she will usually wear a Bodo dress. Where the color chosen in the shirt will be adjusted to the color worn by the groom.

Due to the use of these traditional clothes for weddings, these clothes will be made with higher quality materials. In addition, the South Sulawesi wedding dress will be given a touch of hands in the form of accessories to make it look more elegant and lively which will also be adapted to the wedding atmosphere.

South Sulawesi Traditional Clothing for Children

Traditional clothing for South Sulawesi children will usually wear bodo clothes. As previously explained, Bodo clothes have colors that can represent a person’s status. Especially for children, they will wear orange Bodo clothes.

Meanwhile, when they grow up, the Bodo clothes they wear will have a blood red color. Usually the women will wear Bodo clothes in red. As for the shamans, they will wear white Bodo clothes.

Additional Accessories for South Sulawesi Traditional Clothing

As previously explained, South Sulawesi traditional clothes will be worn together with several additional accessories, especially for traditional clothes worn by women. Where the use of these accessories will be worn in various events such as weddings or when wearing Bodo clothes and Labbu clothes.

For example, such as the use of hair accessories where later the bride and groom will have a bun standing straight behind the head which is usually called Simpolong Teppong. Furthermore, the hair will be equipped with rocking betel nuts and simpolong flowers which have been arranged neatly on the right and left sides.

Not only that, because additional accessories such as crowns or headbands which are commonly called saloko will also be worn. Where the existence of this saloko accessory is a symbol of the majesty of the peacock which is so charming in shape.

Complementary Weapons from South Sulawesi Traditional Clothing

Previously, it was explained that the traditional clothes of South Sulawesi women would be equipped with a variety of additional accessories. As for the traditional clothes of the men of South Sulawesi, they will be equipped with a traditional weapon in the form of a keris. The Pasatimpo Keris is a type of keris with a sheath made of gold.

So that’s an explanation regarding the traditional clothing of South Sulawesi and its additional accessories. The existence of the traditional clothes of South Sulawesi is still there. This is none other than because on important occasions such as weddings, the presence of South Sulawesi is still being used.

Even some of the traditional clothes of South Sulawesi have also undergone modifications. This will make some of the traditional clothes of South Sulawesi not only be used by the nobility, but also can be worn by everyone in various events.

It is appropriate for us as Indonesian citizens to always maintain cultural diversity such as the existence of the South Sulawesi traditional clothing. There are many ways you can do to preserve the existence of traditional clothes. For example, still wearing traditional clothes on certain occasions such as weddings or other official events. That way, until whenever the existence of traditional clothes will continue to be sustainable from generation to generation.

Strategy evaluation – Sinaumed’s friends , The chosen strategy must go through a series of different alternative analysis processes to be implemented within a certain time. Strategy is needed so that the organization is in a state of efficiency and is able to achieve goals and objectives in a frequently changing external environment.

One of the future-oriented strategies. Therefore, strategy selection is usually based on various basic assumptions, considering that not all events and factors that affect strategy implementation can be predicted and calculated accurately.

Whether strategy is effective or not as a tool to achieve organizational goals and objectives is not seen in the formulation and definition process, but in its implementation.

Evaluation of the implemented strategy must be carried out to find out whether the implemented strategy is successful and optimal. In addition to strategy evaluation, strategy control must also be carried out so that the implemented strategy can be monitored and implemented properly.

Adaptation and change are two things every company faces. Changing market and economic conditions and situations require companies to be able to change their orientation if necessary. To change the direction of your company properly, you need to understand how to evaluate effective strategies.

Strategic management is an important part of the continuity of a company. With a good strategic management system, you can react well to future changes. In order to change the strategy you are currently using, evaluating the strategy is an important step. You must first know the ins and outs of the strategy you are using before you can change direction.

Here are steps to evaluate effective strategies that you can use as a guide. Come on, see the explanation, Sinaumed’s friends !

What is Strategy Evaluation?

Before understanding what strategy evaluation is, you need to understand that there are three steps that must be completed to implement an effective business strategy. These steps include:

First, strategy formulation. The formulation process requires certain information and facts relating to the scope of the company and the development of the company. Starting with the vision and mission, identifying strengths and weaknesses as well as potential internal and external threats to the company.

Then set long-term and short-term goals and prepare several alternative strategies after determining the main strategy to be used.

Second, strategy implementation. In this phase, the company must have several short, medium and long term goals. Starting with making company policies, budgeting operational costs, setting up the right organizational structure, allocating good resources and motivating employees to achieve the goals set to the fullest.

In addition, the development and use of appropriate information systems and compensation services is very important to note for employee performance satisfaction.

Third, strategy evaluation. This step is the final step which is enough to determine the success of the business strategy. At least there are several main elements in the evaluation namely; monitor, measure and take corrective action. Evaluation really needs to be done to maintain success and avoid failure in the future.

Therefore, strategy evaluation is the most effective way for business people to assess how long the company has survived and developed to achieve the desired strategic goals. With this assessment, business owners can determine the direction of their business strategy and help identify gaps and take corrective action when they are not in accordance with the initial concept.

Things to Evaluate!

Conducting an effective strategic assessment certainly requires the cooperation of many parties. It starts with shareholders, the board of directors, and key officers of the company, including heads of company departments. The things to be evaluated include:

1. Sales achievement

Sales targets can be the most accurate measure to determine the success of a business strategy. Company profitability and profit margins. When estimating profit margins, the difference in sales value is calculated after deducting operating costs, then divided by the number of sales. Until finally found a comparison between turnover and company capital.

2. Market share

By analyzing market share, entrepreneurs can find out how strong the company controls the market. Calculate and compare company size with market size using various estimates such as Sales value and volume and number of customers.

3. Liquidity of the company

Company liquidity, namely estimating the interest and demand for products by consumers, and the company’s ability to fulfill its product reserves.

4. The solvency of the company

This is equally important because it relates to the company’s financial condition. Especially related to the existence of debt to creditors. This assessment makes it easier for the company to know the amount of financing to be borrowed and the company’s ability to repay the loan.

Why is a Strategy Evaluation Needed?

Strategic evaluation is important to ensure that the stated strategic goals can be achieved. Strategy evaluation is a way for marketers to assess the company’s position to achieve strategic goals.

This assessment provides an objective method for testing the effectiveness and efficiency of a company’s strategy and a way to determine whether the implemented strategy is moving the organization toward its intended strategic goals. Strategic assessment can also help determine when and what corrective actions are needed to return performance to your business goals.

The more complex the problems that arise in the corporate environment, the more difficult it is to predict the survival of the organization in the future. Here are some reasons why companies need to evaluate strategy:

1. Market and economic conditions change and situations in which markets grow, technologies change, and new competitors emerge.

2. The more complicated and complex the company’s operations, the more control is needed.

3. The more power and authority is decentralized, the more managers need tools to track the activities and performance of their subordinates.

The benefits that companies receive when evaluating strategies are:

1. Can know the progress of the program/project so that the company can take the necessary actions or corrections.

2. Ensuring the most effective and efficient use of resources.

3. Assess the extent to which the program/project has or is having the desired impact.

Evaluation of work strategy should involve shareholders, board of directors, company secretary and company leaders and responsibilities related to the implementation of company strategy.

Balanced Scorecard

The information age of globalization has brought many companies into a complex and competitive business environment. The dynamic business environment requires performance measures of the company’s board of directors and management, which can determine the health and status of the company, as well as systems that can provide an overall picture of company results and company strategy and strategy implementation.

Therefore, a strategy implementation tool is needed to answer these challenges.

The Balanced Scorecard approach is used as a tool to transform an organization’s strategic objectives into a set of causal and interrelated work activities that can be measured and monitored to ensure the achievement of the organization’s strategic goals.

The Balanced Scorecard (BSC) concept developed by Kaplan and Norton consists of two main indicators, namely Lagging Indicator and Leading Indicator. Lagging indicators are effect indicators, which are measures that are identified after something has happened, which can provide information about the company’s position and what the company should do.

Meanwhile, the Leading Indicator is a causal indicator that includes initiatives or actions that must be taken to support the achievement of the Lagging Indicator .

With these two indicators, the Balanced Scorecard allows organizations to compare results with factors that affect performance. The Lagging Indicator perspective component includes financial and customer aspects . While Leading indicators include Internal Business Process and Learning and Growth . The following is an explanation of the four perspectives:

Financial Perspective

The financial perspective provides an overview of whether strategic planning and execution affect the main objectives of the company. For non-profit organizations, the indicators used in the financial perspective evaluation include: Profits, revenues, costs, use of assets, etc.

Customer Perspective (Customer Perspective)

This perspective provides an overview to the company about the importance of the customer perspective as a driver of the company’s financial performance. From this perspective, BSC measures aspects such as: Marketing share, customer retention, customer acquisition, customer satisfaction, etc.

Perspective of Internal Business Process (Internal Business Process)

This perspective includes a series of processes or activities that a company must carry out to achieve its goals from a customer perspective and from a financial perspective, such as:

Develop new products, increase production capacity, build new business networks, intensify cooperation with third parties, etc.

Learning and Growth Perspective (Learning and Growth Perspective)

This perspective identifies things that must be prepared by organizations to carry out business process functions optimally, such as: Preparation of quality human resources, development of necessary supporting infrastructure (technology, information, etc.), development of organizational culture, etc.

Steps to Conduct Strategy Evaluation

1. Consistency 

In the early stages, you need to assess the consistency of the strategy. It should be ensured that there is no conflict between the policies and the goals in the announced strategy. Here you need to make sure of two important things. The first is the company’s internal operations, which include procurement, marketing, sales, operations and services according to the allocation of resources. Second, internal functions are also consistent with market economic goals and business goals.

2. Fixed performance benchmarks

When setting benchmarks, strategists face questions such as: what benchmarks to set, how to set them, and how to express them? To determine configuration respect, it is important to find concrete requirements to perform the primary task.

The performance indicators that best identify and reveal specific needs can then be determined for use in the evaluation. Organizations may use both quantitative and qualitative criteria in evaluating overall performance. Quantitative criteria include net profit, ROI, earnings per share, cost of production, turnover rate, etc. Qualitative factors include subjective assessment of factors such as – skills and competence, risk taking, flexibility etc.

3. Performance measurement

Normal performance is a measure compared to actual performance. Reporting and communication systems help measure performance. When the right means of measuring performance are in place and standards are properly set, evaluating strategy becomes easier. However, various factors such as input from supervisors are difficult to measure.

Likewise, it is sometimes difficult to measure divisional performance against individual performance. Therefore, objective variables must be set to measure performance. Measurements must be taken at the right time, otherwise the assessment will not achieve its objective. Annual financial reports must be prepared to measure performance, financial reports such as balance sheets, income statements must be prepared annually.

4. Analysis of Variances

When measuring actual performance and comparing it to standard performance, there may be differences that need to be analyzed. The strategy must determine the level of tolerance between deviations between actual performance and acceptable standards.

Positive deviation indicates better performance, but it is very unusual that targets are always exceeded. Negative deviations are worrying because they indicate a lack of performance. In this case, the strategist must find the cause of the deviation and take corrective action to overcome it.

5. Taking Corrective Action

When performance differences are identified, it is important to plan corrective action. When performance is consistently lower than desired performance, strategists must carry out a detailed analysis of the factors influencing performance.

If strategists determine that the organization’s potential does not match performance requirements, standards must be lowered. Another infrequent and drastic corrective action is strategic realignment, which entails returning to the strategic management process, planning reforms according to new trends in resource allocation, and subsequent means of returning to the starting point of the strategic management process.

6. Review based on strategy

An overview of the rationale behind organizational strategy, can be done by reviewing the EFE matrix and IFE matrix. The revised IFE matrix (revised IFF matrix) should focus on changes that occur in the strengths and weaknesses of the organization’s management, marketing, finance/accounting, production/operations, research and development (R&D), and management information systems (MIS).

The updated EFE Matrix aims to show how effectively a company’s strategy responds to opportunities and risks. A number of external and internal factors can prevent a company from achieving its long-term and annual goals.

Externally, competitors’ actions, changes in demand, changes in technology, changes in the economy, changes in demographics, and government policies can prevent the achievement of organizational goals. Internally, an ineffective strategy may be selected or executed poorly. Goals can be overly optimistic. Failure to achieve goals is therefore not necessarily the result of unsatisfactory work by managers and employees.

7. Conformity

It is important to understand that adapting a business strategy to the market environment should not be underestimated. Because this affects the effectiveness of the strategy which also affects the achievement of company goals.

Because of this, you need to assess the suitability of the strategy to the market, whether it is local or a wider area. At the very least, you have to ensure a few things, such as: who and where possible potential customers exist, the economic forces that prevail in the commercial market, which lead customers/consumers to buy and the restrictions that apply in corporate adjustments.

The Nature of Strategy Evaluation 

The strategic management process can successfully make decisions that can have significant and long-term consequences. Wrong strategic decisions can lead to huge losses, which will be very difficult to repair.

Therefore, many strategic planners agree that strategy evaluation is very important in organizational life; Timely assessment can alert management of problems or potential problems before they become critical.

Strategy evaluation can be a complex and sensitive process. Too many performance appraisal strategies can be very expensive and counterproductive. Strategy evaluation is important to ensure that the set strategic goals can be achieved.

1. Strategy evaluation activities

Review basic business/company strategy Compare expected results with reality Take corrective actions to ensure performance is in line with plan.

2. Strategy Evaluation Criteria

Coherence; Strategies must not have conflicting goals and guidelines. wisdom; Strategy should not overwhelm existing resources or create subproblems that are difficult to solve. Applicability implies that the strategic plan must consider various trends as well as each trend when evaluating strategies.

3. Reasons for the need for Strategy Evaluation

The more complex the environmental issues, the more difficult it is to predict the future of the organization. Let’s shorten the time that can be planned with some precision.

4. Strategy Evaluation Process

Strategy evaluation aims to question managers’ expectations and assumptions, to initiate a review of goals and values, and to encourage creativity in generating alternatives and formulating evaluation criteria.

Closing

This is a review of the 7 steps for evaluating an effective company business strategy, so that the company can evaluate the overall management of the company. For Sinaumed’s who want to understand about other strategy evaluations, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Ziaggi Fadhil Zahran

Also read related articles:

Understanding Strategy and Types, Purpose, and Examples

Marketing Management: Definition, Functions, Objectives, Duties, and Concepts

Business Management: Understanding. Functions, Planning, Elements and Components

Operational Management: Definition, Purpose, Characteristics, Functions and Strategies

Communication Management: Definition, Functions, Purpose and Examples

Signs of the Sugra Apocalypse – All living things will die, both old people, adults, young people, children, even babies can die at any time. However, no one knows when death will come. Eventually everyone in the world will die, no one will live forever. This event is called the end of days or what can be called doomsday.

Just like death, no one can guess or predict when the end of the world will occur. Even if that person possessed extraordinary intelligence, the doomsday event would never know when the time would come.

So we must prepare ourselves to face it, it is good deeds in life that will save us all from the pain of the doomsday. Judgment Day or the end of time in Islam is the culmination of all life on this earth in the destruction of the universe and its contents, including humans and other creatures.

No creature can escape the apocalypse. Muslims must believe in the Day of Judgment as a sign of their faith in Allah SWT. Even those beings who do not have faith and do not keep the commandments and commit many sins without being able to repent in life, will suffer after the Day of Judgment, when they will be cast into the fires of hell.

There are many verses in the Qur’an that explain the coming of the end of this world, one of which is Al-Hajj in the Qur’an verse 7 which reads:

“Surely the Day of Judgment will come, there is not the slightest doubt about it. Indeed, Allah will resurrect whoever is in the grave.

Believing in Allah also means believing in all events that occur according to Allah’s will, such as the apocalypse. In Islam, Judgment Day is divided into two parts, namely Sugra Doomsday and Kubra Doomsday. Sugra’s apocalypse is a minor apocalypse while Kubra’s apocalypse is a major apocalypse.

This article will discuss, what are the signs of the Sugra doomsday? Before the Kubra doomsday comes, there will be signs of a sugra apocalypse that starts the event. We will first discuss what is the meaning of the Sugra Apocalypse in an Islamic perspective? Let’s see the explanation!

Meaning of the Sugra Apocalypse

The Sugra apocalypse is also known as the minor apocalypse. This is the kind of apocalypse that can be experienced in everyday life. Sugra’s Doomsday can be seen from signs such as natural destruction, human death and others.

Regarding the function of the Sugra Judgment, so that Muslims always remember and draw closer to Allah SWT, the Creator of Nature. Because when disaster strikes, we pray and ask Allah SWT for help.

Arsikum Al Masyhudi said in the book Ten Major Events Before the Doomsday of Kubra, Sugra Doomsday is the death of creatures, such as the death of people and others.

“ When someone dies, it is religiously said that the Day of Judgment has come, which is the minor Judgment Day. In this case the officers and enforcers are the Angel Azrael,” explained Arsikum .

Apart from that, said Arsikum, the occurrence of disasters such as wars, earthquakes, tsunamis and other disasters also includes a sugra apocalypse, or a small apocalypse. The argument for the existence of the Day of Judgment is the word of Allah SWT in Surah Ar Rahman verses 26-27. He said:

كُلُّ مَنْ عَلَيْهَا فَانٍۖ وَّيَبْقٰى وَجْهُ رَبِّكَ ذُو الْجَلٰلِ وَالْاِكْرَامِۚ٢٦

Meaning: “All that is on it (earth) will perish. (However,) the face (substance) of your Lord which has greatness and glory remains eternal.”

Furthermore, Allah SWT says in Surat Ali Imran, verse 185:

كُلُّ نَفْسٍ ذَاۤىِٕقَةُ الْمَوْتِۗ وَاِنَّمَا تُوَفَّوْنَ اُجُوْرَكُمْ يَوْمَ الْقِيٰمَةِ ۗ فَمَنْ زُحْزِحَ عَنِ النَّارِ وَاُدْخِلَ الْجَنَّةَ فَقَدْ فَازَ ۗ وَمَا الْحَيٰوةُ الدُّنْيَآ اِلَّا مَتَاعُ الْغُرُوْرِ

Meaning : “Every soul shall taste death. Only on the Day of Judgment will your reward be given in full. Who is kept away from hell and put into heaven, indeed he gains victory. The life of the world is but a deceptive pleasure.”

In addition to the above, the arguments that explain the Day of Judgment in the Qur’an verses 51-52 of Surah Al-Araf explain the Day of Judgment as follows.

وَنَادَىٰ أَصْحَابُ النَّارِ أَصْحَابَ الْجَنَّةِ أَنْ أَفِيضُوا عَلَيْنَا مِنَ الْمَاءِ أَوْ مِمَّا رَزَقَكُمُ اللَّهُ ۚ قَالُوا إِنَّ اللَّهَ حَرَّمَهُمَا عَلَى الْكَافِرِين

Wa naadaaa Ashaabun Naari Ashaabal jannati an afiiduu ‘alainaa minal maa’i aw mimma razaqakumul laah; qooluu innal laaha harrama humaa ‘alal kaafiriin

Meaning: And the inhabitants of hell call on the inhabitants of heaven: “Give us a little water or food that Allah has given you sustenance”. They (the inhabitants of heaven) replied: “Surely Allah has forbidden both of them to the disbelievers.” (QS Al-Araf: 51).

الَّذِينَ اتَّخَذُوا دِينَهُمْ لَهْوًا وَلَعِبًا وَغَرَّتْهُمُ الْحَيَاةُ الدُّنْيَا ۚ فَالْيَوْمَ نَنْسَاهُمْ كَمَا نَسُوا لِقَاءَ يَوْمِهِمْ هَٰذَا وَمَا كَانُوا بِآيَاتِنَا يَجْحَدُونَ 

Allaziinat takhazuu diinahu lahwanw wa la’i-banw wa gharrat humul hayaatud dunyaa; fal Yawma nnannsaahum kamaa nasuu liqooa’a Yawmihim haazaa wa maa kaanuu bi aayaatinaa yajhaduun

Meaning: “(That is) people who make their religion as a joke and a joke, and the life of the world has deceived them”. So on this day (of Judgment), We will forget them as they forgot their meeting with this day, and (as) they always deny Our signs.” (QS Al-Araf: 52).

In the hadith of Bukhari’s story it is also written Doomsday. Here is a hadith:

“If one of you dies, then his seat is shown to him in the morning and evening. If he is a member of heaven, then he will clearly see the image of himself as a member of hell. It was said to him, “This is your seat until Allah raises you up on the Day of Resurrection” . (Narrated by Bukhari).

Examples of Sugra Doomsday Signs

The following is an example of the signs of a Sugra apocalypse or a minor apocalypse:

1. Increasing Stupidity in Life

Another sign of doomsday is the death of the scholars and the spread of ignorance. Withdrawal of information occurs with the death of the clergy. He stated in the hadith of ‘Abdullah bin ‘Amr bin al-‘Ash Radhiyallahu Anhuma, “I heard the Messenger of Allah Shallallahu Alaihi Wa Sallam say:

إِنَّ اللهَ لاَ يَقْبِضُ الْعِلْمَ انْتِزَاعًا يَنْتَزِعُهُ مِنَ الْعِبَادِ، وَلَكِنْ يَقْبِضُ الْعِلْمَ بِقَبْضِ الْعُلَمَاءِ حَتَّـى إِذَا لَمْ يَبْقَ عَالِمًا اتَّخَذَ النَّاسُ رُءُوسًا جُهَّالاً فَسُئِلُوا، فَأَفْتَوْا بِغَيْرِ عِلْمٍ فَضَلُّوا وَأَضَلُّوا.

Meaning: “Indeed, Allah does not remove knowledge from the servants all at once, but Allah removes knowledge by leaving the scholars.

Until there are no more scholars, people will recognize themselves as leaders. Then they are asked, then they give a fatwa without knowing it, then they go astray and lead other people astray.”

Moreover, explained in Ash Shahihain by Anas bin Malik Radhiyallahu anhu, he said:

Rasulullah Shallallahu ‘alaihi wa sallam said:

مِنْ أَشْرَاطِ السَّاعَةِ أَنْ يُرْفَعَ الْعِلْمُ وَيَثْبُتَ الْجَهْلُ .

Meaning: “Among the signs of the Last Hour is the loss of knowledge and the spread of ignorance.”

Not only that, Al-Bukhari narrated from Shaqiq, he said:

“I was with ‘Abdullah and Abu Musa, both of them said, the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam said:

Amen.

Meaning: “Surely before the Day of Judgment there will be several days when ignorance descends and knowledge is removed.”

2. Riba Riba

The Prophet also once said that increasingly widespread usury is a sign of the approach of the Sugra Doomsday.

عَنْ أَبِي هُرَيْرَةَ قَالَ قَالَ رَسُولُ اللَّهِ صَلَّى اللَّهُ عَلَيْهِ وَسَلَّمَ قَالَ يَأْتِي عَلَى النَّاسِ زَمَانٌ يَأْكُلُونَ الرِّبَا فَمَنْ لَمْ يَأْكُلْهُ أَصَابَهُ مِنْ غُبَارِ

Meaning: “Indeed there will come to mankind a time in which no one among them but eats usury.”

If he doesn’t eat it, at least he gets dust on it, “(Narrated by Nasai, no. 4455, but al-Albani considers it dhaif).

Even though the hadith about usury above is a weak hadith, the meaning it contains is true and the time has come.

In fact, the danger of usury is terrible. Their situation is because they state (opinion) that buying and selling is the same as usury.

Whereas Allah has justified buying and selling and forbidding usury. Those who are prohibited from their Lord then stop (taking usury), then for him what he took before (before the prohibition came); and his business is with Allah.

“People who return (take usury), then that person is the inhabitants of hell; they live in it. ” (Surah Al Baqarah: 275)

3. Women Dressed But Naked

The first sign of Sugra’s Apocalypse will be some women wearing clothes but still looking naked. The clothes in question are mini clothes worn by women. When women wear such clothes, they reveal their shape, so they also appear naked. In this case Rasulullah saw. mentioned in a hadith narrated by Muslim:

حَدَّثَنِي زُهَيْرُ بْنُ حَرْبٍ حَدَّثَنَا جَرِيرٌ عَنْ سُهَيْلٍ عَنْ أَبِيهِ عَنْ أَبِي هُرَيْرَةَ قَالَ قَالَ رَسُولُ اللَّهِ صَلَّى اللَّهُ عَلَيْهِ وَسَلَّمَ صِنْفَان مِنْ أَهْلِ النَّارِ لَمْ أَرَهُمَا قَوْمٌ مَعَهُمْ سِيَاطٌ كَأَذْنَابِ الْبَقَرِ يَضْرِبُونَ بِهَا النَّاسَ وَنِسَاءٌ كَاسِيَاتٌ عَارِيَاتٌ مُمِيلَاتٌ مَائِلَاتٌ رُءُوسُهُنَّ كَأَسْنِمَةِ الْبُخْتِ الْمَائِلَةِ لَا يَدْخُلْنَ الْجَنَّةَ وَلَا يَجِدْنَ رِيحَهَا وَإِنَّ رِيحَهَا لَيُوجَدُ مِنْ مَسِيرَةِ كَذَا وَكَذَا.

Meaning: “There are two kinds of inhabitants of hell that I have never seen. Namely those who carry whips like the tails of oxen with which they whip people and women who are clothed but naked, who sway and make others sway, their heads are like the tilted humps of camels, they will not enter Paradise and will not smell it, even though the smell of heaven can be smelled from such and such a distance.” (HR Muslim, Al-Libas waz-Zinah).

4. The End of Someone’s Life (Died)

The end of the life of every living being contains an apocalypse within the Sugra apocalypse. The small apocalypse that occurs in the course of human life is all part of trials and tribulations. As in his words:

كُلُّ نَفْسٍ ذَآئِقَةُ ٱلْمَوْتِ ۗ وَنَبْلُوكُم بِٱلشَّرِّ وَٱلْخَيْرِ فِتْنَاًً ۖ وَإِلَيْ

“Kullu nafsin żā`iqatul-maụt, wa nablụkum bisy-syarri wal-khairi slander, wa ilainā turja’ụn.”

Meaning: “Every soul will taste death. We will test you with bad and good as a (true) ordeal. And to Us you will be returned.” (QS. Al-Anbiya Verse 35)

A person’s life in the new world (in the grave or in the hereafter) is very dependent on his actions in this world. If good, then the return is also good and vice versa.

5. The Number of Trades

Among the signs of the Sugra doomsday is the fullness of trade and its spread among humanity so that women can participate in it alongside men.

Imam Ahmad and al-Hakim, from ‘Abdullah bin Mas’ud Radhiyallahu anhu, narrated the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam that he said:

بَيْنَ يَدَيِ السَّاعَةِ تَسْلِيمَ الْخَاunt

Meaning: “Towards the Day of Judgment, greetings are only spoken to certain people, and there are many trades until a woman helps her husband in trading.”

An-Nasa-i narrated from ‘Amr bin Taghlib Radhiyallahu anhu, he said,

“The Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam said:

Amen.

Meaning: “Indeed, among the signs of the Last Hour is the abundance of wealth and the abundance of trade.”

6. Number of Natural Disasters

The rise of disasters is also one of the signs of Sugra’s apocalypse. It is also mentioned in the Hadith of Sunan Ibn Majah: “At the end of the world there will be a change in form, the earth will sink and hail will fall.”

Disasters that occur are usually major disasters such as tsunamis, earthquakes and others. There has also been a major disaster in the past during the time of Prophet Lut, which is mentioned in the Al-Quran Hud verses 82-83.

فَلَمَّا جَآءَ أَمْرُنَا جَعَلْنَا عَٰلِيَهَا سَافِلَهَا وَأَمْطَرْنَا عَلَيْهَا حِجَارَةً مِّن سِجِّيلٍ مَّنضُودٍ ﴿٨٢﴾ مُّسَوَّمَةً عِندَ رَبِّكَ وَمَا هِىَ مِنَ ٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ بِبَعِيدٍ ﴿٨٣﴾

Meaning: “So when Our decision came, We overturned the land of the people of Lut, and We showered them with stones from burning ground (82) marked by your Lord. And the punishment is not far from the wrongdoer (83).” (QS Huud: 82-83).

It was narrated from Abu Hurairah Radhiyallahu anhu, he said,

“The Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam said:

لاَ تَقُومُ السَّاعَةُ حَتَّى تَكْثُرَ الزَّلاَزِلُ .

Meaning: ‘ Doomsday will not come until there are many earthquakes.

It was also narrated from Salamah bin Nufail as-Sakuni Radhiyallahu anhu, he said:

كُنَّا جُلُوسًا عِنْدَ رَسُولِ اللهِ صَلَّى اللَّهُ عَلَيْهِ وَسَلَّمَ. (وَذَكَرَ الْحَدِيْثَ وَفِيْهِ) وَبَيْنَ يَدَيِ السَّاعَةِ مُوتَانٌ شَدِيدٌ وَبَعْدَهُ سَنَوَاتُ الزَّلا شَدِلِ .

Meaning: “We once sat with the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam … (then he told his hadith) and before the Doomsday there were two very terrible deaths, and after that there were years filled with earthquakes.”

7. The mosque is used as a tourist spot

Rasulullah SAW once said that one of the signs of the apocalypse of Sugra is that the mosque is turned into a tourist spot. This is also written in the hadith.

إنّ من أشراط الساعة أن تتّخذ المساجد طرقا

“In fact one of the signs of the end of the world is when the mosques are considered as streets.” (Mustadrak Al-Hakim he said “This Hadith is Saheeh Sanadnya”. Adz-Dzahabi said,”mauquf”).

Other Signs

Apart from the signs above, there are also several other signs of Sugra’s apocalypse, namely:

• Increased consumption habits of khamr or alcohol in society.
• Heinous crimes like murder are on the rise.
• Chaos reigned everywhere.
• People are competing to build buildings or structures.
• The Rise of Adultery.
• The number of people seeking wealth, prestige and status is increasing.
• Corruption is rampant
• More and more children are born out of wedlock.

Last Day Names

1. Yaumul Qiyamah or Day of Destruction

Yaumul Qiyamah explained about the earth and the universe that perished with the permission of Allah SWT. On that day people will die.

2. Yaumul Ba’ats or Resurrection Day

After the Day of Resurrection, humans will rise from the graves (Barzakh). At that time the angel Israfil blew the trumpet for the second time. All humans will rise from the dead to receive a reward for their deeds.

3. Yaumul Mahsyar or Gathering Day

On this day, people gathered in a large area. At that time, the sun was an inch above one’s head. Nothing will help him except charity in the world.

4. Yaumul Hisab or Day of Reckoning

On this day the charity of the world’s population is counted. A man cannot lie about his actions. Members of the body, such as mouth, eyes, hands and feet, will testify on the day of reckoning.

5. Yaumul Mizan or Day of the Scales

On the Day of Scales a person’s good and bad deeds are counted. It is at this point that the practice will be held accountable before Allah SWT.

6. Yaumul Jaza or Day of Judgment

According to Yaumul Mizan, it is a day of retribution for human actions. On this day people are rewarded for their deeds in the world. Good deeds are rewarded while bad deeds are punished.

Closing

Sinaumed’s friends , this is an explanation of the 7 signs of Sugra’s apocalypse, complete with evidence and hadith. By knowing the signs, maybe you can fix yourself to prepare when that day comes later.

For those of you who want to learn a lot about Islam or other things, you can read and buy books provided by sinaumedia. sinaumedia as #Friends Without Limits provides quality books that you can make the best use of. Come on, Sinaumed’s, buy the book now at sinaumedia.com !

Source: from several sources

Author: Ziaggi Fadhil Zahran

Also read:

Definition of Doomsday: Types, Signs and Wisdom

The difference between Sugra’s Apocalypse and Kubra’s Apocalypse

The Difference between Sugra and Kubra Doomsday, What’s the Difference?

Definition of Doomsday: Types, Signs and Wisdom

Trumpet Blowing and Signs of the Great Doomsday Happens

Recommended Worship During the Month of Ramadan – Soon, the month of Ramadan will come soon! Are you ready for Sinaumed’s to welcome the holy month?

There are so many features of the month of Ramadan which of course cannot be found in other months, for example the night of a thousand months or often referred to as Lailatul Qadar. In addition, in the month of Ramadan, Allah SWT will multiply every practice of our worship because this month is full of blessings.

During the month of Ramadan, it would be better if we practice obligatory worship and also sunnah worship. This is so that during the month of Ramadan, we do not waste the opportunity to become devout Muslims.

Then, what are the recommended worships when the month of Ramadan comes?

Come on, take a look at the following reviews so that Sinaumed’s can use this good opportunity in this month of Ramadan to improve self-quality!

7 Main Worship During the Month of Ramadan

1. Congregational Prayer

Congregational prayers are prayers that are performed together by more than two people. One of the people will play the role of priest and lead the prayer.

Congregational prayer is a worship that has great virtues, especially in the month of Ramadan, even for those who practice it regularly, Allah SWT will surely get a multiplied reward. This has been said by Rasulullah SAW, which reads:

“All the good deeds of the children of Adam in the month of Ramadan are multiplied by 10 to 700 times.” (HR. Muslim)

The practice of praying in congregation is more important than praying alone. In fact, the more people there are (prayer participants), the priority will be multiplied as well. As has been said by Rasulullah SAW, which reads:

“Praying in congregation is more important than praying alone by 27 degrees” (HR Bukhari and Muslim)

It should be noted that to become an imam one must be fluent in reciting the Koran, older in age, memorizing more letters of the Koran, and knowing the sunnah of the Prophet. So, not just anyone can become a priest, huh…

When we want to carry out this worship, as a congregation, we must tighten and tidy up the prayer lines so that we get the perfection of congregational prayers.

A number of scholars have argued that by praying in congregation we will get many good things, including:

• Obtain tazkiyah (declaration of holiness) and a great gift from Allah SWT
• Obey the orders of Rasulullah SAW
• In an effort to obey the commands of Allah SWT
• Glorify and emphasize what has been taught by Rasulullah SAW
• As a witness of faith In this case, praying in congregation will make the mosques not quiet
• Free from hellfire
• His prayer was not rejected
• Strengthen the bonds of brotherhood and affection
• Protect yourself from demons
• Big reward

2. Tadarus Al-Quran

In connection with the month of Ramadan, tadarus is an activity of reading the Al-Quran together or individually, which can be done in mosques, prayer rooms, and homes. As with the month of Ramadan which is full of blessings, we must read the Al-Quran according to the word of Allah, namely:

“…The month of Ramadan is the month in which the (beginning) of the Quran was sent down…” (QS. Al-Baqarah: 185)

In fact, people who just teach the Koran will get ridha and a reward that is multiplied by Allah SWT. This was explained by Rasulullah SAW in his words:

“The best of you are those who study the Koran and teach it to others.”

So, in reciting the Al-Quran there are several things that must be considered so that we can get the priority from Allah SWT, namely:

• When reading the Koran, it must be with a sincere heart and intention because of Allah Lillahi Ta’ala
• Must be in a state of purity from small or large hadas and read in a clean place
• Reading ta’awudz, which is a prayer asking for protection from Allah SWT from the temptations of the accursed devil at the beginning of carrying the Al-Quran
• Read the Al-Quran tartil and slowly only
• Should prostrate when reading verses prayer rug. The prostration is the recitation prostration

3. Tarawih prayers

Tarawih prayer is a night prayer which is only performed during the month of Ramadan. In carrying out this tarawih prayer, it is recommended to congregate in the mosque. This prayer was highly recommended by Rasulullah SAW.

Tsa’labah bin Abdil Malik Al-Quradzi once told me that one night during the month of Ramadan, Rasulullah SAW left the house, then witnessed people praying at the end of the mosque.

Then, he asked, “What are they doing?”

Someone then replied, “O Messenger of Allah, they are people who have not memorized much of the Koran, while Ubay bin Ka’ab, a reciter, so they pray and pray to him.”

Rasulullah SAW then responded, “Indeed, they have done good”

Please note, every night from the 1st to the 30th night of the month of Ramadan, the tarawih prayers will always get a reward from Allah SWT. Starting from the forgiveness of sins and the sins of his parents, he will be resurrected on the Day of Judgment with a radiant face, elevating human degrees in Paradise, lifting the torment of the grave, to granting ease to pass Shirath al-Mustaqim in the afterlife.

4. Midnight Prayer

Tahajud is a prayer that is done at night. The prayer time is after Isya prayer until dawn. However, there are also those who say that the midnight prayer will be better held in a quarter of the night.

Even though the midnight prayer is a sunnah prayer, Allah SWT always rewards those who carry it out and will grant their every request. Allah SWT says that:

“And part of the night, you pray Tahajud as an additional worship for you; hopefully your Lord will raise you to a commendable place” (QS. al-Isra: 79).

In addition, Allah SWT also said regarding the primacy of the midnight prayer,

“And those who spend the night prostrating and standing for their Lord ” (QS. Az-Zumar: 64)

Carrying out midnight prayers especially during the month of Ramadan is very special. But unfortunately, many people do not know the virtues of this worship. In fact, Abu Hurairah has narrated a hadith from Rasulullah SAW, namely:

“The main prayer after the obligatory prayer is the night prayer (tahajud)”

Not only do you get a charity reward from Allah SWT, the midnight prayer can actually have a good impact on your health, you know…

A number of studies have stated that people who diligently carry out the midnight prayer will have a cool view. There is also research from Mohammad Sholeh, a lecturer at IAIN Surabaya, which states that the midnight prayer can free a person from infections and cancer.

5. I’tikaf

According to the language, i’tikaf means ‘to live’. So it can be said that i’tikaf is residing in the mosque with a specific purpose. These specific goals must be good things, for example, dhikr, prayer, and reading the Koran.

This worship has many benefits, one of which is that people who perform i’tikaf will find it easy to perform fardhu prayers continuously and in congregation. Apart from that, i’tikaf also helps us to be humble in our prayers.

Indirectly, i’tikaf can help and make it easier for us to be in the first row when we want to pray in congregation. Please note that the first row will get a lot of good and reward from Allah SWT.

I’tikaf is also useful for educating the human soul so that it can get used to being patient when doing good deeds.

6. Multiply Alms

Alms is giving help physically and spiritually to people in need. Rasulullah SAW once said about the practice of alms, namely:

“ Every member of the human body has an obligation to give alms every day. That is like reconciling two people who are at odds is charity. Helping people who ride in vehicles or helping lift their belongings onto the vehicle, that is also charity. Good words or words are alms. Every step you take to perform your prayers is charity. Removing anything harmful on public streets is charity.” (Muslim HR).

Therefore, we are required to give alms to the poor, especially during the month of Ramadan. There are many virtues of giving alms during the month of Ramadan. It was narrated by at-Tarmidzi from Anas, that the Messenger of Allah said “The main charity is charity in the month of Ramadan”

7. Zakat Fitrah

Zakat fitrah is an obligation that must be carried out by all Muslims during the month of Ramadan. This zakat fitrah will later be given to people who are entitled to receive zakat (mustahiq), to purify themselves, and patch deficiencies that may occur while fasting.

It is called zakat fitrah because it is given after the fasting of Selesia Ramadhan. The law of carrying out zakat fitrah is obligatory, according to His words, namely:

“And those who issue zakat ” (QS. Al-Baqarah: 11)

There are special provisions in zakat fitrah, namely in the form of one bushel (2.5 kg) of staple food, usually rice.

The wisdom from the practice of zakat fitrah has been narrated by Ibn Abbas, namely: “Rasulullah required zakat fitrah as a purification for fasting people from vain and abominable things, as well as food for the poor” (HR. Abu Daud)

In addition to getting the pleasure of Allah SWT, zakat fitrah can also be related to human aspects between other individuals. Through this zakat fitrah, we can instill a sense of love for the poor and those in need. So, indirectly, we have given alms to others.

Actually, there are also livestock zakat, trade zakat, agricultural zakat, to professional zakat. However, not all of these zakat practices can carry them out. Therefore, through this zakat fitrah, where the provisions are only in the form of 2.5 kg of rice, many people can pay it. This is in accordance with the purpose of zakat fitrah which has been prescribed, which is to return every human being to his nature.

So, those are the seven acts of worship that are recommended during the month of Ramadan. Even though some of these worships can be carried out in normal months, the practices that are obtained in this month of Ramadan will later be multiplied by Him. Therefore, come on Sinaumed’s , we are competing to worship Allah SWT so that one day we will get convenience in the afterlife until the last day.

Related Book & Article Recommendations:

Source:

El-Bakar, Efri and Uup Gufron. (2009). Guidance on Ramadan Fasting Plus Prayers of Blessings . Jakarta: PT Variapop Group.

Why do people always experience socio-cultural changes? This question will have many answers that fall into two factors. Socio-cultural change is something that happens in society.

Socio-cultural changes occur because of changes in the existing structure in society. One of them is the change in social function. When social change occurs, it will automatically affect other things in society itself.

There are two factors that are the reason why society is always experiencing social change. Both of these factors come from within or internal factors, and come from outside or external factors. Here is an explanation.

1. Internal Factors

a. Demographics

Demographics is a term often used for statistical recording. The meaning of the word demography is often associated with demographic matters. Then, what is the meaning of demography?

Demographics has several meanings. Demographics are statistical data concerning the population. It is based on several classifications. Such as race, age, gender, occupation, religion and education.

In addition, other classifications are also related to population density, income level and so on. Birth rates and death rates will also be discussed in demography. Demographics is one of the most important data.

When the government makes a policy, demography will be a consideration. Governments commonly use demographics as planning. Policy planning to the distribution of resources. Such activities should pay attention to the demographics first.

There are several government policies based on demographics. Such as building facilities for the public, distributing subsidies, social assistance and so on. In addition, in terms of the company’s economy also requires demographics.

The meaning of the word demography is also closely related to market determination. For example, a company that manufactures luxury motorcycles. They want to reach the market in a country, so they have to know the demographics first.

They will find out how the income in that country. This is seen based on demographics. In addition, it must also be seen how the level of income of the people of that country.

Those are the ways companies determine the market. Almost all countries have special agencies dealing with demographic issues. In Indonesia, demography is the responsibility of the Central Bureau of Statistics or BPS.

Demographic data will show very detailed things. Population data is significantly contributed by the Population Census. This is done every 10 years. Demographic statistics will provide detailed information, such as the population in an area.

Demographics is one of the reasons why society is constantly experiencing socio-cultural changes. This will be related to the population. Increasing and decreasing population is one of the internal factors.

The population will encourage socio-cultural changes. Both the population continues to increase and the population continues to decrease. Mixing between various kinds of patterns and behavior will occur in society.

This occurs through increasing or decreasing population. It will result in the order of life. In addition, society will also experience changes.

The changes experienced can be a good thing or a bad thing. In Indonesia itself, changes in population occur through births and deaths. A very large population will be a serious problem.

Especially in urban areas. If the population is getting bigger, the problems that must be faced are also getting bigger. Population growth will affect many things.

Starting from the job to the amount of available land. In addition, population growth will also affect facilities and infrastructure in an area.

b. There is a New Discovery

The reason why society is constantly experiencing socio-cultural changes is also influenced by new discoveries. Social change will occur along with new discoveries. These new discoveries can occur in certain fields.

New discoveries will have an effect on social change. This applies both to inventions of tools, inventions and inventions of ideas. New discoveries that are accepted and recognized by the public are called inventions . Occurs in discovery which takes a long time.

Examples include communication and technology. As time progresses, more and more discoveries will be made. Especially in the technology sector.

Technology and communication are actually two related fields. We can take the telephone as an example. The telephone is one of the tools created by technology.

This tool is used in terms of communication. In ancient times, people would communicate through a number of things. Examples include letters.

As the times progressed, the telephone came to communicate. This makes people do not need letters back. Times are growing, smart phones or smartphones appear .

Smartphones are objects that provide many social changes to society. People who often read newspapers, for example. Previously, they would subscribe to the newspaper every week.

After that they can find out what news happened that week. However, now the situation is different. Smartphones apparently take over a lot of things in life, not only for communicating.

For example like the things in the newspaper earlier. It turns out that many people are switching to reading through the smart phone. That’s because in the smartphone there is also information in the newspaper.

Social changes also occurred. Publishers will make news in digital form. Like on social media, websites, or making special applications for the news portal. Over time, newspapers will be abandoned by people who switch to smartphones.

That’s one simple example of a new discovery. These discoveries can change social status, social interaction, people’s mindset to actions that can be taken by the community.

c. Conflict in Society

Conflict is a conflict or disagreement. Conflicts can occur between individuals, between groups, or between individuals and groups. The factors that cause conflict in society also vary.

The most common cause of conflict is a difference. As is well known, Indonesia is a country with diverse customs and culture, so it has many differences. It is this difference that creates conflict among the people.

However, there are still many factors associated with it. As a social phenomenon, conflict is a natural thing that happens in society. The reason is, every individual or group must have a desire.

The desire for power, prestige, welfare, social support and even access to various resources. For example, if you have the same desire as other individuals or other groups. While something you want is something that is difficult to get.

This is what gave birth to competition among people. The competition often ends in the form of conflict. Disputes are things that easily occur between people.

However, in sociology, conflict is the impact of social interaction. Social interaction is considered to have associative and dissociative effects. In addition, it can strengthen between individuals or between groups.

d. Rebellion or Revolution

Community problems that exist in a country are not just conflicts. One of them is rebellion or revolution. This rebellion or revolution can be the reason why society is always experiencing social change.

This rebellion generally arises because of a sense of dissatisfaction. This dissatisfaction can include many things. One example is dissatisfaction with government policies, or the handling of a problem.

Rebellion is not carried out by one person alone. However, some people do it. They will rebel against those in power.

It is this dissatisfaction that will drive the revolutionary movement. Then it is a form of rebellion. After that, social change was born among the people.

2. External Factors

a. Changes in the Natural Environment

One thing that has a very important role in life is the natural environment. The natural environment plays a vital role in human life. This is because humans live in and side by side with nature.

The natural environment which is the reason why people are constantly experiencing socio-cultural changes is the surrounding environment. The surrounding environment will affect the development of all living things on earth.

Therefore, the natural environment will play a role in socio-cultural changes. Changes in the natural environment are caused by humans or nature itself. Each change will affect the life of living things.

An example of a natural condition caused by humans is littering. Throwing garbage anywhere is a very influential thing in life. The result can cause flooding.

After that came the social change from society. Real examples of changes in nature are also happening due to the Covid-19 pandemic. Even though it has a huge impact on life, this pandemic also has an impact on nature.

At the start of the Covid-19 outbreak, people were asked to stay at home. Indirectly, this condition helps nature to heal itself. It is known that air pollution decreases at that time, so the air becomes clearer.

Not only that, the Covid-19 pandemic has also made social changes in society. Such as changes in the education system that switches to using technology. Actually, not only education, many things have turned to the digital realm as a result of the Covid-19 pandemic.

b. Influence from Other Cultures

This external factor is a significant factor in answering the reasons why society is constantly experiencing socio-cultural changes. Other cultures that enter society often leave scars. These scars make socio-cultural changes.

However, the former referred to here is another word for people being captivated by other cultures. It also has an impact on the life of the community itself. Like western cultures that entered Indonesia.

The tendency between physical relations carried out by two or more people certainly has reciprocity. This means that among members of society will certainly have an influence on culture. Other people’s culture will be accepted and will affect the community.

It happened sooner or later. Another example of a strong influence from other cultures is from South Korea. This country, which has many groups or idols, is very popular in Indonesia.

As a result of the influx of South Korean culture, there was social change. As in terms of music, clothing, beauty to food. These are examples of socio-cultural changes.

If the culture in society influences each other, it will cause other things. Examples include assimilation, diffusion, acculturation and so on. That is an example of another culture in its influence on socio-cultural change.

c. War

War is also one of the reasons why society is constantly experiencing socio-cultural changes. Warfare generally occurs between groups with groups. The winning group will impose its culture.

Social change is one of the impacts that occur as a result of war. This social change will involve all components of society. After that it will bring various kinds of changes.

Changes that occur in the social order have a certain scale. Both large and small scale.

Those are 7 reasons why society is constantly experiencing socio-cultural changes. Find other interesting things at www.sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always present interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

Source: from various sources

• Definition of Social Sciences: Kinds and Examples
• 13 Examples of Social Problems in Indonesia
• Definition of Modernization: Characteristics, Impact and Examples
• Definition of Social Group Dynamics, Factors, and Aspects
• Definition and Examples of Humans as Social Beings

Job Prospects for Accounting Graduates – Until now, the Accounting major is still one of the most popular college majors for prospective new students. This department itself then studies the art of classifying, recording, and summarizing in a monetary measure. Accounting is a branch of knowledge that is much needed in the business world.

No wonder then that there are many companies that accept graduates to help with financial management. Want to study in this Department? Here are some promising job prospects that await graduates. What are they? Check these out!

The Accounting major is perfect for you who have an interest in the financial world and want to dive deeper into the business world, you will learn about various transactions in it. Studying in this department will also learn various things related to financial reports. In the early days of your studies, you will be invited to study introductory accounting or financial accounting which contains various basic accounting knowledge and further understanding.

Entering the second year, you will be invited to study intermediate financial accounting or intermediate accounting which contains the development of a basic understanding of accounting towards a more complex scientific field. For example, on bonds or bond transactions and how to calculate share capital in more detail.

Furthermore, entering the third year you will study advanced financial accounting (Advance Accounting ) which studies the preparation of financial reports for a company, Sinaumed’s. Here are some job prospects for Accounting graduates that can be your choice:

A career in accounting itself promises quite promising income. Not only that, career advancement is guaranteed. According to statistics from the American Bureau of Labor, the average income of an Accountant can reach up to $ 65,940 per year. Although this amount can vary greatly, depending on location, field, working hours, work experience and various other factors.

The American Bureau of Labor also reports that 10% of accountants make nearly $116,000 annually. Accountants have longer working hours than other professions, but are directly proportional to the higher pay. So it is not surprising that this department later became one of the most popular majors in Indonesia.

In addition, almost every sector requires staff in the field of accounting. The job prospects themselves start from becoming an accountant, be it a Public Sector Accountant (Government Accountant), Internal Auditor, Public Accountant (AP), Tax Administrator, Tax Auditor, Banking Accounting Staff, Agency Auditor Financial Supervisor (BPK), Financial Consultants, Teaching Staff, both in Higher Education (Lecturers) and Teachers, Entrepreneurs.

Job Prospects for Accounting Graduates

1. Public Accountant

A Public Accountant can work in a company or individually. His duties include starting from preparing and analyzing various reports and financial documents. This profession must also have a good understanding of tax regulations, and keep abreast of the latest developments in tax regulations. The Professional Accounting Officer himself includes updating financial documents and recording data.

They don’t analyze data like accountants, but only provide data. This profession can also work in various industries. Jobs in this field also make use of computers and technology. Usually no special qualifications are required to be accepted into this profession. Indonesia itself already has a variety of accounting standards used in various organizational and business entities.

However, the main accounting standard in the country itself is IFRS ( International Financing Reporting Standards ) which has also been used on a global scale. Indonesia as a member of IFAC ( International Federation of Accountants ) is also one of the factors why IFRS is used as an accounting standard in Indonesia. Accountant duties include:

• Prepare financial reports from the company in an integral manner, so that they can be used by internal and external parties in making decisions
• Ensuring accountability of sources, implementing a reporting system that is tailored to accountability centers within an organization so that the reporting system can contribute to the effective use of resources and measurement of management achievement
• External reporting, participating in the process of developing the accounting principles that underlie external reporting.
• Prepare financial reports in accordance with the qualitative characteristics of IAI financial reports, 2004, namely understandable, relevant, materialistic, reliable and comparable, relevant and reliable information constraints, and fair presentation
• Planning, formulating and participating in developing the planning system, setting the expected goals, and choosing the right ways to monitor the direction of progress in achieving the goals.
• Evaluating, considering historical implications and expected events, and helping to choose the best way to act
• Control, ensuring the integrity of financial information related to the organization’s activities and its resources, monitoring and measuring performance, and taking corrective actions needed to return activities to the expected ways

For Sinaumed’s who is interested in the public accounting profession, the book Understanding the Work of a Public Accountant in the Capital Market can be used to better understand what a public accountant actually does in the world of work.

2. Accounting Manager

The Accounting Manager is in charge of managing and overseeing the accounting department as well as all areas of financial reporting. He is then tasked with maintaining accounting principles and developing best practices, as well as systems to analyze, collect, and report information. An Accounting Manager must also be able to have a solid understanding of various Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP).

The accounting manager will also advise on financial reporting, budgets, financial strategies and forecasts. Learn various tips and secrets behind accounting, especially for non-accounting managers through the book Accounting & the Secret Behind it for Non-Accounting Managers.

He is also responsible for managing the accounting team, preparing ledgers, assisting with audits and supporting managers across the team with financial procedures. The responsibilities of this profession include:

• Accounting Manager is in charge of Assign projects and direct staff on a project to ensure compliance and accuracy
• The Accounting Manager is in charge of Fulfilling financial accounting objectives
• The Accounting Manager is in charge of Creating and maintaining various fiscal records with the aim of documenting transactions
• The Accounting Manager is in charge of budget preparation, overseeing budget reports, and budget analysis
• Documenting complex financial information for executives and managers 
• Supervise and manage various daily operations in the accounting department
• Monthly process and year-end process, accounts payable, payroll and utilities, treasury, budgeting, cash forecasting, cash receipts, general ledger, capital asset reconciliation, trust account statement reconciliation, income and expense variance analysis, current checks, fixed asset activity, activity debts and others
• The Accounting Manager will analyze accounting data, monitor and produce reports or financial statements
• Establish and enforce appropriate accounting methods, policies and principles
• Coordinate and complete audits on an annual basis
• Improve procedures and systems and initiate various corrective actions
• Provide advice on financial management and procedures as well as the development of various policies
• Oversee financial reports for tax, regulatory agencies, shareholders, and other financial groups related to company finances

Before continuing reading, sinaumedia has several digital books for job seekers.

3. Account Officers

Account Officer (AO), his job is to market the company’s products to prospective customers who are considered potential and then monitor the financing provided so that the customer concerned then fulfills his obligations to the company, the Account Officer is also responsible for establishing good relations with customers where he plays a role as officers, or people who handle various problems being faced by customers.

If interpreted literally, an Account Officer is someone who takes care of various matters related to clients on a daily basis. Due to the importance of the client’s position in the banking and financial world, the following are some of the duties of an account officer:

• Conducting various Product Introductions to Customers, Clients, or Consumers
• Performing Follow Up on Customer Clients. Each customer must also be introduced to the various banking products concerned
• Ensuring consumers, or customers, and also clients understand well the products introduced.
• Maintain credibility and company name well
• Conduct an analysis of debtors who are considered potential and provide various offers continuously
• Measuring the level of risk, Analyzing collateral or debtor guarantees, Knowing the debtor’s business history and Doing debtor history with BI Ceking
• Managing Customer Credit AO, must also be able to manage credit from the customer itself. This means that AO monitors customer credit whether it can do credit again or not. So that financing from banks to customers remains smooth and not jammed
• Making Reports, Every month there is a report that must be made by AO for work accountability for 1 full month. As for the report on customer analysis, adding new customers, adding prospective customers and others related to banking problems between banks and customers. 

In Indonesia itself, account officers can also be found in Islamic banks. It is very important for this profession to understand and understand the philosophical concepts and operational technical financing from analysis to completion which are discussed in full in the book The Way of Sharia: Guide to Becoming an Account Officer of a Sharia Bank.

4. Financial Analyst

The Financial Analyst is tasked with assessing the stability and profitability of a business, sub-business or project. Financial analysis presents a report in the form of ratios to the management of a business as a reference for making company policies. Based on the results of this analysis, management can decide whether to continue or not to continue the operations of a business or part of a business.

In addition, the Financial Analyst also manufactures or purchases raw materials in the production process, purchases or rents production machines, negotiates to obtain bank loans to increase the company’s working capital, as well as various other decisions that allow management to make the right choice of various alternatives. in managing the company.

5A Financial Analyst will also study performance investments such as stocks, bonds, commodities and more to provide guidance to businesses and individuals making investment decisions.

They can advise companies on financial strategic decisions, such as the ideal company structure. A Financial Analyst is responsible for the financial planning and analysis of a company, which enables the organization to make well-informed commercial decisions. This Professional Responsibilities include:

• Compile financial reports which include collecting, formatting, analysis and solution recommendations, Sinaumed’s
• Make cash flow projections and company profit predictions in the short, medium and long term
• Recommend financial action through the results of an assessment of financial parameters for alignment with company goals
• Building a financial database includes collecting data and its sources , verification and validation, to the process of backing up the data
• Recommend the financial structure that must be maintained based on the analysis of the company’s financial pattern
• Provide reports on the company’s financial condition through a series of financial analysis
• Evaluate the planning and budget that has been made, by identifying the outcomes that have been obtained and the potential return in the future
• Observe basic economic, industry, and company developments by analyzing information from publications and financial services, investment banking firms, government agencies, trade publications, corporate sources, or personal interviews
• Analyze the company’s liquidity conditions.

5. Internal Auditors

Companies in any field definitely need the role of an internal auditor whose job is to ensure that the results of the company’s financial statements are in accordance with the original. Internal auditors must also ensure that all management has conducted business efficiently and there have been no irregularities.

Therefore, the function of the internal auditor must be properly maintained within a company so that there is a control system that is used to prevent deviations from occurring which is more fully discussed in the Internal Auditor Quality Control System book.

The profession of an internal auditor requires high honesty so that irregularities do not occur in the company. The duties of the Internal Auditor include:

• Prepare and implement the Annual Internal Audit Work Plan.
• Determine the frequency of audits, the subject of inspection and the scope of the audit to achieve the audit objectives.
• Test and evaluate the implementation of internal control and risk management systems in accordance with company policies.
• Examine and evaluate the efficiency and effectiveness in operations, finance, accounting, human resources and other activities.
• Provide suggestions for improvement and other objective information relating to the activities being examined at all levels of management as needed.
• Make audit reports and submit them to the Board of Directors and Board of Commissioners.
• Monitor, analyze and report on the implementation of follow-up improvements that have been suggested.
• Develop a program to evaluate the quality of the internal audit activities carried out.
• Conduct special inspections when necessary (whistle-blower).

6. Assistant Controller

As an experienced accounting graduate, you can have a career as an assistant controller for a company or organization. The assistant controller supports company control in all activities related to accounting, including managerial accounting, follow-up accounting, and financial activities within the company.

As a careerist in this field, you should have strong analytical, communication, organizational, and technological skills. A career in this position generally requires at least five years of experience in accounting, or finance, or public accounting experience.

As a graduate with a degree in accounting you can come here, but it is preferred for applicants with an MBA (Master of Business Administration) degree or for applicants who have a CPA (Certified Public Accountant) or CMA (Certified Management Accountant) certificate. In general, the duties and responsibilities of the assistant controller include reviewing financial data, assisting in issuing and submitting invoices, preparing written budgets and reports based on customer needs, establishing an internal control system to prevent errors in financial reports, presenting reports for monthly, quarterly, and the end of the year, as well as other tasks. Account controller duties have the following responsibilities;

• Ensuring that the company’s billing and payment processes are carried out as they should
• Ensure that the data in the accounting system is properly updated.
• Ensuring that the process of bookkeeping and other accounting administration is carried out properly.
• Ensure monthly tax reports from the company are available and signed by the manager in a timely manner so as not to incur fines.
• Ensuring all matters related to DO, PO, Invoice and Tax can be allocated properly.
• Ensuring that all internal company interests related to the accounting division are carried out properly
• Ensuring that all matters relating to the administration of BPJS TK, BPJS Health and other insurance are carried out properly.
• Ensuring that other tasks that may be assigned by management to you are carried out properly.

Problems That Arise in Economic Diversity – Sinaumed’s must have known that our country, Indonesia, has a lot of diversity. Both social, cultural, and even economic diversity. This is due to the diversity of the population.

From this unequal diversity, of course, various problems will arise, for example inter-ethnic conflicts. Unknowingly, these inter-ethnic conflicts are sometimes triggered by economic problems.

Then, what are the problems that arise in the existence of economic diversity in our country, Indonesia? Let’s look at the following review so that Sinaumed’s can understand it!

7 Problems in Indonesia’s Economic Diversity

The diversity of economic conditions that exist in society is related to the diversity of job levels, professions, positions, positions, to educational backgrounds that can affect income. In short, each individual has their own job and income, so not all of them are the same in terms of finances. Well, of course this diversity will cause various problems, including social inequality.

According to Indrastuti (2009), economic diversity is a matter of various types in an economic activity or livelihood. Meanwhile, according to Haris Iskandar (2017), economic activity is all activities carried out by individuals to fulfill their needs.

The following are some of the problems that arise from the existence of economic diversity in Indonesian society.

1. Limited Job Opportunities for the Community

The limited job opportunities are increasingly being felt, especially in the current conditions of the Covid-19 pandemic. The large number of companies or jobs that go bankrupt indirectly causes the workers to inevitably have to look for new jobs.

However, finding a new job is not easy because one another’s economic conditions are also difficult. In addition, along with the development of the times, jobs also become diverse and must have certain skills. Not everyone has this particular skill.

This indirectly affects the diversity of the economy, so it is possible that there will also be conflicts between communities.

2. Social Gap

Well, this is a clear problem that will arise in a diverse economy. There are social strata in terms of the economy, namely the upper economic class, upper middle class, to the lower economic class.

You can see concrete examples around you, there is someone who is in the upper economic class so it will be easy to meet your needs, both primary and tertiary. There is also someone who is in the economic class and below, to fulfill their primary needs in the form of filling their stomach, they think twice, let alone to meet their secondary to tertiary needs.

The existence of these striking gaps or differences is an example of the problems encountered from the economic diversity in Indonesian society.

3. Occurrence of Unfair Competition

The next problem is that there will be competition or competition that occurs among community members. Starting from industrial matters, MSMEs, to the process of applying for work.

In the case of SMEs, for example, there are two people who jointly founded SMEs in the form of aci meatballs. However, these two people have different economic circumstances, so one person can buy raw materials of average quality but manage to pay an agent to print a trademark. While one other person can only buy good quality raw materials, but sells them through stalls.

Through the difference in raw material capital, of course it will give different results. Consumers tend to choose food products that have a trademark, even though the quality is not necessarily good.

4. Social Jealousy

The difference or diversity of economic conditions not only causes social inequality, but also social jealousy. This jealousy is usually “submitted” to people of the economic class and above and who have large amounts of wealth.

In fact, this social jealousy can have an effect on criminal acts, such as theft, robbery, to murder to target property.

5. Poverty

Poverty is a condition in which a community is unable to meet their needs, both primary and secondary needs. In Indonesia, poverty is included in the economic problems that are still being faced by the government.

Previously, various efforts had been made to tackle poverty, starting from the Village Assistance Program to the issuance of a Certificate of Disadvantage (SKTM).

However, despite the efforts that have been made, poverty in Indonesia has not just decreased. The problem of poverty actually affects various things, ranging from education, access to health, to the distribution of Natural Resources (SDA).

6. The Emergence of Unemployment

The problem of unemployment is almost the same as the previous point, namely limited employment opportunities. It can be said that with the limited number of available jobs, it will have an effect on increasing unemployment.

The problem of unemployment is actually not only experienced by the Indonesian state, but also in various countries. Unemployment is caused by the number of labor force is not balanced with the number of existing jobs. As a result, the labor force does not get the opportunity to work, and causes unemployment.

7. Inflation

Inflation is a process of rising prices that occur continuously. The price increase is related to the market mechanism which is influenced by various factors, one of which is the increasing level of public consumption. There are several causes of inflation, namely demand-pull inflation and cost-push inflation.

However, it turns out that the problem of inflation affects one another , you know, with the problem of unemployment!

Based on the Philips Curve , it is illustrated that there is a negative relationship between the inflation rate and unemployment. If the inflation rate is high, the unemployment rate will be low.

Actually, the relationship between inflation and unemployment is largely determined by the amount of supply and demand for goods/services in the market. For example, if the demand for goods/services increases, this will also affect the level of demand for labor.

How to Overcome the Problem of Economic Diversity in Indonesia

As a country that is “responsible” to its people, a country is obliged to think about efforts to overcome various problems related to economic diversity. So, here are some ways or efforts to overcome problems resulting from economic diversity that exists in society.

Ways to Overcome Economic Instability

This instability is related to the problem of limited employment, social inequality, unfair competition in establishing a business, to social jealousy. It should be noted that this condition of economic instability often occurs in various countries, not only in Indonesia. However, what is different is the effort to overcome them.

1. Economic Empowerment

This economic empowerment effort is intended to make economic conditions more stable, especially in a small scope. Then, what is included in this small scope? For example, Micro Finance Institutions (LKM) focus on developing savings and loan activities, as well as developing Micro Small Enterprises (UKM).

2. Massive Job Opening

This effort is related to lowering the existing unemployment rate. From those who previously did not have or get a job, they can work and be productive to meet their needs. In addition, efforts to create large-scale job opportunities can also have an impact on per capita income in a country. The higher the labor force, the higher the increase in per capita income each year.

3. UMR (Regional Minimum Wage) Setting Policy

This effort must be carried out by the government so that it is wiser in setting the UMR (Regional Minimum Wage) by taking into account the needs of the people in the region. This is because the cost of living between regions has differences, so the UMR determination must also be balanced with the cost of living.

4. Opening On The Job Training

This effort is almost the same as the previous point, which is to open as many jobs as possible. The difference is, in this training effort is focused on people who are less skilled in a skill.

It would be better if this training was set at a low price or even free of charge, because most people who are unemployed tend to be in an unstable financial condition. From this training activity, participants will later receive a certificate showing that they are skilled in a skill and can be used to register for jobs.

5. Focus on Infrastructure Development

This effort must be carried out by the government so that it can orient development, especially on infrastructure, both in the industrial and food sectors. After all, this infrastructure development will also indirectly provide jobs for the people.

Not only that, infrastructure development, both in the industrial and food sectors can also generate international trade, so there is a possibility that this country will not only act as an importer, but also as an exporter.

How to Overcome Unemployment

The existence of unemployment is the main problem of the condition of economic diversity that occurs in Indonesia. Actually, the government has been trying for a long time to reduce the unemployment rate, it’s just that sometimes it doesn’t go hand in hand with employment conditions.

So, here are some ways to overcome or reduce unemployment.

1. Expanding job opportunities for the unemployed, namely by opening new jobs in various fields, such as agriculture, trade, industry, and services.
2. Improving the quality of education. This of course can be useful, especially for new graduates so that they are ready to become a more skilled workforce.
3. Improving the quality of the working country, namely by providing skills education, both through formal and non-formal education.
4. Provide opportunities to work abroad. This effort has been carried out by the government and various employment agencies, namely Indonesian Migrant Workers (TKI) and Female Workers (TKW).
5. Encouraging the growth of a business or home industry.
6. Provide socialization regarding the role of family planning (family planning), to reduce the rate of population growth.

Efforts to Overcome Inflation

It should be noted that this inflation cannot be eliminated completely, so the government is only trying to keep inflation as low as possible.

1. The Central Bank will generally rely on the amount in circulation as well as controlling prices with the interest rate as its instrument.
2. Strengthening the Discount Policy, is the policy of the Central Bank, namely by influencing the circulation of money while simultaneously raising and lowering interest rates.
3. Open Market Policy, namely by buying or selling securities.
4. Determining the Cash Ratio, namely the minimum ratio between the cash owned by a commercial bank and the amount of demand deposits (checks and demand deposits) issued by the bank concerned.

So, that’s a review of the problems that arise from this economic diversity. The culmination of the economic problems is the increase in unemployment. Even so, there have been many efforts made by the government to reduce the unemployment rate, but until now it still persists.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Also Read!

• 10 Reasons Why Inflation Can Occur
• Types of Unemployment in Indonesia
• Per Capita Income in the Country’s Economic Development
• What Is a Liberal Economic System?
• Definition of Economic Motives and Examples
• Understanding the Differences in Economic Development and Economic Growth
• 7 Economic System, What’s Up?
• Types of Economic Activities and Examples
• What is a Capitalist Economic System?
• Definition of Economic Development

Marketing mix strategy – After successfully identifying your target audience and business competitors, the next thing you need to do is develop a marketing mix. Every business needs its own marketing mix to attract customers.

Are you just starting a business or are you already running a large corporation? The importance of an effective marketing strategy cannot be overlooked. If you are a marketing researcher, you have probably heard of the marketing mix, also known as the marketing mix .

Simply put, the marketing mix is ​​all about getting the right product in the right place, at the right time, and at the right price. It includes everything a business can do to create demand for its products/services, using a set of tools to plan and execute direct targeted marketing activities

The marketing mix usually consists of four variables known as the 4Ps of marketing. This concept is designed to meet the company’s marketing goals by providing value to customers at all stages of the 4Ps of marketing. The marketing mix or marketing mix was originally introduced by Neil H. Borden in the late 1940s and has become one of the most popular marketing strategies in the business world.

Definition of Marketing Mix

Marketing or marketing is a business process that is influenced by various factors including social, cultural, political, economic and managerial factors. In an effort to achieve marketing objectives, it is necessary to have marketing aspects (marketing mix) known as the four marketing mixes, namely: product, price, promotion, and place.

The four mixtures form a single unit that cannot be separated. It can be said that the marketing mix is ​​a set of marketing tools that companies use to mark the long term.

The marketing mix is ​​a series of actions taken by the company to build and market its products or services to its customers. This strategy helps ensure that you can provide the right customer with the right product at the right time, in the right place, and at the right price.

Initially the marketing mix was achieved through the 4P marketing, namely product, price, place and promotion. Along with the development of the marketing strategy to date, this concept has been expanded into 7P, namely with the addition of people, process, physical evidence. 

Developing the right marketing mix for a product/service starts with understanding the 4Ps of marketing. Let’s discuss the 4Ps and 7Ps of marketing in more detail in implementing the right marketing strategy for your company’s products or services.

Marketing Mix Strategy

1. Product _

Products are anything that can be brought to market and can satisfy consumer needs. Consumer satisfaction refers not only to the physical appearance of a product, but also a series of satisfactions obtained when buying a product. This satisfaction is an accumulation of physical, psychological, symbolic satisfaction and services provided by producers.

In competitive conditions, it is very dangerous for companies to rely only on existing products without making special efforts to develop them. Therefore, to maintain and increase sales and market share, every company must make efforts to improve and improve manufacturing products in a better direction, in order to further increase efficiency, satisfaction and attractiveness.

Product strategy in this case is to determine how and deliver the right product to the target market, so as to satisfy its customers, while increasing the company’s profits in the long run by increasing sales and share growth.

Product decisions include determining the physical delivery of the product in the form of merchandise, the branding that must be attached to the product, the features that are given to the product related to the product, the product packaging, its arrangement, and the services provided in product delivery.

The product selection decision is the first step that must be determined by a company in order to continue to grow. After the product is identified, the next step is to make a decision regarding the price, location and promotion to be taken.

In the marketing mix, product strategy is the most important factor, because it can affect other marketing strategies. The selection of the types of products to be produced and marketed will determine the necessary promotional activities, as well as pricing and distribution methods.

Product strategies that can be carried out include decisions about product references or mix, trademarks (brands) , how to package products (product packaging) , quality levels or product quality, and services (services) provided.

To plan product offerings, marketers need to understand product tiers, as follows:

1. The main product (core benefit) is a benefit that is really needed and will be consumed by customers from each product.

2. Genetic product , which is a basic product capable of carrying out the most basic functions of the product (minimum product design to carry out this function).

3. Expected product is the final product offered with different characteristics and conditions that are generally expected and agreed to be purchased.

4. Complementary Products , namely different attributes of a product that add or add different benefits and services to provide additional satisfaction and differentiate it from other competing products.

5. Potential Products, namely the types of additions or modifications that might be developed.

2. Price ( Price)

After the product has been successfully made with all its attributes, the next step is to determine the price of the product. The definition of price is the amount of value (in the form of money) that must be paid by consumers to buy or enjoy certain goods or services.

Pricing is an important aspect of the marketing mix. Price is a very important thing to note because price is one of the drivers of the behavior of the product or service provided. Pricing errors will greatly affect the products offered and will result in unsold products.

Price is the amount required to obtain a certain amount of a combination of goods and services. Valuation is always a dilemma for every business because valuation is not the absolute power or authority of an entrepreneur. By setting prices, companies can generate sales revenue from the products they manufacture and market.

The role of valuation will be very important, especially in the context of increasingly fierce competition and limited development demands. In increasingly fierce competition, especially in the market, the role of price is very important, especially in maintaining and increasing the company’s position in the market which is reflected in the company’s market share, as well as increasing the company’s market share in selling and making profits.

Fixed price setting must be adjusted to the company’s goals. The purpose of pricing in a company in general is as follows:

A. To survive

If the company’s goal in pricing is to survive, then pricing is done at the best possible price. The goal is for the product or service to be offered for sale in the market at a low price but still profitable.

B. To maximize profits

Pricing aims to increase sales so that profits are maximized. Pricing can often be done at a low price or a high price.

C. Expand market share

To expand market share, the goal is to expand or increase the number of customers. Setting a low price will increase the number of customers and competitors’ customers who will switch to the product offered.

D. Product quality

The purpose of product quality pricing is to create the impression that the product or service offered is of high quality or superior to competitors. Usually the price is set as high as possible because there is always an assumption that a quality product is one that costs more than competitors.

E. Due to competitors

Pricing by looking at competitors’ prices with the aim that the prices offered are more competitive than the prices offered by competitors. That is, it may exceed competitors’ prices for some products, or vice versa, it may be lower.

3. Place

Choosing the right location means finding the location that can have the greatest positive impact on the organization and avoiding as many negative impacts on the company as possible. If the company has determined the location of the business, the location of the business will determine the costs incurred and it is difficult to minimize them.

Location decisions often depend on the type of business. For industrial location decisions, the strategy used is usually a cost minimization strategy, while for goods or services business operations, the strategy used is to focus on access to the target market.

In general, the purpose of the location selection strategy is to maximize the benefits to the organization and minimize the costs incurred by the organization’s business. Choosing the wrong location affects the maximization of organizational profits.

The mistake of an organization when it is established without considering the selection of an appropriate location, then some time after business operations, several problems will arise such as:

labor issues, production costs and target markets. Errors like this can make the organization less effective. So, the main cause of differences in location selection is the different needs of each business.

Good position is a personal matter. This is often referred to as the situational approach. In his book, Hani Handoko mentions the factors that often need to be considered when choosing a business location, as follows:

A. Community environment

The willingness of the people in an area to accept all the consequences, both positive and negative, of establishing a factory in that area is an important requirement. Companies must pay attention to environmental and ecological values ​​where they will carry out their business, because factories often produce waste in the form of water, air or solid waste which is contaminated and often causes noise.

On the other hand, society needs industry or business because it provides jobs and money that industry brings to society. A fun community environment for employees and managers to live in also helps them work better. The availability of school facilities, recreational, cultural and sporting activities are important factors in this decision.

B. Proximity to the market

Proximity to the market will allow companies to provide better service to customers and often reduce distribution costs. It is also important to determine whether the company’s market is large or serves only a small segment of the population, whether the product is perishable, the weight of the product, and the ratio of distribution costs of finished products per product. Large companies with broad market reach can place factories in many places to access the market.

C. Labor

Wherever a business is located, it must have a workforce, which is why it is important to provide adequate manpower. For many companies, the habits and attitudes of prospective workers in a field are more important than skills and education, because it is rare for companies to find new workers who are willing to work, have various jobs and have very high levels of expertise.

So the company must organize a special training program for new workers. People in one region may make a better workforce than those in another, as evidenced by their varying levels of absenteeism and morale. In addition, it is necessary to pay attention to the withdrawal of labor, quantity and gaps, salaries, as well as competition between companies in fighting for a quality workforce

D. Proximity to raw materials and suppliers

If the raw materials are heavy and shrinkage is high during production, the company should be located near the sources of raw materials, for example cement, wood, paper, and steel factories. But if the finished product is heavier, larger, and of lower value, choose another location.

Also, if the raw material spoils quickly, such as a canned fruit company, it is better to stay close to the raw material. Being closer to raw materials and suppliers allows companies to get better service from suppliers and save on material sourcing costs.

4. Promotion (Promotion)

Promotion is one of the most important variables of the marketing mix which is carried out to open new market share or expand the marketing network. Hurriyati said promotion is a marketing activity that aims to disseminate information, influence/persuade or remind the target market about the company and its products, which are ready to accept, buy and be loyal to the products offered by the company.

In modern marketing, producers are not only responsible for creating attractive products, but also must be able to communicate with consumers who are expected to become long-term consumers. In this case, what is called marketing communication is needed.

With marketing communications, manufacturers will not lose market share to be able to increase sales of the goods they produce. Like the other elements of the marketing mix, promotion includes support for marketing a product or service. In this case the combination of promotional elements

5. People

HR is a key component of the 7p marketing mix strategy. The human resource factor determines the success or failure of a company. It is undeniable that this factor plays an important role in the growth or even decline of a business.

This element refers to people, customers or employees who are directly related to your company’s products/services. Indeed, you should research your target market to understand if they need the type of product you offer. However, you also need to hire the right people so that you can do your best to build your future business.

This is why companies compete with each other to find the best candidates, they are even willing to pay more to hire freelancers who are experts in finding candidates for the company. .

Related questions, employees with high performance or vice versa, employees who are loyal or vice versa, employees who are able to serve consumers well or vice versa, will contribute to the success of service business companies in the market.

Another important factor in HR is the attitude and motivation of employees in the service sector. Attitudes can be implemented in a variety of ways, such as an employee’s physical appearance, tone of voice, body language, facial expressions, and words. While motivation will determine how much the employee wants or likes the work to be done.

6. Process

Systems and processes play an important role in creating and delivering quality services to your customers. Ensure secure processes to reduce unnecessary costs associated with implementation throughout the process. You can record steps throughout the process and analyze them to identify where you need to improve.

The process here includes how the company meets the needs of each customer, starting from the customer placing an order until finally getting what he wants.

Some businesses often have a unique or special way of serving customers. As in restaurants, many restaurants offer “show kitchen” facilities where consumers can watch every dish being prepared. This way of presenting is an example of implementing a marketing mix strategy in the food business.

7. Physical Evidence (Physical Appearance)

Physical Evidence refers to what customers see when consuming your company’s products/services. This includes your brand, your packaging, the environment in which you sell your products, and more. Ensuring all physical aspects related to products/services are in prime condition,

The appearance of the business location will explain how the business building is arranged. The company has unique use of interiors, attractive lighting systems, attractive room designs, etc.

Business people will definitely realize that the layout of a building in a business will definitely affect the mood of its visitors. An interior design that looks messy will definitely make consumers a little uncomfortable with the business situation.

Buildings must be able to create a pleasant atmosphere, in order to provide a visitor experience and added value. The visual component is very important in the marketing mix.

Author: Ziaggi Fadhil Zahran

Also read other articles:

Concepts and Examples of 4P Marketing Strategy Implementation

Differentiation Strategy: Definition, Aspects, and Types!

13 Promotional Goals and Powerful Ways to Realize Them

Marketing Mix: Definition, Origins, Concepts, Purpose, Functions, and Benefits

Personal Selling: Definition, Approach, Characteristics, Purpose, Process, and Others

The 7 Deadly Sins – Sin is an act of deviation from God’s law and will. In the Bible there is a lot of terminology for sin, such as sins of the heart, sins of the mind, sins of the mouth, and sins of deed. Surprisingly, humans often commit these sins in everyday life.

The church fathers also classify sins in the Bible into two types, namely venial sins and also deadly sins. “The Seven Deadly Sins” or the 7 major deadly sins is a concept used by the church since ancient times to teach congregations about sin. So, what’s included in The Seven Deadly Sins?

History of the 7 Deadly Sins

Actually, the Bible does not directly mention the 7 mortal sins, but this concept has been known for a long time. Starting from the fourth century, when Evagrius Ponticus a Christian monk wrote down the idea of ​​the Eight Evil Thoughts consisting of pride, lust, anger, greed, sadness, sloth, gluttony and pride.

Ponticus wrote the idea only for the other monks and not for the general public. In his writings, he explains how these eight thoughts can interfere with their spiritual practice.

Furthermore, John Cassian, one of Ponticus’ students, brought these ideas and ideas to the western church, it was here that Ponticus’ thoughts were translated from Greek into Latin.

In the sixth century, Ponticus ideas were reorganized by St. Gregory the Great who later became Pope Gregory I. In the process, the idea was changed by eliminating laziness and adding jealousy.

He also described pride as the “ruler” of the other seven vices. In the 13th century, a theologian named Thomas Aquinas revised this idea in his Summa Theologica (Summary of Theology).

In his list, Aquinas again includes “laziness” and removes “sorrow”. In addition, he also describes the nature of pride separately and makes it the supreme ruler of the seven great sins of mankind.

Finally, the concept of the seven grave sins that we know today was born which consists of Pride, Greed, Anger or Wrath, Envy or Envy, Lust or Fornication, Gluttony and Sloth or Torpor.

Basically, these seven major sins are not literally deadly sins or directly make the person who commits them die. However, these seven sins can give birth to other sins which are more serious and contrary to the “Seven Virtues of Catholicism”.

The Seven Virtues of Catholicism is another Catholic teaching which consists of Humility, Chastity, Liberality, Temperance, Patience, Diligence, and Kindness.

For example, when Sinaumed’s is controlled by greed you can do anything to satisfy that desire. Like stealing and even killing to get what you want. So greed is the main reason you commit other crimes.

7 Great Human Sins

1. Pride

As described above, pride is the culmination of the seven major sins, the most important and most dangerous sins. Arrogance is a trait that makes humans have excessive belief in their own abilities, so they are not aware of the existence of a gift from the Almighty.

Humans who are controlled by pride will feel that they are the most righteous among the others. This trait can also make humans really love themselves and will do anything to maintain their self-esteem.

God has indeed bestowed faith on human beings and at a reasonable point belief is a positive thing. However, if it is too much it can make humans trapped in self-destructive arrogance.

Unfortunately, sometimes it is still difficult for us to distinguish whether we are feeling confident or trapped in arrogance. However, if you think about it again, arrogance is usually born when we position ourselves as someone who is superior to others.

To deal with pride, we can start by building awareness that everything we get is a gift from God, giving more thanks for God’s grace, avoiding talking about our own goodness, and praising God a lot.

2. Greed

Covetousness means greed or a great desire to have wealth. A greedy person will keep wealth for himself without anyone else needing help.

Even greedy people are willing to sell anything to get wealth, when in fact wealth itself is only temporary. In addition to wealth, greed can also make humans ambitious to fulfill their personal interests in any way, including committing betrayal.

For a greedy person, stealing, robbing, and cheating are considered as an attempt to get wealth or something he wants. Then, what’s worse, he doesn’t want to share anything he has to help fellow humans in need.

The easiest way to overcome greed is to remember that wealth, position, social status are temporary. In addition, remembering that we will always need other people can also help reduce feelings of stinginess. Don’t forget to appreciate the efforts that have been made by others.

3. Envy

Envy is a feeling of dissatisfaction or displeasure when you see the strengths of others. These advantages are of various types, it can be power, wealth, achievement, position, to happiness. For example, feeling unhappy when there are friends who get better grades.

Generally, this feeling of jealousy arises because of the inability to have something better and also because they feel dissatisfied when they see other people’s happiness.

In this era of social media, it’s easier for us to feel jealous of other people. Because, we can see other people’s achievements and strengths through the photos or videos they upload on social media.

Then, how to overcome this jealousy? First, we must realize that envy is a great sin. Then, avoid words and deeds that belittle other people and always thank God for what we have.

4. Wrath/Anger (Wrath)

Wrath or anger, in Latin is called “Ira”. Under normal conditions, anger is a natural response that arises when you see injustice. However, anger in grave sins is more than that because it can lead to evil deeds.

In the Catechism it is stated that anger is the same as the desire to intentionally hurt or kill another person. These feelings can arise from selfish reasons, such as jealousy or something else.

When someone is controlled by anger, it will be difficult for him to use his mind, so he can easily hurt others, both through words and actions.

Therefore, it is better to build patience within yourself because patience is the opposite of anger. In addition, we must also always see the presence of God in fellow human beings.

On the other hand, try to do more exercise and divert feelings of anger to more positive things. For example, when you feel angry, you can listen to a song or take a walk while controlling your emotions.

5. Lust

Lust is defined as lust which means the desire to experience excessive sexual pleasure. Therefore, things such as sexual addiction, adultery, rape, fornication, perversion, bestiality, and incest are included in this lust.

When in fact lust with sex is a different thing. Sex is a way for humans to reproduce and includes a gift from God to men and women who are bound in a marriage.

Meanwhile, lust is the desire to get excessive sexual pleasure so that you are immersed in it and do not believe in the existence of pleasure that can be obtained from other things.

Humans who are controlled by their lust will be filled with dirty thoughts, lose their own freedom, do not feel inner peace, often feel guilty, have difficulty accepting themselves, can even fall into promiscuity.

In order to avoid the snares of lust, we must avoid things that can stimulate such as adult pictures and films. In addition, do more positive activities such as exercising, reading books, socializing with neighbors, or others.

6. Gluttony

Greedy or gluttony is a sin that arises from the habit of eating excessively so that what is eaten is eventually wasted. In short, gluttony is related to our way of eating.

A human being is said to be greedy if he eats before his time (Praepropere), consumes food that is very expensive (Laute), eats excessively (Nimis), eats with great desire (Ardenter), eats quickly because he does not want to lose to others (Studiose). ), and eat wildly like beasts (Forente).

In addition to being related to eating, greed can also be associated with an excessive desire to earn money. Humans who are enslaved by greed will justify any means to get wealth and wealth. In fact, he valued his wealth more than God.

In order to avoid this feeling of greed, we must get used to eating, drinking, studying, working in a balanced way so that life is more organized. In addition, we must also remember that our body can only accommodate a certain amount of food each day, if it is too much it will cause dangerous diseases.

7. Sloth (Sloth)

Laziness is a condition of not caring about anything around it. Laziness is included in the great sin because it can make humans fail to maximize the potential that has been given by God.

Lazy people usually give up easily, have no desire to act, often do careless things, and only try half-heartedly. More than that, laziness can be related to a feeling of despair which will make humans fail to maximize their talents.

In addition, there are several characteristics that describe laziness, including:

• Glad to be unemployed
• Often negligent in carrying out tasks
• Reckless and irresponsible
• Not being able to complete assignments or work on time
• Not prioritizing cleanliness and tidiness
• Too much rest
• Often procrastinate and undisciplined

One of the most effective ways to overcome laziness is to live in an orderly and disciplined manner so that we get used to doing things as they should. Then, don’t forget, always motivate yourself to complete assignments and work on time.

The 7 Demons Representing the 7 Deadly Sins

The seven deadly sins are represented by the 7 devils or princes of hell who have extraordinary power and become the highest authority in hell. Originally, they were archangels (Archangels) who lived in heaven, but after rebelling against God and causing war, they fell into hell with Lucifer.

After falling into hell, they lost God’s love and grace and then turned into terrible demons that represent the 7 great sins. Well, who are these demons? Here’s the full list.

1. Lucifer (Pride)

Lucifer comes from the Latin which means “Bringer of Light” and is the name for the planet Venus or the Morning Star. Lucifer became the most powerful ruler of hell as well as the most beautiful heavenly being.

Lucifer used to be an archangel, but thanks to his arrogance he felt he could rule heaven so he opposed God. Finally, Lucifer was thrown into hell and then turned into a devil.

2. Mammon (Covetousness)

Mammon is a demon that represents greed and is a symbol of wealth, greed, and injustice. In hell, Mammon will enslave people who are greedy for money, happy to cheat, often harm others, are stingy, and greedy for their wealth.

3. Leviathan (Envy)

Leviathan is a representative of the sin of envy and is often depicted as a terrible creature in the form of a large sea monster that holds the door to Hell in its mouth (Hellmouth).

Leviathan has the job of tempting men to commit blasphemy. In addition, in hell he is responsible for punishing humans who are overcome by feelings of envy and jealousy by swallowing them.

4. Satan/Amon (Wrath/Anger)

Satan or Ammon is a fallen angel who is the embodiment of wrath and rage. Satan is depicted as a sad and disgusting figure. His job is to bring out the anger that triggers other sins in humans. Examples of actions that arise due to Satan’s influence are killing other people and also committing suicide.

5. Asmodeus (Lust)

Asmodeus is a demon who represents lust and is in charge of twisting human sexual desires. Every human being trapped into Asmodeus’s temptations will be punished in the second level of hell forever.

Asmodeus is also the king of hell who has subordinates as many as 72 demon armies. He is often depicted as a being with three heads. The first head resembles that of a bull, the second that of a man with a crown, and the third that of a ram. He also has a mouth that emits fire and a snake’s tail.

In the book of Tobit, it is told that Asmodeus fell in love with a woman named Sarah. In order to have Sarah, he then killed seven of Sarah’s husbands. But Asmodeus must be defeated by the eighth husband named Tobias.

As a result of this incident, Asmodeus was appointed a devil when he was banished to hell and because of his lust Asmodeus became a representative of the sin of lust.

6. Beelzebub (Gluttony)

Beelzebub is the name of the devil who represents the sin of gluttony. He is also known as the “Lord of Flies” because he has the ability to fly. He is in charge of inviting people to be greedy, eat a lot, and be picky about food.

Beelzebub is often associated with Lucifer because he is a devil whose cruelty is almost the same as Lucifer.

7. Belphegor (Sloth)

Belphegor becomes a demon that represents the sin of laziness and has two different depictions. First, Belphegor is described as a beautiful young woman while in the world and the second is described as a bearded demon who has horns and sharp nails.

In some traditions, Belphegor was once an archangel named Bola-Peor. But when Lucifer rebelled, he did not support the rebels and did not support the angels. As a result, he was considered a deserter and then banished to hell.

Belphegor is known for his cunning. He will make people try to gain wealth by means of deceit, such as deceit or corruption.

Thus the discussion about the 7 major sins and also the devil who represents the 7 great sins. Hopefully all the discussion above can add to your insight. If you want to find various kinds of insights through books, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com .

Job Prospects for the Department of Agrotechnology – Did you know that one of the industries that is currently Indonesia’s priority until 2035 is the Department of Agrotechnology . A major that studies the procedures for applying technology to cultivate plants effectively and efficiently even on less fertile land, in this department you will learn knowledge about soil, water, and diseases from cultivating these plants, and much more. Then what are the job prospects for graduates, see a more complete explanation below, Sinaumed’s!

Definition of the Department of Agrotechnology

The Agrotechnology Department is a department that studies the procedures for applying technology to cultivate plants effectively and efficiently even on less fertile land. Lectures in this department will learn how to manage a commodity from seeds to products and then products.

You will also learn about plants and herbs, food or horticulture, as well as how or the process of planting properly, the harvesting process, the processing process, and the production process. Agrotechnology also studies the application of technology in plant cultivation, from planning to designing an effective and productive crop production system utilizing science and technology such as genetics, physiology, breeding, seeding, crop production and so on.

You will also study land and planting media (soil evaluation, plant fertility and nutrition, fertilization, microbiology and so on), environmental factors (pests and diseases and weeds, agro-ecosystem or ecology and so on), as well as various other supporting sciences such as biotechnology, entrepreneurship, business ethics and management in order to obtain crop production efficiency in overcoming various problems in the agriculture-food-horticulture, seed and plantation sectors.

Agrotechnology graduates are urgently needed in Indonesia, moreover today’s technological advances have penetrated into various fields including agriculture. With a combination of agrarian studies and technology, it is hoped that this department will become an asset for the Indonesian state as a spearhead for the development of the agricultural sector.

Job Prospects of the Department of Agrotechnology

This major is suitable for you who love nature and care about environmental sustainability, Sinaumed’s. Graduates can work at the National Coordinating Agency for Surveys and Mapping, the National Land Agency (BPN), to become community empowerment facilitators (NGOs) in the field of agribusiness or agriculture. Here are some of the other job prospects:

1. Researcher

The first agrotechnology work prospect is to become a researcher or scientist. As is well known, many agrotechnology courses will study businesses related to food production such as agricultural production. In the future, the need for researchers in relation to food production will be very important because it concerns the livelihoods of many people.

Researchers play an important role, and become an indicator of the progress of a country. Research activities are usually carried out by a special unit, institution or center owned by a company, university, or government agency whose job is to conduct research in the fields of science and technology.

The methods used in Research usually use standard scientific research techniques without expecting definite results (a form of pure scientific research) or to obtain predictive results that have commercial value in the near future. The researchers’ own tasks include:

• Carry out research, monitoring, evaluation, and research reporting
• Develop new products in their fields that are useful for life
• Operates every main tool, conducts tests and evaluates test results
• Develop various technical policies, plans and research programs
• Collaborating with companies related to the procurement of goods and services for the company’s research and development activities
• Support the implementation of quality research covering the fields of health, agro, environment, and industry
• Conduct tests, manufacture test kits, and develop new technologies to improve the quality of the products produced by the company
• Ensuring the quality of performance within the company is in accordance with predetermined standards.

2. Agricultural Consultants

Agrotechnology graduates can become agricultural consultants . His job is to provide advice or suggestions in the agricultural industry. An Agricultural Consultant must be able to provide guidance regarding human resource management in agriculture and financial management.

Agricultural consultants will create superior agricultural programs, especially in the diversification of various farming businesses. In this profession, not only your insight is also required to have good communication, and be able to maintain client confidentiality. Other Agricultural Consultant Responsibilities:

• Supervise activities such as irrigation, chemical use, harvesting, milking, breeding, or grading to ensure compliance with existing safety regulations or standards.
• Carrying out research in agriculture, monitoring, evaluating, and reporting research in agriculture.
• Visiting farmer groups in the working area to carry out advocacy, coaching, and counseling.
• Offering solutions to various problems regarding efforts to increase productivity, business efficiency, and income of farmers in working areas.
• Develop farmer groups so that they become economic and social strengths of the surrounding community.
• Develop various technical policies, plans and research programs in agriculture.
• Supporting the implementation of quality research in the agricultural sector which includes the health, agro, environmental and industrial sectors.

3. Social Workers

Not only is the land getting narrower, village farmers are generally becoming more individualized: working separately and competing with each other. Only with a willingness to work together, form farmer groups or cooperatives, they can achieve profitable farming economies of scale.

In this way, they can also hire expensive professionals, including even agricultural business managers. In building organizations/cooperatives, social workers equipped with communication, sociology and anthropology knowledge can play a role. Their role is also important in disseminating good agricultural practices.

4. Government Agencies

Graduates of the Agrotechnology Department can also work in the Ministry of Trade, or in various job sectors in BUMN. Apart from that, you can also work at the Central Statistics Agency (BPS), Cooperatives, Logistics Affairs Agency (Bulog), Village Unit Cooperatives, national mapping (National BPN), National Defense Agency (BPN), also Planning Agency and Regional Development ( BAPPEDA).

At BAPPEDA Agrotechnology graduates contribute to educating the wider community about how to manage agriculture, plantations and fields well. By becoming a BAPPEDA officer, you have contributed to the welfare of the people, Sinaumed’s.

In addition, Agribusiness Graduates can also work at the Agricultural Research and Development Agency, which is an Echelon I at the Ministry of Agriculture with the task of conducting research, development and innovation in agriculture. In carrying out its duties, the Research and Development Agency carries out the following functions:

• Preparation of technical policies, plans and programs for research, development and innovation in agriculture
• Implementation of research, development and innovation in agriculture
• Dissemination of research results, development and innovation in agriculture
• Monitoring, evaluating and reporting the implementation of research, development and innovation in agriculture
• Administrative implementation of the Agency for Agricultural Research and Development
• Implementation of other functions provided by the Ministry.

5. Plantation and Fertilizer Companies

Apart from being a plantation manager, you can also work for a plantation company, considering that there are many plantation companies in Indonesia, where their job is to research, care for and carry out innovations regarding plants. In addition to plantations and agriculture, graduates of Agrotechnology can also work in fertilizer companies. Indonesia has a lot of plantations that automatically require fertilizer to support their crop yields. You can occupy a position as a managerial officer or company operational officer.

6. Agrotechnology journalist

If you have the ability to write and intend to share the knowledge you have with the wider community, then becoming a writer is right for you. This job prospect is quite promising in the digital era like now. You can make a book about Agrotechnology knowledge from another point of view in the form of a book or e-book.

7. Entrepreneur

Farming business requires marketing expertise. Connecting producers with consumers. Opening up new markets. Including utilizing the internet and social media in marketing agricultural products. You can also become a business entrepreneur in plantation commodities, horticulture, food, forestry, seeds, pesticides, home industry businesses, fertilizers and agricultural production facilities.

In addition, many farmers only sell cheap raw products. Even though they can get better profits if they sell processed food products. Here you can play a role as a food innovator in creating a variety of food products, Sinaumed’s. Become Entrepreneur.

The skills required can be grouped into three main areas: technical skills such as writing, listening, oral presentations, organizing, coaching, working in teams, and technical know-how, business management skills including those in starting, developing, and manage the company.

Skills in decision making, marketing, management, financing, accounting, production, control, and negotiation are also very important in building and growing a new business. The last skill involves entrepreneurial skills. Some of these skills that then differentiate entrepreneurs from managers include discipline, risk taking, innovative, determined, visionary leadership, and change oriented. The responsibilities of the entrepreneur profession include:

• Seeing opportunities to solve problems. Because an entrepreneur is a problem solver or someone who can solve problems. He sees a problem as a demand, meaning there is a demand.
• Planning the type of business to be engaged in, starting from the sales concept, target market, capital calculation, to marketing strategy.
• Supervise and coordinate the business, finance, production, budget (to be efficient and optimal) in the business being carried out
• Organize employee work and conduct reviews
• Carry out the policies, objectives, goals, and procedures set by the company.
• Plan and carry out business activities that require the coordination of various parties such as promotions and sales, as well as implementing marketing strategies
• Monitor suppliers and ensure they work efficiently and effectively as required by the company
• Evaluate sales results, business activities and others to measure company achievements. Then analyze the parts that require a reduction or increase in the budget.

Source: from various sources

Intrinsic Elements of Novels – Sinaumed’s must be familiar with the existence of novels? Or even Sinaumed’s is a fan of novels of any genre, be it Indonesian-language novels or translated novels?

Novels of any genre, both in Indonesian and in translation, must have both intrinsic and extrinsic elements. Yep, all kinds of works of fiction certainly have building elements, including a novel. The intrinsic elements of this novel are more or less the same as the intrinsic elements of a short story, because both are products of prose.

The building elements in a novel will later be closely linked through the telling of the story, which is carried out by the novelist. If a novel is often called “totality”, then it means that the words and language used in it are the key to the totality of the novel’s existence. Then actually, what is the intrinsic element of the novel? What are the intrinsic elements alias building blocks in a novel? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands this, let’s look at the following review!

What’s the difference between a novel and a short story?

Novels and short stories are both forms of prose literature which are often called fiction. The term “novel” comes from the Italian word “novella” which means ‘short story in prose’. Although actually, the novel and the novelette actually have differences, namely in the novelette is a work of fiction with sufficient length, meaning not too long, but not too short either.

The difference between a novel and a short story can be seen in terms of the formality of the form, you know , namely the length of the story. Yep, a short story, aka short story, usually has an average story length, as if it can be finished reading in one sitting (approximately two hours). Meanwhile, novels usually have hundreds of pages, making it too difficult to finish in just two hours, or even days.

Since the length of the story in this novel and short story is different, it means that the process of elaborating the story is also different. Novels are more able to express the contents of the story freely, in more detail, in more detail so that the reader can have a detailed imagination. Meanwhile, in short stories, the process of conveying the contents of the story is limited, only telling the important plot. But even so, a short story actually “demands” the existence of unity in its denser elements.

Even though the two are different, each of these works of fiction has its advantages. The strength of a typical novel is its ability to convey the story plot or the problems experienced by the characters to the stage of solving the problem in a complex and full way. Meanwhile, in short stories, their ability to convey plots is denser and only focuses on the problems of the characters.

What are the Intrinsic Elements of a Novel?

In a work of fiction, in order to become a complete and “finished” story, building elements are needed. All works of fiction, in fact, will present the state of the world through words, so that the building elements are described through the words created by the author. The building elements in a novel are grouped into two parts, namely intrinsic and extrinsic elements.

Intrinsic elements are the elements that build the literary work itself directly. These elements cause a text to exist as a literary text. The integration between various intrinsic elements is what makes a novel tangible. The elements in question are theme, plot, setting, characterization, storytelling point of view, style of language, morals, and others.

What Are the Intrinsic Elements of a Novel?

1. Theme

Basically, the theme is a general basic idea that supports a literary work and is abstract in nature which is repeatedly raised through intrinsic elements alias implicitly. To find the existence of a theme in a novel, it must be concluded from the existence of the whole story, not only in certain parts. Indeed, its existence seems to be “hidden” because it is too abstract to be found. Although it is not uncommon, it is often found that there are certain sentences or paragraphs which state the main theme of the novel. Typically, themes can be social, historical, adventure, love, and others.

The theme in the novel will generally raise certain life problems that are universal. That is, this theme has been or will be experienced by everyone in any part of the world. Novels often choose various life problems based on individual and group experiences, namely the problem of love which includes love for lovers, parents, and friends. The selection of these themes is subjective which will be processed by the author’s imaginative power.

Integration of Themes with Other Elements

The existence of a theme serves to bind other elements so that they bind into a unified whole. This integration will be briefly described below.

• Theme with Plot, namely when the reader interprets the theme in the novel, it requires information contained in the plot.
• Theme with Background, namely the choice of theme will affect the selection of the background as well. Even when some authors already have a certain theme, that theme will later demand the selection of an appropriate setting. If the selection of this setting is not appropriate, it will affect the character elements, causing the story to become less convincing.
• Themes with Characters. The integration of these two elements mutually influences one another, because the development of characters and characterizations must also be adjusted to the theme of the story.

Classification of Novel Themes

a) Traditional and Non-Traditional Themes

Traditional themes mean themes in a novel that seem “that-that” only. That is, the use of certain themes that are always applied in any novel causes the reader to easily guess the plot as well as the ending . Even so, the existence of this traditional theme is actually favored by certain social groups so that its existence will “last” until now. Examples are stories about true love that requires sacrifice, stories about good will always win against evil, and others.

Meanwhile, non-traditional themes are themes that are not very common in a novel, so it is not uncommon for the story plot to not meet the expectations of the reader because it is too “against the current” with too many themes. For example, we often read novels where the protagonist will win at the end of the story, then suddenly in a certain novel the antagonist wins. This of course makes us think that the plot is strange.

b) Classification of Themes According to Shipley

• The theme of the physical level, which is shown in the number of physical activities carried out by characters in fictional works. In short, the conflicts experienced by the characters are mostly in the form of physical activities rather than psychological ones.
• The theme is at the organic level, which is shown by the many problems of sexuality or sexual relations between the characters. Example: betrayal of husband and wife or sexual scandal. Example of a novel: Saman (Ayu Utami).
• The theme of the social level, which is indicated by the many social problems throughout the story. These social problems can be in the form of economic, political, economic, cultural problems, to love between people. Examples of novels: Ayat-Ayat Cinta , and Laskar Pelangi .
• The theme of the egoistic level, which considers humans as individuals who demand their rights to individualism. For example: about identity, self-image, to one’s personality. Example of a novel: Atheist and the Road Has No End .
• The theme of the divine level, which is indicated by the conflict surrounding the human character with the Creator. Example of a novel: In the Mihrab of Love .

2. Plot or Story Line

The plot contains elements of the storyline in the form of events experienced by the characters up to the process of resolving the conflict. Plot is more accurately called a series of events. According to Stanton (1965), plot is a story that contains a sequence of events, each of which can be linked causally. Nevertheless, according to Abrams (1999) states that the plot is different from the story, because the true plot is the sequential structure of events in a work of fiction.

Rules in Plots

According to Kenny (1966), a plot in fiction has its own rules, namely:

• Plausibility , namely a plot must be believable in accordance with the logic of the reader. Usually it will be associated with the reality of life in the real world. Even though it is a work of fiction, the storyline must also make sense …
• Suspense , which is able to arouse curiosity in the reader so that they are willing to read it until the end of the story.
• Surprise , namely being able to surprise the reader in the storyline, as if the reader cannot guess it.
• Unity , namely the events in the story line must be integrated as a whole. All aspects that are told must be well intertwined and support aspects of one another.

The Stages In The Plot

• The initial stage, usually will be in the form of character introduction as if inviting the reader to get acquainted with the characters who want to “act” throughout the storyline. Not only the characters, but also the introduction to the setting as well.
• The middle stage, will usually show the beginning of conflict or conflict. Later, the author will develop the conflict according to his imagination by paying attention to the rules in the plot.
• The final stage, usually will tell the process of solving the problem along with how the story ends, whether the character will be happy or sad.

3. Characters and Characterizations

According to Abrams, characters are people who are shown in a work of fiction which will be expressed in words and actions. While the term “characterization” has a broader meaning, which includes the names of the characters in the story, what their character is, and how they are depicted in the work of fiction so that readers can understand them.

Character Classification

• Main Characters and Additional Characters

The main character is the one most told, both as the perpetrator of the incident and as the subject of the incident. Even in certain novels, the main character is always present in every page of the novel. Since this main character is the most talked about character, it means that he will also influence the development of the story plot.

Meanwhile, additional characters are characters who help the main character throughout the storyline, and often their existence is ignored by the reader because they do not really affect the plot.

• Protagonist and Antagonist Figures

Usually, the protagonist is described as a good character and the antagonist is an evil character. This is not completely wrong …

The protagonist is a character whose depiction is in accordance with the views and expectations of the reader. The problems experienced by the protagonist seem to relate to the problems of the readers so that most of them will get empathy from the readers. While the antagonist is a figure who opposes the existence of the protagonist, both in terms of speech and actions. Even though it looks “evil”, the existence of this antagonist will actually make the storyline more exciting and interesting. For example, the presence of the character Lord Voldemort in the Harry Potter novels .

• Simple Figures and Round Figures

The classification of this character is based on his character. A simple character is a character who has only one personal quality and certain character. The character, attitude, and behavior of this simple character seem flat and monotonous. While round characters are those who have the possibility of another side of life, personality, and identity. Not infrequently, this round character has a certain character that is difficult to predict.

• Static Figures and Developing Figures

Static characters are story characters who do not experience changes or developments in their character as a result of events that have occurred. Therefore, this static character has a relatively fixed attitude and character, with no development from the beginning to the end of the story.

While developing characters are characters who experience changes and developments in their character in line with the development of events and story plots. This character tends to actively interact with his environment so that it will affect his character. Usually the development of these characters is adjusted to the demands of the logic of the story as a whole.

• Typical Figures and Neutral Figures

This character classification is based on the reflection of story characters on humans in real life. A typical character is a character who only displays a little of his individuality and more emphasizes the quality of being together with other individuals.

Meanwhile, a neutral character is a character who is solely presented for the sake of the story. In short, this neutral figure does not represent humans in the real world.

4. Background

The setting in a work of fiction does not only indicate a specific location and time when an event will occur, but can also manifest itself in the form of prevailing customs, beliefs and values. The setting in a novel plot has various kinds, namely:

• Physical Setting and Spiritual Setting

Physical background is a background that clearly shows a certain location that can be seen and felt its presence. For example: in the market, in the school hall, in the meeting hall, and others. The physical setting in a work of fiction can be shown depending on the creativity of the author. Some are detailed, some are just showing off.

Meanwhile, the spiritual background is the values ​​that surround the physical background. So, the existence of this physical background and spiritual background are related to each other.

• Neutral Background and Functional Background

Neutral background is the designation of a background that is only mentioned without describing certain characteristics of the location or time of occurrence. It is possible that the author deliberately did not intend to highlight the background elements in his fictional work, so he only used this neutral setting.

Meanwhile, a functional setting is a setting that emphasizes the distinctive characteristics of a particular setting, whether it relates to elements of place, time, or socio-culture. Usually, this functional setting will be described in detail about how the social environment is.

5. Point of View

Point of view or point of view is the way or view used by the author as a means to present a work of fiction to the reader. Thus, this point of view will relate to the strategies, techniques and tactics deliberately chosen by the author to convey his ideas and stories.

Viewpoint Classification

• Third Person Point of View: “He”

Namely, the storytelling of his fiction uses the word “he” to refer to the main character. Usually, it is marked by the use of the character’s name throughout telling the storyline. For example, in the novel Ronggeng Dukung Paruk, which uses the name “Srintil” as a third persona point of view.

• First Person Point of View: “I”

Namely, the storytelling of the work of fiction uses the word “I” as someone who is directly involved in the storyline. This “I” becomes a character who tells a story, whether it tells himself or someone else to the reader.

This point of view has two types, namely “I” as the main character and “I” as an additional character.

• Second Person Point of View: “You”

Actually, the use of this point of view is rarely used by any work of fiction. Usually, it’s just a distraction from the style of language. The use of the “You” point of view can be found in the novel Husband by Eddy Suhendro and the novel Burung-Burung Manyar.

• Mixed Viewpoint

That is when the author tells his fictional work using different points of view.

6. Language style

The style of language in this novel will usually make the storyline look interesting because it is conveyed in a unique way. In fact, this style of language has actually developed according to the development of the spelling of the language. The choice of diction, sentence structure, and the use of cohesion are also included in this language style. Not only that, the use of figure of speech is also part of language style.

7. Morals

Moral is something that the author wants to convey to the reader, usually in a very implicit form. Since literary works are educative or educative, so that every literary work must have a moral that educates its readers. This moral tends to relate to messages or mandates that can be applied in everyday life.

Well, that’s a description of the intrinsic elements of the novel. Is Sinaumed’s often aware of these elements when reading a novel?

Source:

Nurgiyantoro, Burhan. (2013). Fiction Study Theory . Yogyakarta: Gadjah Mada University Press.

Also Read!

• 10 Types of Novels, What’s Your Favorite?
• 8 Differences between Novels and Short Stories from Various Sides
• Definition of Extrinsic Elements in Novels and Short Stories
• Get to know Fiction and Non Fiction Stories
• Short Story vs Novel, What’s the Difference?
• The Difference Between Elements of Fiction and Non Fiction Books
• Use of Good and Correct Punctuation
• What is Popular Literature?
• Definition of Majestic Metaphor and Examples
• Understanding and Periodization of Literary Development in Indonesia
• Get to know the Theory and History of Literature

Majoring in Multimedia or often abbreviated and referred to by many people as “MM”. The multimedia major is one of the many majors in the computer field that studies the use of computers in order to present data in the form of text, sound, images, animations, and videos that are made as attractive as possible with available tools such as Adobe Photoshop , CorelDraw , Freehand, Adobe After Effects, and others.

If you want to know more about the facts from the multimedia department, then you can see a more complete explanation about the multimedia department below.

Facts About Multimedia Majors

What’s Learned?

Basically, multimedia is divided into two types, namely Linear Multimedia and Interactive Multimedia. Linear Multimedia is multimedia that runs without being equipped with a controller or can be operated by the user. For example in film and television.

Meanwhile, Interactive Multimedia is multimedia that is equipped with a controller that can be operated by the user, resulting in interaction with the user. Examples are games or multimedia learning. Multimedia if based on its use is also divided into two, namely:

1. Multimedia Communication and Multimedia Content Production . The definition of Multimedia Communication is the use of media that has the function of publishing information. The media used include TV, radio, films, games, music, entertainment, tutorials, the internet, and print media. With this Multimedia Communication will make it easier for users to convey and obtain information.
2. Multimedia Content Production is the use of several different media such as text, animation, audio, video, images (graphics) combined to produce multimedia products, such as music, games, films, entertainment, and others. The media used in Multimedia Content Production include writing media (text), animation media, special effects media , audio media, video media, image media (graphics), and interactive media .

Do You Have To Be Able To Draw To Take This Major?

Many of you have probably often heard that if you want to major in multimedia, then drawing is the start. In fact, it doesn’t have to be. Multimedia is not just about learning to draw. However, there are tons of fields that you will study.

Even so, it’s great if you have the ability to draw from scratch, because this will facilitate the process of learning multimedia. However, for those of you who are not proficient, don’t worry, because later you will be taught basic drawing techniques before moving on to other lessons.

Place of Internship for MM Major

For multimedia students, you can decide where to do the internship according to your interests or major. If you are interested in matters regarding design, you can try to do an internship at a printing press so that later you will be placed in the designing section. If you like photography, you can apply to a photo studio company. If you want to feel what the atmosphere is like behind the television screen, try sending an internship application to a local television station or national television.

You will Create Many Professional Works

Multimedia majors students are required to produce works. You will create a lot of masterpieces. Therefore, generally students majoring in multimedia must have high creativity. The work that is created must have various uses, especially for oneself or the public. If you pay attention, actually there are many works that can be produced by students majoring in multimedia which are spread on the internet media.

More Sensitive to Surrounding Issues

Even though not all students majoring in multimedia undergo online lectures , multimedia students can be more sensitive to the problems around them. The problems in question include political matters, economic matters, regarding various environmental problems.

A multimedia expert will also create meaningful works on these issues, a work that contains various complaints about the problems at hand. As for the work created, it can be in the form of illustrations, videos, and so on.

Able to Operate Various Computer Software

In the multimedia department, you will also learn a lot about software . There are many applications or software that can be used, ranging from software in terms of editing , design, or others related to multimedia. After you learn these various software, later students will be required to create their own work. The works that have been created can be used as a portfolio to apply for work.

Job Prospects for Graduates are Diverse

In this modern era, multimedia graduates are needed. You can become a much-needed graphic designer in all aspects. This is because, currently, almost all forms of business require attractive images or designs so that later they can bring in more consumers.

Therefore, in times like these, graphic designers are needed. To help communicate the intent of the product being sold to potential buyers, you can make pictures or videos.

Not only that, but there are quite a lot of job prospects from multimedia majors. Below are some other job opportunities for graduates majoring in multimedia:

WebDesigners

This position requires a combination of design and programming skills. The design itself is used to create website layouts , while programming skills are useful in coding websites . The web designer will also be responsible for updating the content and website design if needed. Here below is the jobdesk of a web designer:

Create images that will be inserted into the website using various software, starting from Photoshop and so on.

• Arrange the layout for the installation of banners, links, animations and so on.
• Organize website content according to categories to be integrated with navigation links.
• Build a website from the front page to the final page according to the selected web structure.
• Doing various tests on each page and checking for errors in HTML, CSS, and so on that might occur.

Graphic Designer

A graphic designer or graphic designer is a person who is responsible for creating designs for various publication needs in print media, websites , posters, product packaging, and creating various visual identities for company branding purposes.

The graphic designer’s workflow usually starts with a brief that will be given by the client, creative director , or account manager , and the graphic designer will develop a creative concept according to the brief and objectives that have been given. Apart from the challenges in generating various creative ideas, graphic designers are also required to be able to work quickly with tight deadlines .

The Graphic Designer’s duties include:

• Completing various projects and coordinating them with external parties such as agencies , art services , printing, and others.
• Contribute with the team to achieve the goals of a project.
• Also meet with the client or art director to find out more about the project that will be given brainstorming with the client.
• Provide input on the design you want to make according to the target market or the audience you want to target.
• Make various illustrations or pictures that identify the message of a product.
• Create various graphic forms, such as product illustrations, logos, and websites .
• Choose colors, images, fonts, and layouts that can present the results of the illustrations that have been made to clients or art directors.
• Make revisions given according to feedback or input from the client.
• Conduct quality checks on various illustrations before printing or publication

Animator/Illustrator

Both of these jobs both require high imagination power. Illustrators are tasked with combining their art, design and creativity to produce original visual images across a variety of products and media. Usually, each illustrator has their own characteristics and style that will set their work apart from other illustrators.

Another thing with animators, this work involves the art of making moving images or animations in 2-dimensional (2D) or 3-dimensional (3D) forms. The work of the animators themselves is generally used for films, advertisements, videos, websites , games , and many other media.

The following is a more complete jobdesk for the work of Illustrator and Animator:

Illustrators

• Communicating and consulting with clients to then adjust the client’s wishes.
• Translate messages, as well as ideas, and stories in an attractive visual form according to the previous briefing .
• Designing illustration works to be displayed in library books, advertisements, websites, magazines, newspapers, also in comics, product packaging, and various other products.
• Displaying these illustration works on social media pages as a promotional tool.
• Coordinate with the production team to ensure the quality of the illustrations to be displayed.

Animator

• Work creatively to be able to produce aesthetically pleasing designs.
• Using special generation computer software such as Maya, Flash, and After Effects.
• Presenting designs for later customer evaluation.
• Promoting and running a business, especially in the field of animation.
• Negotiate liaison contracts and work effectively with other design and production staff.

Interactive Media Designer

Interactive media designers are responsible for creating interactive designs involving text, data, graphics, sound, animation, and various other visual effects. This work is also needed to create websites, games, online learning materials , and others. This role is generally similar to that of a software developer, so it is not uncommon for them to be required to make products by coding and testing all product functions that have been made.

Game Modeler/Designer

If you have a passion for games, then it can be channeled into career choices, one of which is to work as a game modeler or game designer. The game modeler’s job is to make the gameplay concept and layout of a game come true.

As for what is the responsibility of the game designer , including the plot and storyline of the characters, maps, scenarios, as well as the level of difficulty or how to win or lose in the game, and create the game’s user interface.

Where Can You Study Multimedia in Indonesia?

Questions like that are probably often asked by many people, including yourself. For those of you who are interested in studying in this department, here are some campus recommendations that you can consider.

1. Bandung Institute of Technology (ITB): Faculty of Art and Design (FSRD),
2. Jakarta Art Institute (IKJ): Faculty of Fine Arts
3. Trisakti University: Faculty of Art and Design (FSRD),
4. Pelita Harapan University (UPH): Visual Communication Design Study Program
5. Multimedia Nusantara University (UMN): Visual Communication Design Study Program
6. Petra Christian University (UK Petra): Graphic Design Major
7. Yogyakarta Institute of the Arts (ISI).
8. Indonesian Art Institute (ISI) Denpasar
9. Eleven March University (UNS), Solo
10. State University of Malang (UM), Malang

The multimedia department is one of the majors that is still in great demand by many people. This is not without reason, multimedia majors have very broad job opportunities, you can work at start-ups , teachers, application developers, editors, and so on.

Related Books

Graphic Design Overview

Visual Communication Design or graphic design is all around us. If we look at our desks, there are calendar designs, computer logos, printer ink packages, or just small dots of the logo on our pens or pencils. When looking at a magazine or newspaper, we see logos, cover covers with attractively designed illustrations.

Among the pages of the printed media are various types of advertisements, including public service announcements that invite us to fight against the corruption that is rife in our country. In our kitchen, we are also surrounded by food packages and seasonings that are carefully designed to attract attention. Meanwhile, in the living room of the television we display the logo of the TV station which is swaying dynamically, as a sign of the change in TV shows.

When we leave the room, don’t forget to bring our cell phones, which on the screen displays message icons, contact numbers, calls, settings, and so on that are designed to be very informative. After leaving the room, on the street we see car and motorbike brands, sign systems as directions on the main road as well as at stations and terminals—or even billboards that often spoil the view of the city. They are all works of graphic design.

Likewise on the roadside we will see typography and icons arranged on Tegal Warung tents, on hawker carts, or auto rickshaws and on electric poles and trees. When we arrive at a campus or office, we will be greeted by the name of the building designed with a specific typography, as well as a directional system inside the building. Of course, the various types of graphic design media have different types of references for thought and design. Wherever the eye looks, graphic design will accompany us.

Variety of Graphic Design Tutorials for Beginners

Have you ever imagined the process behind creating a logo? Have you ever wanted to design a business card for yourself that is different from the others? Or, have you ever wanted to design a special greeting card for your special someone? Whether we realize it or not, there are many graphic design products around us, whether it’s a logo for gadgets, clothing, or just packaging for various types of snacks.

Modern life is inseparable from a touch of creativity from graphic designers! If you are someone who has a great interest in the world of graphic design, be it for business or business purposes, or just a hobby to fill your free time, this book contains various interesting tutorials for designing logos, business cards, greeting cards, invitations, labels, and so on. posters and so on!

Digital Multimedia : Technology. Learning Support S

Being a teacher is not enough just to love and love children, that’s why equipping yourself with teaching skills is a non-negotiable requirement.

Because God’s Word says: “Without knowledge, craftsmanship is not good; people who are in a hurry will take the wrong step. Existence misleads people’s paths, then their heart is angry with God. (Proverbs 19:2-3)

This book is here to help PAK and Sunday School and Children’s Services teachers, to use Digital Multimedia as a learning support technology.

Closing

In the multimedia department, there will usually be graphic design lessons. If you want to explore the science of graphic design, then you can do it by reading books. At sinaumedia.com there are lots of books about graphic design that you can get.

To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Also read:

Indonesian writers do not only have influence in the fields of language and literature as well. In fact, many of them also helped change the condition of the Indonesian nation. Who are they?

Check out some profiles of Indonesian writers based on their era or generation below

Indonesian Writers Era Balai Pustaka

During the Balai Pustaka era, Indonesian writers produced more works in the romance genre. The Balai Pustaka period started from 1920 to 1930.

At that time, there were still restrictions on works by the Dutch Government. This made the world of literature dominated by Sumatrans at that time. This also makes the hallmark of Balai Pustaka’s literary work.

His literary works are known to be thick with the High Malay language. The following is a profile of one of the Indonesian writers in the Balai Pustaka era:

Amir Hamzah

He was born in a Malay aristocratic family, namely the Sultanate of Langkat. The beginning of Amir Hamzah writing a poem was when he was still a teenager. Although his works are dateless, he is thought to have started his writings when he traveled to Java.

His writings illustrate several things. Such as the influence of the original Malay culture, Islam, Eastern Literature and Christianity. Amir Hamzah’s total works are about 50 poems, 18 prose and other works.

He also translated a work. In 1932, he founded the literary magazine Pujangga Baru. Amir started broadcasting his poetry while living in the city of Solo. In a magazine entitled Timboel managed by Sanusi Pane, Amir publishes his poetry.

The poems he published were titled ” M4buk ” and ” Silent “. The poem marked his debut as an Indonesian writer. Since then, Amir has written many literary works. The following is an example of one of Amir Hamza’s poems:

In the Dark

Back again lively

lick soaring purgatory

in my heart grew evil

open hell in the field of heaven

The flames waved in a straight arc

roaring merrily tongue-in-cheek

scorched black dust

the fruit of suwarga flower power

Paradise’s heart is immediately at peace

Apostasy snapped into the sea of ​​a typhoon

Ride the fog concocting clouds

blocking major node weather

Walk me in the dark

keep going straight and stop

heart melted in hell

daughter’s dry charred throat.

Ask me my dear beloved;

rain down your mercy dew

let the fire go out

I hope it recovers my faith.

Indonesian Writers in the New Poet Era

The era of Indonesian literature then changed its name to the era of the New Pujangga. The term Pujangga Baru originates from a literary and cultural magazine. The magazine is called “ Poedjangga Baroe ”.

The magazine was published on July 29, 1933. In general, Indonesian writers of the New Pujangga era wanted to work without wanting interference from the Dutch colonialists.

One of the literary works of the new Pujangga Force which is still very phenomenal today is the Terkembang Screen . The work was made by Sutan Takdir Alisjahbana. The following is a profile of one of the Indonesian writers from the New Pujangga era:

Sutan Takdir Alisjahbana

STA’s career journey is very long and varied. Especially in the fields of language, literature and art. In 1930, STA held the position of editor at Balai Pustaka and Panji Pustaka. Then he also founded and chaired the Poedjangga Baroes magazine from 1933 to 1942, and from 1948 to 1953.

From 1942 to 1945, STA worked as an expert writer. In addition, STA is also a member of the Indonesian Language Commission in Jakarta. Then from 1945 to 1950, STA served as Chairman of the Indonesian Language Commission.

In addition, from 1946 to 1948, STA was a lecturer at the University of Indonesia. Then on October 15, 1949, STA established a university. The university was named National University.

At that time STA immediately assumed the position of rector at the University. Not only that, STA has been active in the world of politics. He has been a member of the legislature several times.

STA was a member of parliament from 1945 to 1949. Was a member of the constituent assembly from 1950 to 1960. Then became a member of the Indonesian National Committee.

There are many works produced by STA. However, his most well-known works are the novel Layar Terkembang  and the novel Dian yang Unfinished . Both novels were published by Balai Pustaka. Apart from these two works, several other works by Sutan Takdir Alisjahbana are as follows:

•       Unbroken Novel Bullied Malang (1929)
•       Collection of Mega Spread Poems (1935)
•       The New Grammar of the Indonesian Language (1936)
•       Novel A Virgin’s Child in a Robber’s Nest (1940)
•       Advisor to Philosophy (1946)
•       From the Struggle and Growth of the Indonesian Language (1957)
•       Collection of Essays on Struggle and Responsibility in Literature (1977)
•       ETC

Indonesian Literature Class of 45

The next period is the period of Indonesian writers Batch 45. The types of literary works in this period are seasoned with realistic elements. Where the context of the writing itself is more important.

While the language rules are not too. During this period, many names of Indonesian writers were born. In fact, these names are still well known to this day. The following is a profile of one of the Indonesian writers Batch 45:

Chairil Anwar

Chairil Anwar also still has family ties with Soetan Sjahrir, who was Indonesia’s first Prime Minister.

In 1942, when he was 20 years old, Chairil Anwar’s name became known to many people. Especially in the world of literature. This happened after the publication of his poem entitled Nisan.

Chairil Anwar is an Indonesian writer known for his various poems. Almost all of Chairil’s poems have the theme of death. When he first sent his poetry to Pandji Pustaka magazine to be printed, many of his works were rejected.

This is because Chairil’s works are considered too individualistic. Not in accordance with the spirit of the Greater East Asia Co-Prosperity Area. Many of the works made by Chairil. One of them is a poem entitled Me.

I

If it’s my time

‘I don’t want anyone to seduce

Neither do you

No need to sob the sedan

I’m a bitch

From the group wasted

Let the bullets penetrate my skin

I’m still inflamed crashing

It hurts and I can take it running

Run

Until the pain of the fairy is gone

And I would be even more indifferent

I want to live another thousand years

Indonesian Writers Class of the 50’s

The next era of Indonesian writers was the 50’s Generation. The 1950s was a period of transitional literature. The transition in question is the transition from the situation and condition of the role, to a peace.

Generally, the literary works of Generation 50 are dominated by collections of poetry and short stories. The Indonesian writers who succeeded in creating their best works in the 1950s were young writers.

The following is a profile of one of the Indonesian writers Batch 50:

Taufik Ismail

His career as a poet began with his activities in writing demonstrator poetry. These poems were collected in Tirani and Bentang in 1966. He is known as a participant poet in the demonstrations that took place in 1966.

In 1970, a collection of Lonely Poems was published. Then it was rearranged in 1972, with the Museum Perjuangan Guest Book.

Taufiq wrote children’s poetry, then produced a collection of poetry books. The book, entitled Meet Me Animals, was published in 1973. There are still many works by Taufiq Ismail which are very influential in the world of literature and in Indonesia.

Not only his works are many. He also received many awards, among which are the following:

•       Art Award from the Government of the Republic of Indonesia (1970)
•       Cultural Visit Award from the Australian Government (1977)
•       South East Asia (SEA) Write Award from the Kingdom of Thailand (1994)
•       Literary Writing from the Language Center (1994)
•       Archipelago Writers from Johor State, Malaysia (1999)
•       Doctor Honoris Causa from Yogyakarta State University (2003)

Indonesian Writers Class of the 70s

The next literary period is the 70’s Generation. In this batch, Indonesian writers are more daring to do an experiment. This Batch of 70 was born from a traditional starting point.

In this period, publishing slowly revived. Then print the works of Indonesian writers. Several writers from the 70s were still dominated by writers from the 50s.

The following is a profile of one of the Indonesian writers from the 70s:

Putu Wijaya

Through his name, it is known that iq is of noble descent. His father was I Gusti Ngurah Rakam

In his career, he is known as a playwright. It was from his hands that several drama scripts were born. The drama scripts he wrote were modern dramas with a stream of consciousness.

The drama scripts he wrote are not the same as conventional drama scripts. Besides that, Putu Wijaya also wrote several novels. Again, the novel he wrote has a new flow.

The novels he wrote also have “absurd” and “stream of consciousness” patterns.

Not only that, he also wrote a short story. Whether from books or those that have been published in newspapers or magazines. Just like his other works, the short stories written by Putu Wijaya present a new stream of consciousness.

The following is one of Putu Wijaya’s poems entitled Giant:

Giant

In my dream there is a giant

His fangs are as big as a coconut tree

His head was as hard as steel

From his mouth sprayed evil words

Hi little boy, you don’t have to be diligent

Throw away the book let’s play in the streets

Don’t listen to parents

Join the party orgy

But I’m not a child

My body is small but my heart is big

Mother has trained me to be strong

And my papa wasn’t happy that I was stupid

My teacher at school always said

Watch out for the bad guys

The mouth is sweet but the consequences are heavy

The giant was angry and scowled

Because I don’t want to bend my knees

From his mouth came hot fire

His hand was about to strangle ferociously

O brave child, he said angrily

If you are naughty watch out kumamah

Lau’s gaping fangs flashed

Then jump to brush

I’m calm but alert

Not even screaming afraid

While praying I act

Take out my report card at once

Numbers eight, nine, and ten

Jump around the giant

In the twinkling of an eye he attacked

God, screamed the giant in fear

don’t tie me down with numbers

I promise I won’t be naughty anymore

Disturbing a studious child

In my sleep a giant appeared

But he’s tired

Now faithfully guard my sleep

While learning to read

Indonesian Writers in the Reformation Era

During the reform era, it was not only decorated with stories of politics and government. Literary works were also scattered at that time. The emergence of Indonesian writers from the reform era was marked by the rise of literary works with socio-political themes.

In addition, there are many literary works that discuss reform. Indonesian writers in the reformation era reflected on social justice and the political system that occurred. Especially in the late 1990’s.

Writers at that time wrote monumental works. The following is a profile of Indonesian writers in the reform era:

Wiji Thukul

The name “Thukul” means to grow. The name was pinned by Cempe Lawu Warta. Cempe Lawu Wartha is one of Wiji Thukul’s relatives. They met when he was actively involved in theater at Sarang Teater Jagat.

Jagat himself is the Middle Butcher. So, Wiji Thukul means a seed that grows.

Wiji Thukul is one of the writers who was very influential during the reform period. There is a long story behind his works. Like the story of how he and his relatives formed an association to fight against the government at that time, the story of him having to keep moving places and changing identities, until the story of his disappearance until now.

Even though the New Order situation was tense, this did not make Wiji Thukul afraid. Precisely he is against using a masterpiece. Like a dialogue that is always spoken by wandering There is only one word “Fight”.

Although until now he has not been found, but his works are still attached to our hearts. All the struggles he made through works will never be forgotten. The following is a very famous poem by Wiji Thukul:

Warning

If the people leave

When the master of speech

We must be careful

Maybe they are desperate

If people hide

And whisper

When talking about his own problems

Rulers must be alert and learn to listen

When people dare to complain

That means it’s bad

And when the talk of the authorities

Can’t be denied

The truth must be threatened

If the proposal is rejected without being considered

Voices of criticism are silenced without reason

Accused of being subversive and disturbing security

Then there is only one word: fight!

Literary Class of 2000

After the reform era, Indonesian writers of the 2000 generation were born. Entering the 2000 generation, they had a literary style that increasingly relied on the power of literacy. Apart from that, this generation also expresses the story aesthetically in the literary work.

There are many names of Indonesian writers who were born and then grew up in the 2000s. The following is a profile of an Indonesian writer from the 2000s:

Ayu Utami

The beginning of his debut in the world of literary works was due to his novel entitled Saman. The novel entitled Sama is the winning novel in a romance writing contest held by the Jakarta Arts Council in 1998.

The presence of Ayu Utami and her novel entitled Saman invites so much controversy. However, despite all that, this novel still gets a lot of praise.

In addition, the novel is also classified as a best-selling novel or best seller. Within three years, Saman’s novels have sold 55 thousand copies.

Thanks to the same novel, Ayu Utami managed to get Prince Claus 2000 from the Prince Claus Fund. It is a foundation whose headquarters are in The Hague, whose mission is to promote and support activities in the fields of development and culture.

Since the emergence of the novel Saman, Ayu Utami has been known as a writer with new openness characteristics. He is not afraid to bring up matters of sexuality in his work.

Some of Ayu Utami’s works are as follows:

• Larung (2002)
• Collection of Single Parasite Essays (Gagas Media, Jakarta, 2003)
• Fu Numbers (2008)
• Lalita (sinaumedia Pustaka Utama, 2012)

Author: Wida Kurniasih

Source: from various sources

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Impact of earthquakes – Indonesia is a country that is often hit by natural disasters, especially earthquakes. In fact, some areas in Indonesia are very vulnerable to earthquakes. Earthquakes with large enough shocks can cause material losses, and can even cause fatalities.

Then, what exactly is meant by an earthquake? You can find the answer in this article. In fact, this article does not only discuss the meaning of earthquakes, but also discusses the types, impacts of earthquakes, and how to deal with earthquakes.

Definition of Earthquake

An earthquake is a vibration or something that occurs on the surface of the earth that is caused by a sudden release of energy from within to create seismic waves. Earthquakes themselves are usually caused by the movement of the Earth’s crust or the earth’s plates.

An earthquake centered on the ocean floor will also cause a tsunami. The frequency of an area, refers to the type and size of earthquakes experienced in several time periods. Large earthquake shocks can also cause landslides, buildings collapse or crack. The earthquake itself is measured using a seismometer. With this tool, the strength of earthquake shocks can be measured.

Meanwhile, the Richter Scale is a scale reported by the national seismological observatory which is measured using the logarithm (base 10) of the maximum amplitude and is measured in micrometers. The larger the number on the Richter scale, the more severe the damage caused by the earthquake.

For example, the damage caused by an earthquake of 3 on the Richter scale is almost invisible. Meanwhile, damage of 7 on the Richter scale has considerable damage or can even cause casualties.

According to history. historic largest earthquake with a magnitude of over 9 and that earthquake occurred in Japan. The big earthquake occurred in 2011.

Earthquake Type

Types of earthquakes can be distinguished based on their causes, including:

Tectonic Earthquakes

Tectonic earthquakes are earthquakes caused by tectonic activity or due to sudden shifts in tectonic plates which have strengths from very small to very large.

This earthquake also caused a lot of damage or natural disasters on Earth, strong earthquake vibrations can also spread to all parts of the Earth. This tectonic earthquake itself is caused by the release of energy that occurs due to a shift in the tectonic plates like a pulled rubber band that is suddenly released.

Impact Earthquake

Impact earthquakes are earthquakes caused by the impact of the earth’s surface. In this case, the collision in question is in the form of a meteor or asteroid impact that falls to Earth, this type of earthquake itself is rare.

Earthquake Collapse

Collapse earthquakes usually occur in limestone areas or in mining areas, these earthquakes are also quite rare and local in nature.

Artificial Earthquakes

Man-made earthquakes are earthquakes caused by human activities, such as dynamite, nuclear or hammer explosions hitting the surface of the earth.

Volcanic Earthquake

Volcanic earthquakes (on volcanoes) are earthquakes that occur due to magma activity, and usually occur before a volcano erupts. If the activity is higher, it will cause an explosion to cause an earthquake.

These earthquakes are usually only felt around volcanoes. Based on the depth of the earthquake there is a hypocenter which is more than 300 km below the earth’s surface (or in the earth’s crust).

Medium Earthquake

A moderate earthquake is an earthquake whose hypocenter is between 60 km and 300 km below the earth’s surface. These medium-sized earthquakes generally cause light damage and the vibrations are more pronounced.

Shallow Earthquake

Shallow earthquakes are earthquakes where the hypocenter is less than 60 km from the earth’s surface. This earthquake also causes great damage, or can even cause casualties.

Types of Earthquake Waves

Earthquake wave types are divided into two, namely primary wave types and secondary wave types.

Primary Wave

Primary waves or longitudinal waves are waves or vibrations that propagate in the earth’s body with speeds between 7-14 km/second. This vibration itself comes from the hypocenter.

Secondary Wave

Secondary waves or transverse waves are waves or vibrations that propagate, like primary waves, with reduced speeds, namely 4–7 km/sec. However, what needs to be remembered is that these secondary waves themselves cannot propagate through the liquid layer.

Impact of the Earthquake

Anyone can experience the effects of an earthquake, with different severe effects depending on how big or how small the earthquake vibrations are. After causing many losses, both physically and morally, trauma and feelings of unrest, the earthquake also had other impacts, including:

1. Physical Impact

The first and most certain result of an earthquake is feeling the physical impact. So many buildings cracked, collapsed, and were destroyed, especially in areas close to the epicenter. In addition to attacking buildings, the impact of earthquakes can also cause cracks in roads or ground that were previously attached to each other.

2. Social Impact

The occurrence of an earthquake can have a social impact on society. In this case, the impact of the earthquake is in the form of social life, such as poverty, hunger, and sick people, either from illness or injuries caused by the collapse.

In addition, large-scale earthquakes will also disrupt the economic system and political system. Therefore, if an earthquake occurs, it is usually very difficult for the economy in an area to grow. This is because the infrastructure in the area affected by the earthquake has been destroyed, so it must be renovated first.

3. Causing Casualties

The occurrence of earthquakes can be said to be of uncertain magnitude, some were so large that they knocked down several houses and some were just passing by, so they didn’t cause any damage. Not only damage to homes, but the impact of other earthquakes can cause casualties. If there have been fatalities, then surely there will be deep sorrow for the families left behind.

4. Interrupted Communication Network

Currently, to communicate must be done using the internet. However, the internet signal will easily be lost if an earthquake occurs in that area. The impact of this earthquake can make it difficult for someone to communicate, especially with distant relatives.

5. Loss of Property

When a disaster occurs, it is sometimes difficult to save the property in the house, so inevitably you have to give up the loss of the property you already have. Likewise, earthquake natural disasters can have an impact on a person or family member in the form of loss of property.

6. Damage to the Environment

Another impact of an earthquake is that it can give a bad value on environmental damage. Ground vibrations can cause an earthquake which will cause environmental damage, such as soil erosion and groundwater contamination. In addition, earthquakes that occur around the coast and oceans, which can damage the function of coral reef ecosystems.

7. Disease Outbreak

Another impact of the earthquake is disease outbreaks that can occur because the surrounding environment is still very dirty. In addition, this disease can also arise due to damaged water channels, so that sanitation becomes poor and it is difficult to get clean water.

In addition, the occurrence of an earthquake can result in injuries and illnesses that arise because the cleanliness of the evacuation sites is not maintained properly. The diseases that emerged from the impact of the earthquake, such as dengue fever, diarrhea, flu, and shortness of breath.

How to Overcome Earthquakes

Here are some ways to cope when an earthquake occurs.

1. Build a house with a strong foundation by consulting experts, so that it is sturdy and safe from earthquake shocks.
2. Place the furniture in the right way, so it’s not dangerous when you try to escape from the house.
3. Also prepare a first aid kit, flashlight, radio and spare battery needs, as well as earthquake-resistant communication tools if you have them. Also display important numbers at home and at work in case of emergency, such as hospitals and fire departments.

Earthquake Evacuation Route

In addition, the way to deal with earthquakes can also be through evacuation routes that already exist somewhere. Following are the evacuation routes that you need to know when an earthquake occurs.

When You’re at the Mall

When you experience an earthquake in a shopping center or cinema or at the bottom of a mall, avoid panic. Try to stay calm to be able to follow all instructions from employees or security guards who will direct you to the evacuation route.

When on the Mountain or the Beach

When you are on duty or traveling in the open, be careful with areas that are prone to landslides due to earthquakes. It would be better, stay in a safe place, such as in an open space.

That way, you can immediately save yourself as soon as possible when an earthquake occurs. For example, if you feel vibrations and signs of a tsunami starting to look strange, hurry up and evacuate to high ground.

When In The Room

How to deal with earthquakes when indoors, both in houses and buildings, try to stay calm and don’t panic. Move on all fours, because walking on two legs will definitely be difficult to control balance.

Then, protect your head with soft objects, such as pillows or other objects. Stay away from hard objects that are prone to falling and are dangerous, such as glass windows, cupboards and bookshelves. Next, hide under the table, and avoid the ceiling if it is weak or easily collapses, as well as other hanging objects.

When Outdoors

How to deal with an earthquake while outdoors by staying away from tall buildings, walls, power lines, and sheer cliffs, poles, billboards, trees, and various possibilities for sudden collapse. Try to get to an open place in a large yard or field.

When in Vehicle

How to deal with an earthquake when you are driving, be it a motorbike or a car, try to stay calm so you can think clearly and not feel panicked. It would be nice, avoid stopping under or over the pedestrian bridge and immediately get out into an open place.

When in a Public Room

When an earthquake occurs in a public room with lots of people. Try to protect your head by using a soft object, then taking cover under a table.

When on the elevator

When an earthquake strikes, you should choose to take the stairs instead of the elevator. On the other hand, if you are in the elevator and are stuck, immediately contact the building manager using the interphone near the elevator button. Then, immediately exit when the elevator opens.

When on the Train

How to deal with an earthquake while on the train, try to hold on tightly to the pole so you don’t fall if the train stops suddenly. Be calm and follow the explanation from the officer or station, so that there is no misinformation that can cause panic.

Related Books

Earthquake, Collection of Science and Technology Articles from Tempo Magazine

This ebook compiles a number of articles in the ìScience and Technologyî rubric of Tempo magazine from the 1981 to 2009 editions, particularly the results of research, both conducted by foreign researchers and Indonesian experts, regarding earthquakes. Some articles contain about the causes of earthquakes, research on rocks in earthquake-prone areas, signs that usually occur before an earthquake, and a number of articles about earthquake-resistant houses.

The last question has been done for a long time. Even in Indonesia, more than 30 years ago experiments on earthquake-resistant buildings were carried out in collaboration with the Directorate of Investigation of Building Problems with the Japanese Ministry of Building Construction. But as said Dr. Ir. Fred Hehuwat, a geologist from the Geotechnology Research Institute-Indonesian Institute of Sciences, “We don’t understand the importance of earthquake-resistant buildings.

That’s why, when a series of earthquakes rocked this beloved country, we published this ebook . Apart from being an effort to document earthquake events and research that occurred in the past, the publication of this ebook is intended as an effort to “remind” that there are many important and urgent things to do regarding earthquakes, including earthquake-resistant houses/buildings – which are often forgotten.

Earthquake Resistant Reinforced Concrete Structures

This book, intended for anyone who is involved in structural planning, discusses the calculation of reinforced building structures according to the regulations SNI-1726-2012, SNI-03-2847-2013, and SNI-03-1727-2013. This book is not an SAP2000 module book, but a practical guide in planning reinforced concrete building structures with the help of the SAP2000 program. Therefore, readers can use this book as a reference for the steps in structural planning.

The author assumes that the reader’s knowledge of engineering mechanics and the ability to operate a computer is already good, so it is not explained in detail. Structural design steps starting from the initial stages of determining the estimated dimensions of structural components, structural modeling, to the structural design analysis steps are explained in detail and systematically with delivery that is easily understood and understood by students and beginners in the field of structural design. It also describes several steps for checking the building model that was made prior to analysis so as to avoid errors in modeling.

Principles of Earthquake Resistant Architectural Design

This book contains a thorough fundamental understanding of architecture and its relation to earthquakes. There are three main reasons why this book is indispensable for architects and related building disciplines.

First, earthquake victims are generally not the result of the earthquake itself, but the result of building failures. Second, building failures due to earthquakes in general are not solely the result of the mistakes of civil contractors, but are mostly caused by design errors which mostly result from the work of architects. Third, Indonesia’s location which is surrounded by the ring of fire has required every actor in the building to understand the basic principles of earthquake safe buildings.

This book contains a discussion of how building designs should be prepared against potential earthquakes. Accompanied by clear illustrations and examples and equipped with a method for evaluating the vulnerability of buildings to earthquakes. This book can be used as a basic guideline for earthquake resistant building design in Indonesia, especially for medium and simple buildings which constitute the largest population of buildings in this country.

Thus the discussion about the impact of the earthquake . From the discussion above, it can be said that earthquakes can have an impact on oneself, others, and also the environment. Even an earthquake can make it difficult for the economy to experience growth.

If you want to find books related to earthquakes, then you can look for them at sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have #MoreWithReading information. Hope it’s useful!

Also read:

Impact of Bullying – Bullying as a global problem. On the one hand, this behavior also makes the authorities tighten regulations against the perpetrators.

But on the other hand, bullying is then seen as a normal phase that seems to have to be passed when growing into teenagers and adults. Sometimes we also forget, that the impact of bullying is so influential in a person’s future.

The short-term consequences of bullying can be seen clearly. Especially if the bullying is physical. Bruises can be seen immediately and become a trigger that will make the perpetrator apologize.

However, what will happen mentally? Dozens or even decades later, this mental wound will even be very difficult to heal. This condition is not a whiny song for bully victims, but is based on valid research results.

Both in the short and long term, the impact of bullying itself needs to be known by everyone, especially among children, parents and teachers.

7 Impacts of Bullying to Watch Out for

The effects of bullying are easiest to recognize in the short term. As victims, both adults and children will experience the following as a result of bullying by people in their environment.

The following below are the effects of bullying that need to be watched out for.

1. Psychological Problems

Victims of bullying often show various symptoms of psychological problems, even after the bullying has taken place. The most common conditions are depression and anxiety disorders.

In addition, the effects of bullying on mental health in adolescents and children are feelings of sadness, low self-esteem, loneliness, and loss of interest in things they usually like, as well as changes in sleeping patterns or eating patterns.

The effects of bullying will then cause psychosomatic symptoms, including psychological problems that trigger disturbances in physical health. This does not only apply to adults, but also to children.

For example, when it’s time to go to school, the child will then feel a stomach ache and have a headache even though there is nothing physically wrong with his body.

2. Physical Problems

Bullying will also cause children to experience digestive disorders. Not only bruises or injuries due to physical violence they experience, victims of bullying also often experience anxiety which will then trigger stress on the body.

This condition will also cause various health problems, as well as frequent illness, digestive disorders, as well as various other problems. Bullying in children will also exacerbate health problems that they then suffered before.

For example, skin problems, stomach problems, or heart problems in children that get worse due to stress.

3. Sleep disorders

The negative impact of bullying is also clearly visible, namely sleep disturbances. Victims of bullying also often have difficulty getting a good night’s sleep. Even if you can sleep, it’s not uncommon for that time to be filled with nightmares.

4. Suicidal Thoughts

The impact of bullying on this one victim will not only come to the minds of adults. Victims of bullying who are children and adolescents are also at risk of having thoughts of ending their life.

Not infrequently there are reports of incidents of school-aged children who later die from suicide after being bullied by their friends. This is the danger of bullying that parents should be aware of.

5. Unable to Unite with People Around

One of the consequences of bullying that you need to watch out for is the difficulty in blending in with the people around you. Children in adults who experience bullying are indirectly placed in a social status which is then lower than their peers.

This will also make victims of bullying often feel lonely, neglected, and lead to decreased self-confidence.

6. Achievement Disturbances

The impact of other bullying is that children tend to experience difficulties in achieving learning achievements. They will also find it difficult to concentrate in class, often do not attend school, and are not included in various activities at school.

7. It’s hard to believe in other people

The impact of bullying on victims that should not be underestimated is the feeling of difficulty trusting other people. When a child is a victim of bullying, it becomes difficult for them to trust other people around them.

One of the bad effects of bullying will be seen when the victim is still small. However, when they grow up, they will feel the need to build relationships with other people.

The impact of bullying according to these experts will also make children experience failure when making friends or looking for partners in the future.

Impact of Bullying in the Long Term

The effects of bullying are often still felt by victims, even though dozens of years have passed since the incident took place. The long-term impact of bullying itself is rarely seen, but it is precisely this that makes the victim feel more tormented.

Researchers in England themselves conducted research on the impact of bullying up to 40 years after the incident. The result itself is that there are several long-term impacts that are then felt by the victims, as follows.

• The health conditions for victims of bullying, who are now 50 years old, tend to have worse consequences, both physically and mentally.
• Cognitive function is also lower when compared to proper people who have never been victims of bullying.
• The quality of life and life satisfaction levels of bully victims also tend to be lower when compared to their peers who have never experienced bullying.

The impact of bullying itself is not always predictable. Children who are victims of bullying, themselves may not show signs of being disturbed by these various treatments.

However, later in life, these children are at increased risk of developing a depressive mental disorder as well as receiving psychiatric treatment. Other evidence regarding the long-term consequences of bullying is also presented by the results of various studies conducted on 1,420 children aged 9-16 years who had been victims of bullying.

The experts also examined their mental state for 4-6 times over a period of several years. As a result, children who have experienced bullying are also more likely to experience various types of anxiety disorders and panic disorders.

In addition, the trauma caused by bullying that was received as a child will also change the structure of the brain in the future, and will affect the ability to make the right decisions.

Finally, children who have been victims of bullying in their childhood tend to experience difficulties in socializing when they grow up, like some of these things.

• It is more difficult to get a job or keep the job you have
• It’s hard to feel focused on one thing
• Difficulty in interacting socially with others
• Tend to feel more susceptible to disease

Types of Bullying

Bullying is any violent physical or mental behavior that is carried out by one or more people by attacking or by intimidating other people.

This violent behavior also generally affects children and adolescents who are physically weaker than their peers. This bullying itself can be grouped into several categories.

• Direct physical contact. Examples include hitting, kicking, slapping, pushing, biting, grabbing, locking someone in a room, pinching, scratching, extorting and damaging things that are then owned by other people.
• Direct verbal contact. For example threatening, humiliating, demeaning, and disturbing, by giving name-calling, sarcasm, put-downs, ridiculing, spreading gossip, intimidating, and cursing.
• Direct nonverbal behavior. This includes looking cynical, sticking out the tongue, showing condescending, mocking, and threatening facial expressions. Generally, this type of bullying itself is accompanied by physical contact or verbal contact.
• Indirect nonverbal behavior includes the act of keeping someone quiet, manipulating friendships so that they eventually crack, deliberately isolating or ignoring, and sending anonymous letters to someone.
• Cyber ​​bullying, the existence of technological advances then has a negative side as well. Hurting other people with electronic media, such as sending intimidation video recordings and writing malicious comments on social media, is classified as bullying in cyberspace.
• Sexual harassment. Sometimes, acts of harassment are categorized as either physical aggression or verbal behavior.

Characteristics of Child Victims of Bullying

Often avoiding social situations Sometimes, what happens to children who are victims of bullying are reluctant to end it by complaining to their parents and then they have become victims of bullying.

Therefore parents then need to take the initiative and understand what are the characteristics of children who have become victims of bullying, as follows.

• Often skip school
• Dislikes going to school
• Academic performance continues to decline
• Doing various actions that harm his body
• There were damaged personal items, such as books, gadgets, and clothes
• Hard to sleep
• Often have nightmares
• Sudden loss of friends
• Avoiding many social situations.

If the various things above then appear in children, you should immediately ask them. It could be that children then feel afraid to report bullying that happened to them.

How to Overcome the Impact of Bullying

When a child later becomes a victim of bullying, recovery from that condition may not be an easy thing to do. However, if it is not addressed immediately, then it will cause problems for children in the future.

So that the impact of bullying does not drag on in disturbing children, there are several important steps that can be taken, as follows.

• Listen and understand what the child is feeling
• Help your child feel focused on taking care of himself and growing into a better person
• Invite children then do counseling with psychological problems
• Remind your child that then taking revenge won’t make them feel better
• Invite children to also do activities or go to various places they like
• Make children feel important
• Make sure your child gets support from family and friends.

The impact of bullying can arise right away or decades later. The short-term impacts that are felt include psychological disorders such as depression and anxiety disorders, sleep disturbances, to various declines in performance at school and at work.

Meanwhile, in the long run, children who become victims of bullying tend to find it difficult to get a job, cannot interact socially, are more susceptible to psychological disorders and tend to need help from a psychiatrist more often.

Therapy sessions with a psychologist or psychiatrist can be the first step to improve the quality of life due to bullying.

Books Related to Bullying

1. Let’s End Bullying

Bullying is a problem whose impact must be borne by all parties. Whether it’s the perpetrator, the victim, or he who witnessed the action.

The results of the study show that one in three children worldwide admit to having experienced bullying. Whether it’s at school, in the neighborhood, or even online. Likewise, one in three children admit to having bullied their friends.

It is very important for parents to understand that bullying is by no means a normal part of childhood to go through. The act of bullying has bad consequences for victims, witnesses, as well as for the perpetrators themselves! Even the effect sometimes lingers until the child has become an adult.

This book will discuss thoroughly what bullying is, how to prevent and overcome it.

2. Stop Bullying

Bullying or what is known by the wider community as bullying is not something new that is happening around us. Old, young, rich, poor, everyone can be a victim of bullying, or even people who do it.

The question is, why did all this happen? What are the reasons for someone to bully, and why is someone bullied? Then, from the side of a third person who is not involved with all that, what should we do? Can we have a role to play in stopping this form of bullying?

Through this book, the author invites readers to explore the understanding of bullying, the various types of bullying, the reasons bullying can occur, and how we can overcome it all. Happy reading.

3. Cyberbullying

Cyberbullying: Digital Rights: Right on Online Safety seeks to provide an explanation of cyberbullying through historical exploration, case tracking, and the potential for new forms of bullying to emerge in cyberspace.

For this reason, the authors accompany the discussion by explaining various phenomena that have recently been present, such as cyber incivility, trolling, cyberstalking, doxing, revenge porn, cancel culture, disinhibition effect, and oversharing activities.

In closing, the author uses the QR Code in this book to summarize material reviews and make it easier for readers to explore further the issue by looking at laws and regulations, court decisions, videos, and articles related to the topic of discussion.

When humanity is entering a period of online transition, there will be evolutionary changes to the architecture of human rights that we have known so far. There are important challenges in fully understanding the complex and extensive threats to human rights in the digital space.

New technologies have penetrated so deeply into today’s legal environment that they not only introduce new ways of approaching traditional human rights, but also generate new rights and freedoms.

Today, a term known as digital rights appears. Some experts introduce digital rights as new human rights categories, while others explain them as a chain that is interrelated, starting from the right to access, the right to expression, and the right to feel safe (right on online safety).

However, there is deep concern when confronting the right to feel safe with the reality experienced by internet users today. A series of incidents have been seen that have harmed the sense of security of internet users, ranging from hacking, sexual violence, surveillance, especially cyberbullying.

Those are some of the effects of bullying that we need to be aware of. Sinaumed’s can also read books related to bullying which you can get at sinaumedia.com so that you have #MoreWithReading information.

Functions and Roles of Pancasila – Today, the existence of Pancasila, which is known as the foundation of the Indonesian state, also serves as the basic mold that forms the character of the Indonesian nation. In fact, Pancasila has been used as the basis and ideology of the Indonesian state for more than 70 years, but not everyone understands its function and role, especially in the midst of current globalization.

For this reason, the younger generation has been prepared as well as possible with the Pancasila character through learning Pancasila Education which is given at schools and universities.

Since Pancasila has been appointed as an open ideology for the Indonesian state, of course its function and role will continue to develop in line with the times. Yep, the existence of Pancasila as an open ideology turned out to be very innovative for all circles of the Indonesian nation. So, what are the functions and roles of Pancasila for the Indonesian nation?

How do you grow the value of Pancasila awareness in the midst of today’s globalization era? How do you grow the value of Pancasila awareness among the younger generation? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands these things, let’s immediately see the following review!

Understanding the Functions and Roles of Pancasila for the Indonesian Nation

In fact, elements of the function and role of Pancasila for the Indonesian nation will always be combined into one discussion. However, in the following description, we will separate the functions and roles of each Pancasila for the Indonesian people, so that it is easier to understand.

The Function of Pancasila for the Indonesian Nation

According to the 2015 Pancasila Module, it states that there are 3 functions of Pancasila namely 1) As a View of Life; 2) As the basis of the State; and 3) As a National Ideology. So, here is an explanation of the three embodiments of the function of Pancasila!

1. Pancasila as a View of Life

As a Basic Belief System

This means that all activities in the life of the Indonesian people must be in accordance with the Pancasila precepts. This Basic Belief System in general is a basic belief system that is used as a basic reference in thinking, behaving, and behaving.

So, for the Indonesian people, the existence of Pancasila certainly functions as a basic belief system view of life, because it contains basic ideas about a life that is considered good. Philosophically, Pancasila does contain positive values, both in the way of thinking, behaving, and behaving in the order of social life.

Kinship as a View of Life

This means that the notion of kinship is a basic idea in the real life of the Indonesian people. Try Sinaumed’s to think again, since the time of our ancestors, the condition of the Indonesian people is interrelated one by one, one by one, and one by one, right ?

As a Source of Ethics, Morals, and Culture

Philosophically, Pancasila is not only the basis of the state, but also contains values ​​that are considered good as well as guidelines for how to think, behave and behave in this social life.

Behavior that has become a patterned habit will later form the local culture. Thus, this Pancasila serves as a source of ethics, morals, and culture of Indonesian society.

2. Pancasila as the Foundation of the State

If you look at the definition, the basis of the state is a set of values ​​that have been explored and developed within society itself since centuries ago, of course, which contain the idea of ​​the ideals of the state and legal ideals, then used as a source for drafting basic law.

Meanwhile, in the Indonesian legal system, the highest legal norms are Pancasila and the Preamble to the 1945 Constitution. Yep, all the paragraphs in the Preamble to the 1945 Constitution are embodiments of the Pancasila precepts.

Try Sinaumed’s to remember again, in the Preamble of the 1945 Constitution there was an affirmation that: “…, then the Independence of the Indonesian Nationality was drafted in an Indonesian Constitution, which was formed in an arrangement of the Republic of Indonesia which has people’s sovereignty based on the belief in the One God. Almighty, Humanity…..”

So, this provision clearly confirms that the existence of Pancasila and its precepts is contained in the Preamble to the 1945 Constitution which is then used as the basis of the state.

3. Pancasila as National Ideology

Apart from being the basis of the state and a way of life, the existence of Pancasila is also a national ideology for the Indonesian nation, in the form of an open ideology to be precise. Basically, ideology is a collection of ideas, ideas, or beliefs that thoroughly and systematically regulate how a group of people behave in all aspects of life.

The boundaries of ideology are not only as ideas, aspirations, and philosophy of life of a nation, but also in the form of political beliefs resulting from a common will.

Meanwhile, Pancasila is considered as an open ideology because in real terms it is rooted and lives in the life of its people, thereby proving that Pancasila has a dimension of reality. Not only that, even Pancasila can develop in accordance with the dynamic development of society.

The Role of Pancasila for the Indonesian Nation

Next is the role of Pancasila for the Indonesian nation which is still related to the element of function. The main role of Pancasila is as the foundation of the state, which then develops into the following:

1. As the basis of the state. That is, to be the source of all the origins of law and order in Indonesia.
2. Covering the atmosphere of mysticism (Geistlichenhintergrund)
3. Realizing the ideals of law as a basis, both in writing and in writing.
4. Become the eternal spirit of the 1945 Constitution, especially for state administrators and Indonesian people.

Know the 7 Functions and Roles of Pancasila According to Suryana

According to a research journal entitled Cultivating the Value of Awareness Among the Young Generation: Theoretical Studies by Widdy Yuspita Widyaningrum, states that there are 7 functions and roles of Pancasila by Suryana (2015), which are as follows.

1. Pancasila as the Foundation of the State

1. As the basis for managing a sovereign and independent country.
2. As a basis for regulating the administration of a clean and authoritative state apparatus, so as to achieve the national goals stated in the Preamble to the 4th paragraph of the 1945 Constitution.
3. As a basis, direction, and guidance for the life activities of the Indonesian nation in daily life.

2. Pancasila as a source of national basic law

This emerged after the reform through the MPR Decree No. III/2000. Then, it was changed to Law Number 10 of 1004 concerning the Formation of Legislation.

3. Legal Sources Consists of Written and Unwritten Legal Sources

The source of national basic law is Pancasila. This has been written as in the Preamble to the 1945 Constitution and the body of the 1945 Constitution.

4. Pancasila as the Way of Life of the Indonesian Nation

This implies that all activities in the life of the Indonesian nation must be in accordance with the Pancasila precepts. Given that Pancasila is the embodiment of values ​​originating from the life of the Indonesian nation itself.

5. Pancasila as the Noble Agreement of the Indonesian Nation

This means that the Indonesian people who are already independent have agreed to make Pancasila the basis of their country. The agreement materialized on August 18, 1945, with the ratification of Pancasila as the basis of the state by the Preparatory Committee for Indonesian Independence (PPKI), which represented all Indonesian people.

6. Pancasila as State Ideology

This means that Pancasila is the common goal of the Indonesian nation which is then implemented in the form of national development. This is done by creating a just and prosperous society that is evenly distributed both materially and spiritually based on Pancasila within the framework of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia which is independent, sovereign and united in an atmosphere of safe, peaceful, orderly and dynamic national life as well as in the world’s social environment. independent, friendly, orderly, and peaceful.

7. Pancasila as the Unifier of the Nation

This is because Pancasila clearly has general and universal values, making it possible to accommodate all of this diverse life so that it can be accepted by all groups.

The Role of Pancasila in Globalization and Modernization

Based on a research journal article entitled The Role of Pancasila in Facing the Era of Globalization and Modernization by Nidya Kameswari Perbawa, states that Pancasila can still play a major role for the Indonesian nation, especially in today’s globalization and modernization life.

In this globalization and modernization life, Pancasila will function as a barrier, so that people can filter out good and bad cultures alias according to Pancasila values. Remembering that in this sophisticated life, we still have to realize Pancasila in terms of morals and behavior.

According to Lickona (2013), there are at least 10 values ​​that must be instilled by the younger generation in terms of behavior, namely wisdom, justice , firmness , self-control , love and affection . , positive attitude , hard work , resourcefulness , integrity , and humility .

So, therefore Pancasila plays an important and big role in efforts to deal with the phenomenon of globalization and the influence of modernization in Indonesia, especially for the younger generation. It turns out that this role can be realized from each of the five existing precepts, namely

1. Belief in the One and Only God

This means that every Indonesian has faith in God and carries out His obligations, and does not impose his will on others. If people already believe in the existence of God in their religion, then even negative global influences will not be able to “disturb” them.

For example, ISIS is a form of bad influence in terms of religion and controls the issue of radicalism, even in many countries. However, the Indonesian people, who already believe in the existence of God in their respective religions, understand that Islam in this country will not interfere with this form of ISIS. Although there are some who are affected, the wider community already understands that this teaching is wrong.

2. Just and Civilized Humanity

This means that all Indonesian people must recognize the equality of fellow human beings, both in terms of rights and obligations. Recognizing that equality is not only carried out among fellow Indonesians, but also among neighboring countries.

3. Indonesian Unity

That is, there is a patriotism-unity that prioritizes the interests of the nation over individual interests. In this case, it is clear that through the phenomenon of modernization Western cultures were brought in, but in fact Indonesian people are already “already” in love with their own culture. As a result, western culture, especially bad ones, is not easily accepted by the Indonesian people.

4. Democracy Led by Wisdom of Wisdom in Deliberations/Representations

Namely with the existence of a democratic culture that applies to all decision-making activities, both on a large and small scale. So, it can be concluded that through this 4th precept, it will filter out western culture which has a negative influence.

5. Social Justice for All Indonesian People

That is, by maintaining a balance between the rights and obligations of each Indonesian citizen in an effort to promote social life. When the phenomenon of globalization and modernization enters Indonesian life, bad influences can be filtered out.

How to Grow the Value of Pancasila Awareness in the Young Generation

According to a research journal entitled Growing Awareness Values ​​Among the Young Generation: Theoretical Studies by Widdy Yuspita Widyaningrum, there are at least 4 ways to foster awareness values ​​of Pancasila, especially among the younger generation. Bearing in mind that if Pancasila is not grown consciously, its position will be fragile under the times.

1. The younger generation must have the view that Pancasila is a way of life as well as the foundation of the state

The first way is to make the younger generation aware that Pancasila is something that should be used as the basis of the state as well as a way of life in living this daily life. If they are already aware of this, then over time they will also be able to maintain the original Indonesian cultural values.

Later, if there are new values ​​that develop, then their position will remain under the personality of the nation, while Pancasila will still be firmly adhered to as a way of life, both in speaking and behaving.

2. The Speed ​​of Young Generation’s Ability to Adapt to the World

According to historical records, many lost civilizations were due to the inability to adapt to world changes. While Pancasila as the basis of the state and outlook on life is dynamic, aka still able to keep up with the times, but in a positive way.

3. There is an integration function of various elements to form a centripetal force

This means that the younger generation of Indonesia will be able to manage and maintain the relationship between parts, which will then develop into components in an effort to foster the values ​​of Pancasila awareness.

4. The Young Generation Needs to Have a Common Goal to Transform

This means that the younger generation needs to have a common goal from time to time to transform, because it continues to be improved by the dynamics of the community and by its leaders. Bearing in mind that the Indonesian state was formed by a common past history, in the future it must further strengthen the similarity of ideals, outlook on life, hopes and goals. In this case, of course, it is the younger generation who plays the most role.

Source:

https://bpip.go.id/

Pancasila Module: Education and Training to Improve Understanding of Citizens’ Constitutional Rights. (2015). Center for Pancasila Education and the Constitution of the Constitutional Court of the Republic of Indonesia.

Perbawa, Nidya Kameswari. (2021). THE ROLE OF PANCASILA IN THE ERA OF GLOBALIZATION AND MODERNIZATION. In Proceedings of the National Seminar on the Faculty of Law, Mahasaraswati University, Denpasar (Vol. 1, No. 1, pp. 29-38).

Widyaningrum, Widdy Yuspita. (2019). Cultivating Value Awareness Among Young Generation: Theoretical Study. Journal of JISIPOL, Vol 3 (3).

Also Read!

• Pancasila Student Profile: Definition, Benefits, and 6 Elements
• The Meaning of Pancasila as the Source of All Sources of Indonesian Law
• Understanding Religious Values ​​in the First Precepts of Pancasila
• The Importance of Human Values ​​in the Second Precepts of Pancasila
• Examples of the Application of the 3rd Precepts of Pancasila in Everyday Life
• Pancasila Text, History, and the Meaning of the Symbol
• A Brief History of Pancasila Sanctity Day October 1
• Understanding Pancasila as an Open Ideology and Its Advantages

Figures of the Proclamation of Indonesian Independence – Friends of Gramed, it is necessary to know that Indonesia’s independence was motivated by the events of the proclamation read by Ir. Soekarno and Mohammad Hatta. However, other proclamation figures were also involved in the success of the nation’s struggle for independence.

The proclamation became the spearhead of all the struggles and sacrifices that had been poured out by Indonesian fighters. The proclamation figures played a role in formulating, compiling, and carrying out Indonesian independence on August 17, 1945.

Friends of Sinaumed’s are certainly curious about the proclamation figure and his role in the proclamation of Indonesian independence. So, to find out, let’s look at the following explanation together.

1. Ir. Sukarno

The first proclamation figure, Soekarno was born in Blitar on June 6 1901, the son of a People’s School teacher named Raden Soekami and a Balinese woman of royal blood, Ida Ayu Nyoman Rai. He was born with the name Koesno Sosrodihardjo which was given by his parents.

As a noble child, he was able to receive higher education and graduated from the Technische Hoogeschool te Bandoeng (now the Bandung Institute of Technology) in 1925 majoring in civil engineering. Soekarno was declared to have passed the engineer exam on May 25, 1926.

After graduating from college, he published his political ideas in the mass media with an article entitled “Nationalism, Islam and Marxism”. This paper emphasizes the importance of the ideas of inter-group unity, which later marked political thought throughout his career.

His political struggle continued by forming the Algemeene Studie Club (ASC) in Bandung in 1926, which was the result of inspiration from the Indonesische Studie Club by Dr. Soetomo. This organization later became the forerunner to the founding of the Indonesian National Party (PNI) in 1927.

He adopted a non-cooperative attitude with the Dutch which landed him in detention several times. His activities in the PNI caused him to be arrested by the Dutch on December 29, 1929 in Yogyakarta, and the next day he was transferred to Bandung to be thrown into Banceuy Prison.

In 1930, he was transferred to Sukamiskin and read out his phenomenal plea for Indonesia suing at the Bandung Landraad court on December 18, 1930, until he was released again on December 31, 1931.

On August 17, 1945, shortly after Japan surrendered to the Allies, at the urging of the youth activists who had kidnapped him at Rengasdengklok, Soekarno and Hatta were appointed as Indonesia’s first vice-presidents.

2. Drs. H. Mohammad Hatta

The second Proclamation figure, namely Mohammad Hatta, was Indonesia’s first vice president, as well as a proclamation figure in charge of compiling the text of the proclamation, proclaiming Indonesian independence, and signing the text of the proclamation on behalf of the Indonesian people with Ir. Sukarno.

Apart from that, he was also the originator of the idea for the text of the proclamation “matters regarding the transfer of power and other things to be carried out in a careful manner and in the shortest possible time”. Hatta became a companion to Ir. Soekarno in the proclamation ceremony wearing all white.

Hatta was born in Bukittinggi, West Sumatra on August 12, 1902 with the name Muhammad Athar. He was born to the couple Muhammad Djamil and Siti Saleha who came from Minangkabau.

His father is a descendant of a tarekat cleric in Batuhampar, near Payakumbuh, West Sumatra and his mother comes from a family of traders in Bukittinggi.

He first received formal education in private schools. After six months, he moved to a public school and was in the same class as his older brother. He then moved to Europeesche Lagere School (ELS) in Padang (now Padang 1 Public High School) until 1913, and continued to Meer Uitgebreid Lager Onderwijs (MULO) until 1917.

His non-formal education was obtained from Muhammad Jamil Jambek, Abdullah Ahmad, and several other scholars. On November 18, 1945, Hatta married Rahmi Hatta and three days later they lived in Yogyakarta. The couple then had three daughters named Meutia Farida Hatta, Gemala Rabi’ah Hatta, and Halida Nuriah Hatta.

Hatta had served as Prime Minister in the Hatta I Cabinet, Hatta II Cabinet, and the United Republic of Indonesia (RIS) Cabinet. In 1956, he stepped down from the post of vice president.

On March 14, 1980, Hatta died at dr. Cipto Mangunkusumo and buried in the Tanah Kusir Public Cemetery (TPU), South Jakarta.

Because his struggle for the Republic of Indonesia was very great, Hatta was awarded the highest honor “Star of the Republic of Indonesia Class I” given by President Soeharto. Apart from that, the Government of Indonesia also designated him as one of Indonesia’s National Heroes on October 23, 1986 through Presidential Decree number 081/TK/1986.

3. Fatmawati

The figure of the third proclamation, namely Fatmawati, was the third wife of the first Indonesian president, Ir. Sukarno. She was the first first lady from 1945–1967. He contributed to Indonesia’s independence as a tailor for the Sang Saka Red and White Heritage Flag which was hoisted during the Proclamation of Indonesian Independence ceremony on August 17, 1945.

Fatmawati spent her time sewing the flag in her physical condition which was quite vulnerable because she was in her late pregnancy and it was time to give birth to her first child. The flag was stitched in stages using a hand-operated Singer sewing machine.

Fatmawati was born to Hasan Din and Siti Chadijah, with the name Fatimah. His parents are descendants of Princess Indrapura, a member of the royal family from the Indrapura Sultanate, Pesisir Selatan, West Sumatra. His father was a businessman and Muhammadiyah figure in Bengkulu.

Fatmawati married Soekarno on 1 June 1943 and was blessed with five sons and daughters, including Guntur Soekarnoputra, Megawati Soekarnoputri, Rachmawati Soekarnoputri, Sukmawati Soekarnoputri and Guruh Soekarnoputra.

On May 14, 1980, he died of a heart attack while on his way home from Mecca. His body was then buried at the Karet Bivouac Public Cemetery (TPU), Central Jakarta.

4. Mohamad Ibn Sayuti

Mohamad Ibnu Sayuti or better known as Sayuti Melik is recorded in Indonesian history as a proclamation figure who typed the text of the Proclamation of Indonesian Independence. In addition, he is also known as the figure who changed the phrase “representatives of the Indonesian nation” to “on behalf of the Indonesian nation” in the concept of the proclamation text.

Sayuti was born on November 22, 1908 in Sleman, Yogyakarta. The child of the couple Abdul Mu’in alias Partoprawito, a bekel jajar or village head in Sleman, Yogyakarta with Sumilah. He received his first education at the Ongko Loro School (elementary level) in Srowolan Village, only up to grade IV, and continued in Yogyakarta until he received a diploma.

Since childhood, he was instilled with nationalism by his father when he opposed the Dutch who used his rice fields to grow tobacco. While studying at a teacher’s school in Solo in 1920, he learned nationalism from his Dutch history teacher, HA Zurink.

Sayuti is part of the Menteng 31 group, which played a role in the kidnapping of Ir. Soekarno and Moh. Hatta on August 16, 1945. He and other youths brought Ir. Soekarno (along with Fatmawati and Guntur who were only nine months old) and Moh. Hatta to Rengasdengklok. The goal is that they are not influenced by the Japanese.

After Indonesia’s independence, he became a member of the Central Indonesian National Committee (KNIP) and was known as a supporter of Ir. Sukarno, but also as a person who dared to oppose the ideas of Nasakom (nationalism, religion, communism).

He proposed that Nasakom be changed to Nasasos (nationalism, religion, socialism). Not only that, he also opposed the appointment of Ir. Soekarno as president for life by the Provisional People’s Consultative Assembly (MPRS).

Sayuti died on February 27, 1989 after a year of illness, at the age of 80 in Jakarta and was buried at the Kalibata Heroes Cemetery (TMP). He received Mahaputra Star Level V (1961) from Ir. Soekarno and Bintang Mahaputra Adipradana (II) from President Soeharto (1973).

5. Sutan Syahrir

Sutan Syahrir is known as an intellectual, pioneer and revolutionary for Indonesian independence. He was born on March 5, 1909 in Padang Panjang, West Sumatra. His father’s name was Mohammad Rasad, the title of Maharaja Soetan bin Leman, the title of Soetan Palindih Koto Gadang, Agam, West Sumatra, and his mother was named Puti Siti Rabiah, who came from Mandailing Natal, North Sumatra.

Sjahrir received his basic education at Europeesche Lagere School (ELS) and secondary school at Meer Uitgebreid Lager Onderwijs (MULO) in Medan. In 1926, he finished school from MULO and entered the high school Algemeene Middelbare School (AMS) in Bandung. He joined the Indonesian Student Theater Association (Batovis) at the school as a director, screenwriter, and actor.

On February 20, 1927, Syahrir was one of the ten people who initiated the establishment of a nationalist youth association, namely Jong Indonesië. The association then changed its name to the Indonesian Youth which became the driving force for the Indonesian Youth Congress, a monumental congress that sparked the Youth Pledge in 1928.

Syahrir returned to continue his education in the Netherlands at the Faculty of Law, University of Amsterdam to study socialism. Apart from studying socialism, he was also active in the Indonesian Association (PI) when Moh. Hatta.

At the end of 1931, Syahrir left his campus to return to his homeland and join the national movement. He immediately joined the New Indonesian National Party (PNI) organization, which in June 1932 was chaired by himself.

After Indonesia’s independence, he became Indonesia’s first politician and prime minister. He served as the first Prime Minister of Indonesia with terms of office from 14 November 1945 to 3 July 1947, as chairman of the Indonesian Socialist Party (PSI), Head of the Delegation of the Republic of Indonesia in the Linggajati Negotiations, and as the Roving Ambassador (Ambassador-at-Large) of the Republic of Indonesia .

Syahrir founded PSI in 1948 as another alternative party that grew out of the international communist movement. Although the PSI was left-leaning and based its guidelines on the teachings of Marx-Engels, it opposed the Soviet Union’s state system.

He died in exile as a political prisoner on April 9, 1966, aged 57 in Zürich, Switzerland. His body was buried at the Kalibata Heroes Cemetery (TMP), Jakarta. Sutan Sjahrir was designated as one of Indonesia’s National Heroes on April 9, 1966 through Presidential Decree number 76 of 1966.

6. Sukarno

Soekarni’s full name was Soekarni Kartodiwirjo. He was born on July 14, 1916 in Sumberdiran Village, Garum District, Blitar Regency, East Java. His father’s name was Dimoen Kartodiwirjo, a descendant of Eyang Onggo, Prince Diponegoro’s cook. His mother was named Pidjah, a woman from Kediri.

Soekarni is the fourth child of nine siblings, namely Hono Karto Dihardjo, Soekarmilah (Mrs. H. Sopran), Soekardi, Soekarlim, Soekarni, Soekarti (Mrs. Sastro Roesdi), Karmijem (Mrs. Parto Widjono), Endang Sartini (Mrs. Muslimin ), Soekarpo (Endi Soekarto), and Soekarjo.

He received his education at the Mardisiswo School in Blitar (a kind of Student Park made by Ki Hajar Dewantara). At school, Sukarni learned about nationalism through Moh. Anwar, who comes from Banyumas, is the founder of Mardidiswo as well as a figure in the Indonesian movement.

In 1934, he succeeded in becoming Chairman of the Young Indonesian Executive Board. Meanwhile, the Dutch began to suspect him of being a young militant. In 1936, the Dutch carried out a raid on young Indonesian officers, but he managed to escape and lived on the run for several years.

Soekarni was included in the group of young people who were involved in the attempt to kidnap Ir. Soekarno and Moh. Hatta to Rengasdengklok. While in Rengasdengklok, the two of them were continuously urged to immediately declare independence, no later than August 17, 1945.

In the end, Ir. Soekarno and Moh. Hatta agreed to this and was brought back to Jakarta by Achmad Soebardjo to immediately prepare for independence by compiling the text of the proclamation.

As soon as the manuscript was finished, Ir. Soekarno who was supported by Moh. Hatta suggested that all participants present at the meeting sign the text. However, Soekarni suggested that only the two of them sign the text of the proclamation as representatives of the Indonesian nation.

In 1961, Soekarni was appointed Indonesian Ambassador to Peking, PRC (People’s Republic of China) and returned to his homeland in March 1964. That said, during a meeting at the Bogor Palace in December 1964, he warned Ir. Soekarno for the actions of the PKI.

However, contrary to his expectations, the Many People’s Consultative Party (Murba) was frozen in 1965. He and other Murba leaders were imprisoned. During the New Order era, he was released and the Murba ban was lifted (rehabilitated 17 October 1966).

Soekarni was then appointed as a member of the Supreme Advisory Council (DPA) in 1967, which was his last official position. The figure who received the Second and Fourth Grade Mahaputra Stars died on May 7, 1971. His body was buried at the Kalibata Heroes Cemetery (TMP) with a state ceremony.

7. Achmad Subardjo

Raden Achmad Soebardjo Djojoadisoerjo was born on March 23, 1896 in Teluk Jambe, Karawang, West Java. Teluk Jambe Village is a small village on the banks of the Citarum River and is a rice-producing area in West Java Province.

Achmad Soebardjo is the youngest of four children, namely the result of the marriage of Teuku Muhammad Yusuf with Wardinah. His father came from Acehnese noble descent from Pidie, while his mother was a daughter of a sub-district head in Telukagung, Cirebon, of Javanese–Bugis descent from Central Java.

He also contributed to the success of the proclamation proclaimed by Ir. Soekarno and Moh. Hatta. His role was to bring them back to Jakarta after being forcibly taken by youths to Rengasdengklok.

His journey to Rengasdengklok is full of obstacles and dangers. However, this did not dampen his steps to save the two leaders of the Indonesian nation.

Arriving at the location, he succeeded in persuading the youths who had hidden Ir. Soekarno and Moh. Hatta to take him back to Jakarta. Apart from that, he also assured the youths that the two of them would soon proclaim Indonesian independence.

Achmad Soebardjo became one of the important figures directly involved in the preparation of the proclamation text. Soekarno wrote down the concept of the text of the proclamation on a piece of paper, while Mohammad Hatta and Ahmad Soebardjo contributed their thoughts orally.

So, that’s a brief explanation of the struggles and services of the 7 Figures of the Proclamation of Indonesian Independence . Appreciating the services of the heroes is not only by remembering and thanking them in their hearts, but also by imitating their attitudes and actions.

sinaumedia can visit sinaumedia’s book collection at www.sinaumedia.com to obtain references about these heroes, starting from their life background, education, and struggle history.

The following is a recommendation for sinaumedia books that Sinaumed’s can read to learn about Indonesian history so they can fully interpret it. Happy reading.

Author: Fandy Aprianto Rohman

Book & Article Recommendations Related to Proclamation Figures

Hello Sinaumed’s friends . Have you ever written a letter? universally, a letter is a place of communication that is used to convey information in written form on a piece of paper by one party aimed at another party, whether individually, in groups, or in an organization or company. There are many types of letters, one of which is an official letter or what is commonly called an official letter.

From the explanation above, this article will discuss the meaning of official letters, how to make them? and examples of official letters. Come on, Sinaumed’s friends , pay attention to the discussion on the meaning of official letters below.

Definition of Official Letter

There is a big difference in creating a formal letter compared to a personal letter. Also, official letters are representatives of private or government agencies. Even so, there are still many people who do not know how to write official documents. Therefore, they need examples of good and correct official letters.

In the various examples of formal letters, you will find some similarities. From there, you can find out if the official letter is in an official language that complies with PUEBI (Universal Spelling Guide in Indonesian). Not only that, the arrangement is also neatly arranged according to the existing standard format.

Official letter is a type of letter that conveys official information to parties other than the organization concerned in the form of notifications, statements, requests, delivery of official documents or goods or other official matters.

In addition, official letters or official letters are interpreted as written communication tools from the government. Official letters are official and written in standard language. As with writing an effective letter in general, business letters are meant to be simple, concise, clear, polite, and attractive.

“A business letter is an official letter. An official letter from the government or official appointed by the government or agency concerned is valid,” explained Sudaryono (1983: 34), an expert in his field.

The Big Indonesian Dictionary reveals the meaning of official letters, namely letters sent directly by government departments, generally without any cost issues. If simplified, the meaning of official letter is an institution or a communication tool within an institution. Another name for official letter is official letter.

Definition of Official Letter According to Experts

Official letters are not only about official letters. There are many types of official letters, the most commonly used are notification letters, circular letters and invitation letters. The things in the official letter are very easy to understand.

The function of official letters is to provide information or notifications, task contents, work instructions, reminders of important matters, and historical and chronological evidence. Here’s what the experts say about official letters:

• Definition of Official Letter According to Badudu

What is meant by official letter is the use of language in accordance with all applicable rules, systems or formats, both in the structure of words and sentences, as well as in the use of punctuation, the use of paragraphs or paragraphs, and so on.

• Definition of Official Letter According to Sudaryono

The definition of an official letter is the same as an official letter. Official letters are determined by the government or related agencies, and determined by the government or related agencies.

• Definition of Official Letter According to Mustakim

Official letter is defined as a written communication tool that concerns business interests and official activities of an agency.

• Definition of Official Letter According to Soedjito and Solchan

What is meant by official letters are letters from government or private agencies to government or private agencies and vice versa. Must use standard language, namely language that conforms to Indonesian rules in terms of spelling, choice of words, and sentences. The language used in the language of the alphabet is a valid language. The meaning is simple, solid, clear, polite, attractive.

Type of Official Letter

Quoted from a lecturer at the Bogor Agricultural Institute, Ir. Sutisna Riyanto MS in his article entitled Official Letter, there are seven types of official letters based on their purpose and function, namely:

• Invitation Letter: A letter that is a tool used to call participants of an organization’s event. The word invitation is a derivative word that comes from the basic lexical and the ending an. To invite means to call.
• Announcement: A letter sent to all parties, with the same content, so that all parties know (to obtain information) that the contents of the letter are the same. The circle is often called round (English) or rondshijven (Dutch).
• Warrant: A letter issued to a person or a unit within an organization with the intention of asking that person or unit to do something according to the contents of the letter.
• Letter of Instruction: A letter containing an order to do something and instructions to carry out that action. In contrast to warrants, letters of instruction are more instructive and therefore closer to teaching.
• Assignment Letter: A letter assigning an official/employee to carry out a certain activity from an organization or agency for the benefit of that organization/institution.
• Application Letter: An application letter asking to be able to do or become something related to an organization/institution.
• Business travel letter: namely a letter containing information regarding the appointment of a person from an organization/agency appointed to a place (region, organization/agency) to do something required and assigned by the organization/agency.

Characteristics of Official Letters

In English, official letters are called official letters . To do this, you must use standard words, the goal must be effective and clear. So that the purpose of the letter is understood by the recipient. In terms of general characteristics, it can be said that official letters and personal letters are very different.

The most basic difference is in the content. In KBBI, private messages are messages sent by someone to individuals. This is personal and the goal is personal gain. For more details, here are the characteristics of official letters:

1. Using Letterhead

The first characteristic, official letters are using letterhead at the top of the official letter. Letterhead is part of the letter that includes information on the address of the institution, name of the institution and telephone number of the institution. Letterhead can be used to determine whether the letter issued/delivered to the recipient is official.

2. Using official and formal language

The second feature of the official letter is that it uses many official languages. That is, do not use everyday words or are considered less formal. In addition, the vocabulary used is often adapted to PUEBI or general Indonesian spelling guidelines.

3. The contents are concise and clear

The third characteristic of a business letter is that it is brief, concise, and clear. This is to avoid using extravagant or wordy words that make the delivery of the letter incomprehensible.

4. There is a Letter Number, Subject and Attachments

The fourth feature is having the number of letters, subject and attachments. Usually, each government or private organization has its own standard for this.

5. Using an Official Stamp or Seal

The fifth official letter, namely, is characterized by the presence of a service stamp or official stamp accompanying the letter. Often this stamp is located above the signature of the head of an agency. At this point, it is very important to understand the characteristics of letters. Because in this modern era there are lots of irresponsible individuals who provide fake official letter shipments. Therefore, if you receive a shipment from an agency, you can identify it by looking at its characteristics.

Service Letter Structure

As an official letter, an official letter must have structured writing rules. Otherwise, the contents of the official letter will not be easy to understand. The structure of the letter is as follows:

1. Letterhead

As explained above, the letterhead is the part of the letter that contains information about the address, telephone number and name of the agency.

2. Date of letter 

The date of the letter indicates when the letter was issued.

3. Document Number 

For an official agency, the existence of a number on an official letter is very important. Because the goal is to facilitate all administrative procedures.

4. Subject

Subject This section often displays additional information in a formal message.

5. Appendix 

Attachments are documents or files that contain additional information from the shipment.

6. Destination Name and Address

The official letter that is made must include the name of the recipient and the address to be sent.

7. Greeting With a formal and official nature

greetings are very important. Because after this part there is a transmission of the main content of a letter.

8. Body of the letter 

The body of the letter is usually written briefly, clearly and concisely. So that the contents are easy to understand.

9. Closing Regards

Closing greetings are attached to official letters after the body of the letter.

10. Name, postage and copy

This section usually lists the name of the person responsible for the person issuing the letter, and usually receives an official stamp. In addition, other sections that require information from the mail can also be added.

Example of official letter

Here are some examples of official letters:

Example 1 (Work Assignment Letter)

Letterhead:

PT Abstinence Mundur Jaya 

Jl. Ampera Raya No. 15,

Jakarta Tel (021) 4467984,

fax (021) 4437658 

email: office@pantangmundurjaya.com 

Content of letter: 

Official Letter Number: 071.0/HRD/PTMMJ/XI/2021 

The undersigned is a Seo Specialist

PT Pantang Mundur Jaya, gives service assignments to: 

Name : Syahrul Assegaf

Position: Accounting Staff 

NIP : 808971

Address : Jl. Ampera Raya, City of Jakarta, number 16. 

In order to prepare a report of the person in charge relating to the financial condition of the branch office in Bogor City. Furthermore, the completed financial reports can be submitted to the Seo Specialist at the head office of PT Pantang Mundur Jaya. 

Thus this official letter was made and hopefully the person concerned can carry out his responsibilities properly. For their attention and cooperation, we thank you. Jakarta, August 18, 2021 Seo Specialist PT Pantang Mundur Jaya. 

Example 2 (Service Invitation Letter)

Letterhead:

Sutan Takdir Alisjahbana Mosque Student Association

Jl. Sawo Manila No. 77

Appendix : Structure of Activities

Subject: Invitation to the Celebration of Ramadhan 

Dear, 

Kinanti Afflaha Nissa 

General Chairperson of HIMASINA UNAS In-Place

Peace be upon you, and Allah’s mercy and blessings

All praise and thanks to the presence of Allah SWT for the blessings and gifts we are still given health and safety. Shalawat and greetings are always poured out to Rasulullah SAW and his family, friends and all Muslims. Amen. In connection with the implementation of the Ramadhan Celebration Event with the theme “Ramadan Lively, Strengthening Faith” which is being held by the Campus Da’wah Institute of the Sutan Takdir Mosque Student Association Alisjahbana Nurul ‘Ilmi National University, we as the organizing committee intend to invite HIMASINA National University and Indonesian Literature Department students to attend The Ramadhan Festival event, which God willing, will be held on:

Day/Date : Tuesday, 19 April 2022

Time: 15.30 WIB – finished

Place : Sutan Takdir Alisjahbana Mosque, National University

Thus we convey this application letter, we say jazakumullah khairan katsiran. Billahi taufiq Wal Hidayah, Wassalamu’alaikum

Example 3 (Room Loan Letter)

August 22, 2022

Letterhead:

Official letter number: 078/HIMASINA/XI/2022

Subject: Room Loan Request

Dear

Dean of the Faculty of Languages ​​and Letters

National University

Jakarta

Yours faithfully,

In connection with holding a meeting for the New Student Welcoming event

which will be organized by the Indonesian Literature Student Association. Therefore, with

With this letter we aim to borrow a room to be used on:

day/date : Tuesday, 23 August 2022

time: 10.00 – 14.00 WIB

Thus we made this loan letter, we thank you for your attention.

Person responsible

Dea Kemala Sari

Example 4 (Warning Letter)

Letterhead : –

Official letter number : 078/HIMASINA/XI/2022

Attachments : 1 (one) 

Subject  : Warning Letter 1

The person concerned below can explain that:

 Name : All Members

Field : Creative and Skills 

All Members and Heads of Fields do not take part in the Evaluation which is required according to the provisions based on the AD/ART of the Indonesian Literature Student Association (HIMASINA). Given a strong reprimand First Warning Letter, if you repeat it you will be given an evaluation and a Second Warning Letter.

Thus we make this statement letter truthfully, for your attention we thank you.

Best regards,

Head of Human Resources and Organization of Himasina

Ziaggi Fadhil Zahran

 Example 5 (Dismissal Letter)

letterhead :

Number : 078/HIMASINA/XI/2022

Attachments : 1 (one) 

Subject  : Member Expenditure Letter

The person concerned explains that:

 Name : Siti Sarah

NPM : 192001516023

Position : Member of Business Fund

This provision letter was made based on the AD/ART of the Indonesian Literature Student Association and our members do not have any firmness and accountability from those concerned.

Hereby certify that the aforementioned has been released from his position (left) from the management members of the Indonesian Literature Student Association, on mutual considerations and provisions.

Thus we make this statement letter truthfully, for your attention we thank you.

Best regards,

Head of Human Resources and Organization

Ziaggi Fadhil Zahran

Example 6 (Assignment Letter)

PT Looking for True Love

Jl. Melati Number 17, South Jakarta

Tel (021) 4467984, fax (021) 4437658

email: office@mencaricintasejati.com 

================================================== ======================

Service Letter

Number: A.092/HRD/PTSPG/XI/2021

The undersigned is the Main Director of PT Seeking True Love, assigning service assignments to: 

Name : Sara Dwi Anjani

Position : Finance Staff

NIP : 875935

Address : Jl. Distended 12 Number 175, South Jakarta

Prepare financial reports of company branches in the city of Medan. Or, the completed financial reports can be submitted to the Senior Director of PT Prestasi Cinta Sejati branch head office. letter This is a formal letter that I made and I hope you can fulfill your responsibility properly. For your attention and cooperation, we thank you.

Jakarta, 20 June 2021

Main Director of PT Looking for True Love

Reksa Tri Bayu Saptaji

Example 7 (School official letter)

JAKARTA PROVINCIAL GOVERNMENT

DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATION FIRST MIDDLE SCHOOL (SMP) 56 CILANDAK

Jl. Raya 29 Cilandak, tel. (021) 7559-13216

—————————————————————————

Pekanbaru, 4 August 2019

Number : 198/smp2/2019

Attachment : –

Subject: Discussion of the August 17 activities

Dear Parents / Guardians of Students

SMP NEGERI 56 CILANDAK

Assalamu’alaikum Wr. Wb.,

In commemoration of the 73rd anniversary of independence, we as the OSIS coaches will hold a panel discussion to enliven the August 17 activities and ask parents/guardians of students to attend and participate by commenting on their attendance at:

Day / date : Monday, 7 August 2019

Place: Hall of SMPN 56 Cilandak

Event : Discussion 17 August

Given the importance of the event, your presence is requested, Mr/Ms, thus inviting this letter, for your presence and participation we thank you very much.

Wassalamu’alaikum Wr. Wb.

Know,

Head of School Student Council President

SMP 56 Pekanbaru

Crescent of Dawn

If Sinaumed’s doesn’t understand how to make an official or wants to know more about official letters or other letters such as other statement letters, Sinaumed’s can dig deeper by reading the books available at sinaumedia.com

Author: Ziaggi Fadhil Zahran

Example of Experiment Report Text – Experiment report text is a text whose contents are in the form of the results of experiments carried out by the researcher or those who carried out the experiment. This text aims to report the results obtained after conducting a series of experiments and data processing to obtain a conclusion.

The trial report is a form of publication of the findings obtained in an experiment. To make it, there are several important things that must be known such as the structure and several other things that will be explained in this paper.

Experiment Report Text Structure

The trial report is composed of a title and contains two important parts as a framework, namely a general statement and also a description. Each of these sections consists of points and also explanations that support the experiments carried out.

In the general statement section, there is a description or classification whose contents discuss the experimental object in general. This section is composed of background, objectives, and theoretical foundations. The description section consists of tools and materials, experimental steps, experimental results, and conclusions.

Some simple reports have a shorter structure, namely titles, objectives, tools and materials, steps, experimental results and conclusions, while more complex reports may have other sections such as data analysis or discussion, experimental variables, and so on. other.

Features of the Test Report Text

There are several characteristics of trial reports that must be considered and understood, namely:

1. Its nature must be objective

Experimental reports must be objective, which means they must be in accordance with the facts and prevailing theory, not mere estimates.

2. Presenting Facts

Trial reports must be written based on the results of trials that have actually been carried out, there may not be anything that was not done during the experiment, but is written into the report.

3. The contents are complete

The contents of the trial report must be complete and constitute a complete series of experiments carried out, although sometimes there are things that are general in nature, but must be written into the report if indeed it is part of the experiment.

Sample Test Report Text

Here are some examples of simple trial reports that you can use as learning materials or references for compiling a trial report.

1. Experiment Report on Making a Simple Telescope

Tools, Materials, and Purpose

Someone who wants to observe objects in the sky requires a sophisticated tool called a telescope. A telescope is a large binocular used in astronomy. This science studies objects in the sky. Astronomy could not develop properly because many people think that astronomy requires expensive and high-tech telescopes, even though simple telescopes can be made and simple observations can also be made.

To make a simple telescope, the following tools and materials are needed.

• You can buy a LUP objective lens (magnifying glass) or a practicum convex lens (commonly sold at laboratory supply stores) with a diameter of 5 cm.
• PVC pipe and needp (pipe joints) with a length of approximately 30 cm.
• Tools such as a small saw and adhesive glue.
• An ocular lens (you can use a binocular lens or a microscope lens) or you can buy a lens at a laboratory supply store with a diameter of 2.5 cm.

Steps

• Determine the body length of the telescope first with the physics formula that we already know, namely: fob + fok = L.
• Cut the PVC pipe to a known length.
• Place the objective lens into the pipe joint, then connect the pipe connection that already contains the lens to the front end of the PVC pipe that has been measured. Remember the objective lens is always located in front of the eyepiece.
• Attach the needp at the very back end of the pipe.
• Place the eyepiece lens in its need.

Results

Conclusion

To observe distant celestial bodies, you don’t always have to use sophisticated and expensive tools. You just use objects that are easy to get. Before making observations, it’s a good idea to look at the rising and setting times and the direction of the object to be observed.

2. Experiment Report on How to Make a Rainbow in a Glass

Objective

Knowing how the process of the rainbow by using simple tools

Tools and Materials Used

• Enough water.
• Glass cup.
• Scissors.
• Glass (with a size that can fit into the glass).
• Flashlight.

Experiment Steps

• Put the water into the glass cup, then place the glass on the table.
• Place the glass into the glass in an oblique or oblique position.
• Condition the room to be dark by turning off the lights, closing the curtains, and so on.
• Turn on the flashlight and then point the flashlight at the glass that is in the glass.
• Observe the rainbow that appears from the corner of the glass.
• Rearrange the glass angle for different results.

Experiment Results

When the flashlight is turned on and then pointed at the glass which is in a glass filled with water, a rainbow appears from the corner of the glass. This can happen because the light coming from the flashlight is refracted by the water in the glass. Because light has wave properties, meaning that light travels in a straight line, then it can be refracted. Thus, a flashlight can also be used to make a rainbow as long as there is a medium that can refract it.

Conclusion

From the experiment of making a rainbow in a glass, it can be concluded that rainbows can occur due to refraction. Light that comes and propagates straight is deflected by the medium of water so that a rainbow beam forms through the surface of the glass.

3. Experiment Report on How to Make Soap from Aloe Vera

Objective

This experiment aims to understand how to make soap using aloe vera.

Tools and Materials Used

• Aloe vera to taste.
• deodorizer.
• Spoon.
• Knife.
• Enough water.
• Pan.
• Filter.

Experiment Steps

• Wash the aloe vera plant that has been prepared until it is completely clean, then cut it into small pieces.
• Squeeze the aloe vera pieces until they release the fibers.
• Add water and fragrance to taste, then stir until the mixture is evenly distributed.
• After the mixture expands, put it in the fridge or freezer.
• Once the mixture has solidified, the bar soap can be used.

Experiment Results

A mixture of aloe vera juice with water and fragrance hardens when cooled and the mixture forms a slippery and fragrant bar soap.

Conclusion

Soap, which is an important ingredient for cleanliness, can actually be made using natural ingredients such as aloe vera. Simply take the juice from the aloe vera by squeezing it, then mix it with water and fragrance according to taste.

4. Make Invisible Ink Experiment Report

Have you ever conveyed something confidential? If so, of course you don’t want other people to know the secret. The following is one way to convey something so that other people don’t know about it. This can be done using ink that cannot be seen by others. You can use this method to convey secret messages to your friends.

First of all, prepare the following tools and materials!

• Lemons.
• Water.
• Spoon.
• Bowl.
• Cotton swab.
• White paper.
• Light bulb.

After the tools and materials are ready, follow the steps below.

• Squeeze the lemon juice into a bowl and add a few drops of water!
• Stir the water and lemon juice with a spoon!
• Dip a cotton bud into the mixture and write a message on a white paper!
• Wait for the juice to dry until it’s invisible!
• To read a secret message that you wrote or want to show it to other people, you can do this by heating the paper held near the light bulb!

After going through the steps above, now you know how to make ink invisible. You can use this method to write something confidential. This invisible ink is a chemical reaction. Lemon juice is an organic compound that oxidizes and turns brown when heated. Diluting the lemon juice in water makes the writing difficult to see when you write messages on paper. Thus, no one was aware of the writing’s existence until it was heated and the secret message was revealed.

Other substances that can work in a similar way include orange juice, honey, milk, onion juice, vinegar, and wine. Invisible ink can also be made by using a chemical reaction or viewing certain liquids through ultraviolet (UV) light.

5. Simple Experiment Report on Making Tablecloths

Objective

Tablecloths are usually used to decorate tables and are very widely available in shops at fairly decent prices. However, have you ever thought about making your own tablecloth? You can actually make your own tablecloth at a relatively lower cost. The purpose of making this tablecloth is so that we can take advantage of used goods around us, so that they are more valuable and useful.

Tools and materials

• 2 meters patchwork.
• Needle and thread.
• Pencil, scissors and paper.
• Period.

Manufacturing Steps

• Make a sketch of the image first on paper using a compass with a diameter of 8 cm, then cut according to the compass pattern.
• Paste it on the patchwork, then trace the pattern and cut out the patchwork, repeat for up to 60 circles.
• Sew the edges then pull then on the rope, repeat for 60 rounds.
• The next step, line up one circle with another circle and then form a pattern like a tablecloth.
• After forming a pattern that you want, sew the circles one to another.
• After finishing forming the tablecloth, you can tidy up the seams to make it look more beautiful.

Results

Be a tablecloth with your own creations. Now you can put the tablecloth on the dining room table or it could be the living room table. You can develop it into a profitable business opportunity.

Conclusion

Making tablecloths is not that difficult, but you also have to be painstaking and tenacious in the process, so that your skills will continue to be honed and developed, at the same time you can save costs and can increase profits if you use it as a business opportunity.

6. Experiment Report Making Tapai

Objective

Indonesia has a lot of interesting foods, one of which is tapai ketan. Tapai ketan has a unique taste, which is a combination of sour and sweet taste. Making it is not difficult. The purpose of making sticky rice tapai is to determine the dosage between yeast and tapai, as well as to increase a sense of togetherness.

Necessary materials

Tool:

• Rice Cookers .
• Filter.
• Cardboard box.
• Spoon.
• cup.
• Newsprint.
• Look.
• snout.

Material:

• Glutinous rice.
• Yeast (4 grains).

Steps for Making Glutinous Tapai

• Wash the glutinous rice thoroughly.
• Once clean, soak overnight.
• After soaking, dry the glutinous rice.
• Then, cook glutinous rice with a rice cooker.
• Once cooked, put the sticky rice in the winnowing and let it cool down.
• Puree yeast tape.
• The refined yeast is immediately sprinkled on top of the cold sticky rice.
• Put the sticky rice into the cup and close it tightly.
• Place the cup into the cardboard.
• Store the cardboard for about 3 days.
• Tapai sticky rice is ready to be enjoyed.

Conclusion

From this fermentation, sticky rice tapai will be watery and have the right taste, between sour and sweet taste. If the tapai ketan doesn’t taste right, it’s usually caused by an insufficient amount of yeast or the wrong fermentation process.

7. Experiment Report on Making Salted Eggs

Objective

Eggs are a source of animal protein which tastes good and delicious, is easy to digest, and is highly nutritious. In addition, eggs are easy to obtain and cheap. Eggs consist of 13% protein, 12% fat, and vitamins and minerals. The highest value of the egg is in the yolk. Egg yolks contain amino acids that help accelerate muscle growth, as well as minerals such as iron, phosphorus, calcium and B complex vitamins. Therefore, preservation efforts are very important to maintain egg quality. The nutrients in eggs are very easy to digest and utilize.

Eggs are highly recommended for consumption by children, pregnant and lactating women, people who are sick, and the elderly. Storing eggs for a long time without preservation can reduce egg weight and egg whites to become runny. However, preserved eggs can extend their shelf life without reducing their nutritional content. One way of preservation that does not change the nutrition is salting. In making salted eggs, the eggs commonly used are duck eggs because they are larger in size than chicken eggs. Compared to chicken eggs, duck eggs have a more fishy smell.

Ingredients

• Good quality duck/quail/chicken eggs.
• Rub ash.
• Red brick powder.
• Kitchen salt.
• Clean water to taste.

Tools used

• Plastic bucket.
• An earthen pot or cauldron.
• Stove.
• Mixer.
• Jar or egg holder.

Ways of making

• Choose good quality eggs.
• Clean the eggs, then wipe thoroughly.
• Sand the entire surface.
• Make a dough consisting of a mixture of salt, ashes, red brick cement with a ratio of 1:2:1.
• Add enough water.
• Wrap the egg 1-2 mm thick.
• Store the eggs in a jar or other air-resistant container for 7–15 days.

Conclusion

• The taste produced between duck, chicken and quail eggs is different. Duck eggs are saltier than chicken eggs and quail eggs. Therefore, duck eggs are more widely used as a raw material for salted eggs because the process is faster, duck eggs are tougher, and taste better than chicken eggs and quail eggs. Why are duck eggs salted faster? When compared to chicken and quail eggs, duck eggs have larger pores. Therefore, the duck egg salting process is faster.
• Salted eggs are stable, they can be stored without experiencing the process of destruction.
• With salting, the fishy taste of the eggs will be reduced, not smell bad, and taste good.
• Salt provided. The higher the salt content, the longer the salted eggs will last, but the saltier the taste will be.

Also read:

Example of Observation Report Text – Sinaumed’s must be familiar with the text of the Observation Report or LHO in Indonesian, especially grade 10? Yep, material about the Text of Observation Reports is indeed mandatory material that must be studied because it refers to a text that contains general explanations about things that have been previously observed. Therefore, the average Indonesian teacher will definitely ask students to carry out an observation activity first, both inside and outside the classroom. There are many things that can be observed, from how the school environment looks to things that are visible around us.

After that, we have to write down information from things that have been observed in general. Since this text is a report text, the information conveyed must also be objective, right… So, how about an example of an Observation Report text that can actually be used to report things in all aspects of human life? So that Sinaumed’s isn’t confused, let’s look at the following review!

7+ Examples of Observation Report Texts in Indonesian and Their Structure

1. Example of Observation Report Text on Indonesian Typical Food

General Statement

Indonesian specialties are a reflection of the diversity of cultures and traditions of this archipelago which consists of 6,000 islands. In general, Indonesian food is rich in spices such as candlenut, chili, fingerroot, galangal, ginger, kencur, turmeric, coconut and palm sugar. These spices are used to give a distinctive aroma to Indonesian food.

Section Description

Several types of authentic Indonesian dishes can also be found in several countries, especially on the Asian continent. Popular Indonesian dishes such as satay, rendang and sambal are very popular in Malaysia and Singapore. There are also soy-based foods in this country, such as variations of tofu and tempeh. Tempe is considered a native Javanese invention, particularly the local adaptation of fermented soybeans. Another type of fermented soybean food is oncom. This food is similar to tempeh but uses a different type of mushroom. In West Java, oncom food is very popular.

Each region in Indonesia has different specialties. For example, the city of Jakarta is synonymous with egg crust, the city of Yogyakarta is synonymous with warm, while the city of Semarang is synonymous with spring rolls. Not only do these three cities have their own special food, on the northern tip of the island of Sumatra they also have their famous special food, namely Bika Ambon. Meanwhile, at the easternmost tip of Indonesia, to be precise, Papua is famous for its special food, namely Papeda, which is food made from sago.

Description of Benefits

Indonesian food can actually be used as an attraction for local and foreign tourists. In addition, this special food also functions as a form of Indonesian culture and becomes the identity of the Indonesian nation

2. Sample Text of Observation Report on Garbage

General Statement

Garbage is unwanted residual material after the end of a process. Waste can come from nature, humans, consumption, nuclear, industry and mining. Garbage on earth will continue to increase as long as there are activities carried out by both nature and humans. The waste produced in Indonesia even reaches 11,330 tons per day. Garbage can be distinguished based on the nature and shape. Based on its nature, waste is divided into two, namely organic and inorganic waste. Organic waste is waste that can be described or degradable .

Section Description

An example of organic waste is waste that decomposes easily such as food scraps, vegetables, dry leaves, and so on. This waste can be processed into compost.

Meanwhile, inorganic waste is waste that is not easily decomposed or undegradable. An example of inorganic waste is waste that does not decompose easily, such as plastic, wood, glass, cans, and so on. This inorganic waste can be recycled by home industries to reduce the amount of waste and serve as a business opportunity.

Based on its form, waste can be divided into solid, liquid, natural, consumption, human and radioactive waste. Solid waste is waste that is solid, so most inorganic waste is also included. Solid waste can be in the form of household waste: kitchen waste, garden waste, plastic, metal, glass and others. This type of waste can be distinguished based on its ability to be decomposed by nature or biodegradability into biodegradable solid waste (waste that can be broken down by biological processes) and non- biodegradable solid waste (cannot be broken down by a biological process. There are two types of non-biodegradable solid waste, namely recyclable (reprocessable) and non-recyclable(cannot be processed again).

Liquid waste is liquid material that has been used and is no longer needed, such as waste. Waste is liquid waste generated from industrial activities. Waste can be divided into two, namely black waste and household waste. Black waste is liquid waste containing harmful pathogens originating from toilets, while household waste is liquid waste produced from kitchens, bathrooms and laundry facilities.

Natural waste is waste produced by nature and decomposed through a natural recycling process. An example of natural waste is dry leaves in the forest that decompose into soil. Human waste is a term used for the results of human digestion, such as faeces and urine. Human waste can have a negative impact on human health because it can be said to be a vehicle for the development of diseases caused by viruses and bacteria.

Consumption waste is waste generated by human consumption activities and disposed of in the trash. Until now, the amount of consumption waste does not exceed the amount of industrial waste. Radioactive waste is nuclear waste which is the result of nuclear fusion and nuclear fission which produces uranium and thorium. Radioactive waste is harmful to the environment and human life because it produces radiation which has a negative impact on human health. Therefore nuclear waste is stored in places that do not have high potential.

Description of Benefits

Even though there are various types and amounts of waste around us, it turns out that all of it can be used for other things. Apart from being used as compost to fertilize plants, this waste can also be used as a handicraft or as the main ingredient for biogas and electricity resources. If you want to make it as a handicraft, it must go through the recycling process first.

3. Sample Text of Observation Report on Cattle

General Statement

Cows are classified as mammals or animals that suckle. This cow, which has the Latin name Bos Taurus, belongs to the Kingdom Animalia, which is a plant-eating cow. Meanwhile, fire or oxen are livestock members of the Bovidae tribe and children of the Bovinae tribe.

Section Description

Newborn cows weigh up to 25-45 kg. But as adults, their weight can reach an average of 1.090 kg. The weight also depends on the type or race. The average age of a cow can reach 15 years.

Cattle are kept mainly for the use of milk and meat as human food. By-products, such as skin, offal, and horns are also used for various human needs.

Description of Benefits

In a number of places, cattle are also used as a driving force for transportation, land processing (plows), and other industrial tools (such as sugarcane crushers). Due to its many benefits, cows have been part of various human cultures for a long time.

Beef (English: beef ) is meat obtained from ordinary cows and used for consumption purposes. The use of this meat also varies, depending on the processing method. Examples of ribs and T-Bone are very commonly used in Europe and in the United States as ingredients for steaks so that they are widely traded. Meanwhile, in Indonesia and in various other Asian countries, this meat is widely used for spicy and coconut milk dishes such as konro soup and rendang.

4. Sample Text of Observation Reports About Learning in the Covid-19 Period

General Statement

Currently, the world of education is facing quite difficult problems, one of which is the 2013 curriculum that has not been fully understood. In addition, the concept of the new Minister of Education, Nadiem Makarim, regarding Indonesia’s Freedom to Learn. Then, there was a simplified curriculum in an emergency situation. This also makes the teachers more nervous about the learning that will be given to students. These problems are a challenge for teachers to improve the quality of education in Indonesia.

Now, the challenges for teachers are increasing again with the ongoing COVID-19 (Coronavirus Disease 2019) outbreak. COVID-19 is a national disaster that has been declared by the government because the virus spreads very quickly and causes death. The government is trying to inhibit the spread of COVID-19 by urging people to practice physical distancing and work/ study/ worship from home.

This situation is new for the community, especially teachers, parents and students. Here teachers are required to continue to be able to provide learning to students through online . In fact, these teachers are divided into three groups, namely IT literate teachers, IT alliterate teachers, and IT literate teachers.

Section Description

First, IT literate teachers are teachers who are able to know various forms of media and ethics in utilizing technology for learning. Ability to understand technology for printing, presenting, and accessing the internet. Of course, these teachers are used to teaching their students to use internet media. Online learning for them is nothing extraordinary.

Second, IT literate teachers are teachers who know IT and understand IT, but rarely or do not use technology in teaching students. These teachers are only fixated on learning in the classroom. The use of the internet is almost rare.

Third, literate IT teachers are IT illiterate teachers. The teacher is unable to utilize technology in learning. These teachers still use old-fashioned methods and media. They don’t use technology at all. It is possible that the facilities and infrastructure do not exist.

These three groups of teachers are the reality on the ground. These teachers will face the students. From this condition, the impact of education is felt, not only in Indonesia, but also throughout the world.

The world of education, the United Nations educational, scientific and cultural organization Unesco said that nearly 300 million students around the world had their schools disrupted and their rights to education in the future were threatened. In fact, even in Indonesia, the Ministry of Education and Culture has decided to cancel the 2020 National Examination, so that learning is carried out at home.

Description of Benefits

The teachers were asked to make lesson plans. It is not an easy thing to change habits from teaching in front of the class to teaching virtually. Not only teachers who have to adapt to this condition, but parents and students also have to adapt. Parents must be prepared to accompany their children to study at home.

At first it will be fun for certain students, but over time it gets boring. Parents start to bother accompanying their children because they also have other activities related to these activities. Learning is no longer fun for students, but on the contrary, they are bored and bored. They miss school.

However, the benefits of this pandemic can be taken, namely the readiness of teachers in any conditions and the creativity of teachers in teaching students. Teachers are expected not only to give assignments and assignments to students so that it makes them stressed. The teacher must also be able to change his habits in teaching.

Teachers must be accustomed to starting teaching from the new process then the content. This requires training of teachers. In addition, teachers must be ready to open themselves to technological advances for the benefit and progress of students and education in Indonesia.

5. Example of Observation Report Text about Rabbits

General Statement

The rabbit is one of the mammals from the Leporidae family . These rabbits can be found easily in various regions on earth. In the past, the rabbit itself was a very wild animal that lived in Africa to parts of Europe. Until now, in general, rabbits themselves are divided into two, namely wild or free rabbits, and domestic rabbits.

Section Description

If you look physically, especially on the fur, rabbits can be divided into 2 types, namely rabbits with long hair and rabbits with short hair. Meanwhile, according to the order, rabbits are classified into several types, namely Lyon , Angora , American, English, Himalayan , and Dutch .

Description of Benefits

Meanwhile, food for rabbits is identical to eating carrot vegetables. However, after observing, the fact is that rabbits can also be fed green vegetables, seeds, tubers and tofu dregs. After research too, rabbit meat itself can be used as a drug that can cure asthma.

6. Example of Observation Report Text about Ciplukan Fruit

General Statement

Ciplukan or in Latin physalis angulata is a low shrub plant that has many health benefits. This plant is usually considered a wild plant because it grows in gardens, fields, roadsides, bushes, or forests. This fruit is also known as morel berry in England, ciplukan in Java, cecendet in Sundanese, keceplokan in Bali, and leletokan in Minahasa.

Section Description

The ciplukan plant has a complete tree structure, consisting of roots, stems, leaves and fruit. The ciplukan root is a taproot which will then grow branch roots into fibrous roots. The ciplukan leaf is a single-stemmed leaf and is oval or elongated round with a tapered tip. The stem of this plant can reach 1 meter with a round, grooved shape and brownish color. The ciplukan fruit is shaped like an egg wrapped in inflated petals.

Description of Benefits

Ciplukan is believed to cure various diseases. All parts of ciplukan can treat high blood pressure, cholesterol, and rheumatism. The root of this plant is efficacious for treating diabetes mellitus. The fruit is efficacious for treating lung disease, sore throat, and stroke. Meanwhile, ciplukan leaves can treat tumors and cancer.

Ciplukan plants have a high selling value. It is present in major fruit stores, supermarkets and sold online. One pack of 100 grams is valued at IDR 30,000. The selling price per kilogram ranges from IDR 250-500 thousand. Truly extraordinary.

7. Sample Text of Observation Reports on Bottlenose Dolphins

General Statement

The Bottlenose Dolphin ( Tursiops truncatus ) or Bottlenose Dolphin is a marine mammal that belongs to the Cetacean nation which can live up to 40-50 years.

Section Description

The shape of the dolphin’s head allows it to resist or fight against the water currents so that its body can move easily in the water. Dolphins have large, slender snouts and no external ears. The small hole behind the eye serves as the inner ear. The duct from the hole is filled with secretory oil. Dolphins have very good hearing, the sound frequency that can be captured by dolphins reaches 150 KHz.

Using a breathing apparatus in the form of lungs, dolphins must often rise to the surface to breathe air. In general, dolphins rise to the surface every 1-2 times every minute. Dolphins breathe through blowholes , which are nostrils that are located on top of their heads. In less than a fifth of a second, the dolphin has emptied and refilled its lungs. Dolphins will sink and dive back into the sea when the air comes out of the blowhole .

Description of Benefits

Dolphin skin is soft and supple. There is a layer of fat ( blubber ) under the skin which functions to keep the dolphin’s body warm. In addition, blubber also serves as a food reserve. The dolphin’s buoyancy is also helped by the presence of blubber which is lighter than water. This inspired sportswear manufacturers to create swimwear with dolphin-like characteristics

8. Example of Observation Report Text about Fireflies

General Statement

Fireflies are a type of insect that can emit a clear light that can be seen at night. This light is produced by “cold light” which contains neither ultraviolet nor infrared light. There are more than 2000 species of fireflies scattered in tropical areas around the world.

Section Description

The habitat of fireflies is in damp places, such as swamps and areas filled with trees. Fireflies lay their eggs when it is dark, their eggs numbering between 100 and 500 eggs are laid on the ground, branches, grass, in moss or under leaves. Graves with relatively loose soil and not much disturbance are ideal firefly nesting locations. In general, fireflies come out at night, but there are also fireflies that are active during the day. Those who come out during the day generally don’t give off light.

Like the characteristics of insects in general, the body of a firefly is divided into three parts: head, thorax and abdomen. Insects have a hard shell ( exoskeleton ) to cover their bodies. Body length is about 2 cm. The body parts of fireflies are almost entirely dark in color and have red dots on the head cover. Yellow on the wing coverts, six-legged, and compound eyes.

Description of Benefits

The light emitted by fireflies is harmless, in fact it does not contain ultraviolet and infrared. This light is used by fireflies to warn predators that fireflies are not good to eat and to attract mates. The skill of showing light is not only possessed by adult fireflies, even larvae.

Fireflies are one of the unique types of insects, proof of the greatness of the Creator. The species of fireflies is also a wealth that is bestowed upon our country as a tropical country.

9. Sample Text of Observation Report on Mangosteen Fruit

General Statement

Mangosteen ( Garcinia mangostana L. ) is a fruit plant native to Indonesia. Mangosteen is a kind of evergreen tree from the tropics which is believed to have originated from the Indonesian Archipelago. The fruit of the mangosteen tree is also called mangosteen. Mangosteen is related to kokam, kandis acid and gelugur acid. Mangosteen holds a variety of extraordinary benefits for health or commonly referred to as functional food.

Section Description

The mangosteen tree and leaves are distinctive. The average height of the mangosteen tree reaches 6-25 m. Mangosteen has dense (lush) leaves, sitting opposite leaves, and short petioles. Mangosteen leaves are thick and wide. Mangosteen also has special characteristics in its flowers. The mangosteen flower is called a two-house flower.

On the mangosteen tree, female flowers are found, while male flowers are not fully developed. Male flowers grow small and then dry up and can no longer function. Therefore, the mangosteen fruit is produced without pollination. Mangosteen flowers include flowers alone or in pairs at the ends of branches, with handles, and are short and thick. Mangosteen flowers are 5.5 cm in diameter. Two pairs of petals, two pairs of corolla, thick and fleshy, green – yellow with a reddish edge. Pseudo stamens and usually numerous.

Description of Benefits

Mangosteen fruit has several benefits. Among the traditional people themselves, the mangosteen fruit is believed to be able to cure several diseases such as mouth sores, dysentery, tonsillitis, abscesses, with anti-inflammatory or anti-inflammatory properties. The results of scientific research state that the skin of the mangosteen fruit is very rich in antioxidants, especially xanthones , tannins, phenolic acids and anthocyanins.

Mangosteen is a typical native Indonesian fruit. In addition to a sweet taste and an unsightly appearance, the mangosteen fruit also has many health benefits.

Also Read!

• Persuasive Text Structure Along With Its Characteristics and Examples
• Understanding What Is 5W 1H In The News Text
• 50+ Examples of Nouns and Their Definitions and Types
• Definition, Characteristics, and Structure of Fantasy Stories
• Knowing What Connotations and Other Types of Meaning are
• Definition, characteristics, types, and examples of interrogative sentences
• 60 Examples of Adjective Phrases and Explanations

Elements of Management – Talking about management maybe what you think is about the business world or maybe the office world. This is indeed true, where management is always applied in the world of offices or the business world.

However, management doesn’t just stop there. In our daily life the existence of management is also very necessary, you know . Simply put, management is a person’s ability to be able to manage everything well, both for himself and within a certain group.

Well, given the importance of management skills in this life. Of course, you also have to know management in more depth. Relax, you don’t need to be confused if you don’t really know what management is.

Because, in this article will be explained more broadly about management. Starting from understanding, elements of management to all matters related to management.

Definition of Management

The first thing that we will discuss together is about the meaning of management itself. Previously, it was explained briefly what management is. However, this point will be explained more broadly so that we also know what management means.

Management is a process in which an individual is able to manage everything he does for himself or for a particular group. Where management is also very necessary so that it can more easily achieve goals or targets from himself or the group cooperatively by utilizing available resources.

From this explanation, the science of management can be interpreted as the ability to organize something so that the goals to be achieved can be more easily fulfilled. In everyday life everyone has applied the science of management. However, maybe they are not aware that the routine they do contains management knowledge.

The word management comes from the English language, namely manage, which if interpreted is to organize, plan, manage, strive for, and lead. Meanwhile, etymologically, management can be interpreted as an art of organizing and implementing.

In addition, management can also be interpreted as a form of planning, coordinating and also managing existing resources in order to achieve goals more effectively and efficiently. Where when someone applies management science it is expected to be able to do something that can be completed on time without anything being wasted in it.

Definition of Management According to Experts

If previously we have learned together about the meaning of management in general. Next, we will learn about the meaning of management according to some experts. The reason is, there are some experts who argue related to the notion of management itself.

Below are the opinions of some experts on management.

1. Mary Parker Follet

Mary Parker Follet explained that management is an art in completing tasks through intermediaries. In this case, management can also be interpreted as an activity that will be carried out by a manager to be able to direct subordinates or other people in completing work in order to achieve real goals.

2.George Robert Terry

George Robert Terry argues that management is a distinctive process of various kinds of actions such as planning, organizing, moving to controlling. Where basically all of these actions have the goal of achieving a target by utilizing the available resources.

3. Ricky W. Griffin

Ricky W. Griffin explained that management is a process of planning, organization, coordination and control of resources in order to achieve goals more effectively and efficiently. Where the meaning of effective here is when the goals are able to be achieved in accordance with the plan and to be efficient means if management will be carried out carefully, organized and on time.

4. Lawrence A. Appley

Lawrence A. Appley has an opinion about management as a skill in arousing other people to be willing to do something. It will not only be owned by an individual. But management expertise is also very much needed in an organization or certain groups.

5. Hillman

Hilman argues that management is a function that is needed to achieve targets through intermediaries and also requires supervision. If you do this, then the goals will be more easily achieved together.

So, those are some opinions from experts about management. Every opinion about management as above is not far from trying to be able to achieve a goal by managing and also supervising.

Elements of Management

After we all know what is the meaning of management. Next, we will study together about the elements of management. Implementation of management can run well if some of these elements are met.

So what are the elements of management? Here is a full explanation.

1. Man or Man

The first element of management is human. The position of humans in the management element is the most important. Apart from that, in the operating system, the human element is also quite crucial.

In this case, humans are a resource that is very necessary to lead, mobilize employees or subordinates and mobilize energy and mind for the sustainability of an institution. In short, human management is needed to be able to get maximum work results, create a healthy and conducive work environment and also create various innovative ideas.

2. Material or Ingredients

Next, there is the material element in management. This material or material element is the raw material needed in carrying out a business process. When the availability of raw materials is not properly available or access to obtain raw materials is very difficult, it can automatically result in a decrease in the performance of the production process.

This condition will also affect the business processes that you are running in the short and long term. Therefore, the raw materials used in business must be strictly selected in order to obtain the best quality.

In addition, when used, raw materials can be used as effectively as possible, so that no raw materials are wasted. Then, during the process of purchasing raw materials, it must also be adjusted to business needs and the budget that has been planned from the start. It is important for business people to be able to get quality raw materials that also have affordable prices.

3. Machine or machine

The machine is also one of the management elements that is so important. Machines can be interpreted as equipment used by an institution or agency. Where the machine can provide support for the smooth process towards the goals desired by the company or a business that is being carried out.

The existence of the machine will also make raw materials to be processed to become a product with high quality. That means, machines can speed up and simplify a job so that the business being run will be more efficient in terms of time, money and energy.

Therefore, in the process of buying and using the machine here, it must also be designed effectively. This also includes getting a machine with decent conditions but at a low price and can provide the best production performance.

In order for the machine to last longer and not be easily damaged, it must be used effectively and as well as possible.

4. Money or Money

Next, there is money which is also an element of management. In this case, money can be interpreted as an important element that underlies all business activities such as management activities in order to achieve the desired goals.

All work processes that will take place will require money. For example, such as buying equipment, supplies and other things needed for a business or company.

Therefore, money must also be managed and budgeted more wisely and carefully so that sustainable management can remain more optimal. Usually, the process of purchasing materials or raw materials will get affordable prices when the payment system is made in cash.

Not only that, when buying goods in large quantities it is not uncommon for sellers or vendors to cooperate with them to give discounts.

5. Method or method

Methods are also a part of management elements. The method itself is a management element that will be used to regulate the process of carrying out activity procedures. The existence of a method in business activities will really help all the necessary processes.

In addition, the method can also make processes in business activities more efficient. By using a method that has been created in accordance with each division in a company, employees will become like specialists and it will be easier to distribute them.

Methods must also be applied properly, effectively and standardized in order to get satisfactory work results and in accordance with the desired goals.

6. Market or Market

Market or market is the next element of management. Just like other management elements, market elements are so important, especially for a company or an ongoing business.

This is none other than because basically a market or market is a place or an area that is often visited by many people. In contrast to other elements that can stand alone, specifically for the market element it is still divided into several parts.

Starting from the planning, organizing, controlling, implementing programs, policies, strategies, to marketing techniques that can be used to create demand related to product and service offerings.

The existence of a market can cause products that have been produced to be sold and can find out the advantages and disadvantages of these products. In this case, of course, producers can improve or maintain existing quality. In addition, the specific strategy used can also cause the product to spread more quickly and widely to be liked by consumers.

7. Minutes or Time

Finally, there is the element of time which is the most valuable asset which also requires prominence from the management planning process. In a business, you have to be able to calculate time as effectively as possible.

For example, how long does it take to introduce a product to the market? Then, you also have to know how resistant the business you are running can survive the competition? Therefore, it is so important to make the best use of time.

Those are some elements of management that are so important to be able to make management work and function better. So, always pay attention to all the elements above when you want to make a management.

Management Function

As explained earlier that management is an ability to be able to manage everything for individuals and for a group. Of course, the existence of management also has several functions of its own.

So, for more details related to some of the functions possessed by management, here is a full explanation.

1. Planning or Planning

The first management function is planning. Where management is needed to be able to facilitate the process of preparing plans and strategies when starting a business or activity.

As for planning, it can be interpreted as determining what will be done first. In making a plan it will also contain several elements such as what, why, where, when, who , and how . In addition, a plan must contain a strategy that will be formulated to achieve the goal.

2. Organizing or Organizing

Furthermore, management also has an organizing function. Organizing is a function that basically aims to divide tasks according to their abilities.

The existence of organizing is also considered important in managing a group or organization. Within an organization or company there will be tasks that are divided according to their respective positions.

For example, the duties for directors, managers, staff, and members will definitely be made differently according to their respective abilities. Then, later on those who have got the task must take full responsibility.

3. Directing, Actuating or Actuating

Next, there is the directing function which is also needed after the task is completed to be divided between individuals and groups according to their respective fields. This direction is needed in order to achieve the goals to be achieved better and is expected to be able to minimize the risk of hampering a plan.

Then, the steps that need to be carried out in this function are such as guiding, consulting related to assignments and providing motivation.

4. Monitoring and Evaluation or Controlling

Finally, management has an evaluation function. This management function is used to assess the work that has been done. Evaluation is indeed needed in order to be able to control the progress of the plans that have been prepared previously. In addition, evaluation can also be used to assess whether a change in strategy is necessary or not.

Meanwhile, the supervisory function is very necessary so that the work carried out can more easily achieve the goals of the company, supervisory measures will usually be used to prevent irregularities. In addition, an organization or company really needs one of these management functions. This is none other than so that the goals of the organization or company can be more easily achieved effectively and properly.

So, those are some of the functions of management that you can read in full.

Type of Management Science

The existence of management is one of the activities that is so important to always be applied in a field. In addition, the types of management knowledge are also quite diverse. Several types of management science are strategic management, administration, organization, marketing management , production, time, human resources, risk, and other types.

That’s a summary of management, starting from the understanding, elements of management, functions and types of management knowledge, you can read in full here. Hopefully the discussion in this article can provide benefits as well as add insight to Sinaumed’s.

Poems for Education – Of course, everyone often hears rhymes. The use of pantun can be used for various purposes, ranging from entertainment to invitations to use something or buy goods and services. The pantun itself consists of various themes, one of the rhyme themes that will always be embedded in everyday life is education.

With the theme of education, his name became better known as educational rhymes. Then, what exactly is meant by educational rhymes and what are some examples? Don’t worry, Sinaumed’s, this article will discuss more about educational rhymes along with examples. So, see this article until it’s finished.

Meaning of Pantun

Before discussing educational rhymes, we will discuss the meaning of rhymes first. In general, pantun is a type of old poetry in which each stanza consists of 4 (four) lines. Meanwhile, according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) the term pantun is a form of Indonesian or Malay poetry in which each stanza (couplet) generally consists of 4 (four) lines with rhyme abab, each array generally consists of 4 (four) words, lines the first and second are generally used for sampiran (pedestal), and the third and fourth lines are used for content.

In Javanese, the term pantun is known as parikan. Meanwhile, in Sundanese, the term pantun is known as paparikan. The pantun itself contains a creative and critical idea, and has a solid meaning. In ancient times, rhymes were oral literature, but now you can find rhymes in written form.

Then over time, pantun has begun to develop as a medium for telling messages by using play on words. However, the other side of the creation is not free. This is because in making a rhyme bound by certain rules.

That is why you need to understand in depth about rhymes, starting from the characteristics of rhymes, their types, to examples.

Understanding Pantun According to Experts

Here are some definitions of pantun according to experts, including:

1. Herman Waluyo

According to Herman Waluyo, pantun is a type of original Malay poetry that has long been rooted in the culture of society.

2. Caswan and Rita

Kaswan and Rita said that pantun is one of the types of Malay poetry in which there is 1 (one) stanza which includes 4 (four) lines with abab rhymes. The first and second arrays are called sampiran names, while the third and fourth arrays are called contents names.

3. Alijahbana

According to Alisjahbana, pantun is one of the old types of poetry that was commonly known by the ancients or very well known in the old community. This pantun has the characteristics of each stanza consisting of 4 (four) lines, each line covering 4 to 6 words or 8 to 12 syllables. The first and second lines are called sampiran, while the third and fourth lines are called contents.

4. RO Winsted

According to RO Winsted, he stated that rhymes are not limited to sentences that have rhyme and rhythm. However, pantun is a beautiful series of words to describe the warmth of love, affection, longing, and hate from the speakers.

5. Sunarti

Sunarti stated that pantun is a type of old poetry which has its own beauty in terms of language. One of the beauties of the language in the rhyme is marked by rhymes abab.

Poem Elements

Pantun actually has 2 (two) elements. What are they? Let’s pay attention to the discussion below.

1. Intrinsic Elements

The intrinsic element of the poem is an element that comes from the structure of the poem itself. Intrinsic elements in poetry consist of characters, themes, messages, settings which include place, time, atmosphere, plot or plot, and so on. The characteristic of the pantun from this intrinsic element is rhyme. Where, rhymes in rhymes have the same ending, so that they can be a special attraction for listeners.

For example,

Pak mamat went fishing
Fishing with the cat
Very dizzy head
Want to eat no plate

2. Extrinsic Elements

Meanwhile, extrinsic pantun elements are elements that come from outside the pantun structure. This extrinsic element is usually referred to as the background or a condition that causes the formation of rhymes.

The extrinsic element becomes a very important part in determining the content of the rhyme. In addition, this element serves as a reinforcement of the intrinsic elements or the structure of the poem itself.

Pantun Features

Because it is included in the category of old poetry, the pantun has bound rules in its creation. The characteristics of this poem consist of:

1. Includes Four Lines in Each Verse

Pantun has a strong characteristic, that is, each stanza consists of four lines. Where, the line of words in a rhyme is known as an array. Each line includes 8 to 12 words.

2. Has a Pattern

The characteristic of pantun that is easy to recognize is the pattern. There are 2 (two) patterns that generally exist in rhymes, namely the abab pattern and the aaaa pattern.

3. Have Cover and Content

In a rhyme consists of 2 (two) parts, namely sampiran and content. The first two lines are called sampiran. Where, this sampiran generally has nothing to do with the second part which conveys the intent, or to convey the rhyme of the poem. Meanwhile, the third and fourth lines contain the message and the main meaning of a rhyme.

4. No Author Name

In a pantun there is no author’s name, different from poetry or other literary works. This is because in ancient times the spread of rhymes was done orally.

Pantun Structure

Pantun has a structure consisting of stanzas, lines, words, syllables, rhymes, sampiran, and content. In order to know more clearly about the structure of the pantun, let’s pay attention to the following discussion.

1. The stanza

The stanza is the number of lines contained in a poem. For example, two lines, four lines, eight lines, and so on.

2. Row or Array

A line or array is a collection of a number of words that have meaning and can form a sampiran or content in a rhyme.

3. Word

Words are a combination of syllables that have meaning. Even so, there are certain words that only consist of one syllable.

4. Syllables

Syllables are sound fragments of words in one beat or one breath.

5. Rhyme

Rima is the pattern of endings and last vowels contained in a rhyme.

6. Sampling

Sampiran is part of the rhyme which is in the first and second lines. This sampiran is the beginning of an element of atmosphere that conveys the content and intent of the rhyme.

7. Contents

The content is the part in the rhyme which is located in the third and fourth lines. This content becomes the main part and the purpose of the poem.

The Role and Function of Pantun

A rhyme has a role and function contained in it. Then, what are the roles and functions? Let’s get to know the role and function of pantun.

• Pantun was created as a language maintenance tool.
• If, someone still uses rhymes, it means that someone has tried to maintain the function of the word and is able to maintain the flow of thought. Even though it is used to give advice, someone with rhymes will determine the words right before speaking.
• Pantun will train someone to think about the meaning to be conveyed in the form of words that are packaged properly before expressing it to someone they are addressing. He did it so it wouldn’t hurt.
• Someone who wants to rhyme will be trained to think associatively. Someone will be more careful in choosing a word because the word he chooses has something to do with other words.
• In terms of association, rhymes have a fairly strong function, so rhymes will always be pleasant to play in communicating. Writing rhymes is not easy because one needs to think beforehand so that what is conveyed remains within the corridors of the rhyme.
• Pantun shows a person’s speed in thinking and playing with words. Although, in general, the social role in pantun is a reinforcing tool for conveying messages.
• The role of this pantun itself is as a guard and cultural media to introduce and ensure that the values ​​of society will always be there, why is that? This is because the true philosophy of pantun is the beginning of the birth of close social values. The philosophy of pantun that is very attached is to abstain from chanting.

Where abstinence from chanting implies that rhymes are familiar with social values ​​so that they are not just imagination. In parts of the archipelago, for example the area of ​​West Sumatra which is commonly used in various traditional events.

Types of Pantun

Pantun has quite a lot of types. Here are some types of rhymes, including:

1. Pantun Advice

Pantun Advice is a type of rhyme in which it is used to convey moral messages, policies, and invitations to do good.

2. Limerick

Limerick rhyme is a rhyme that is made for entertainment purposes or satirize each other. Certainly in an atmosphere of familiarity so as to create a cheerful atmosphere.

3. Rhyme Riddles

Pantun riddles are a type of pantun which has the characteristic of including a question sentence in the last line of the pantun

4. Pantun Cinta

As the name implies, love rhymes contain messages related to love, romance, longing, and others.

5. Religious Pantun

Religious rhymes are similar to rhymes for advice, but religious rhymes provide moral messages related to humans and their creators.

6. Pantun Proverbs

Proverb rhyme is a rhyme in which there are proverb sentences with a fixed arrangement.

7. Figurative rhyme

Figurative rhymes are rhymes that convey messages implicitly or using figurative sentences.

Education Pantun

Educational rhymes are a type of rhyme that is often used especially as a teaching medium or to convey messages to students and students. Educational rhymes can also be interpreted as a type of poem that contains moral messages and motivation for learning in the form of education. The types of educational rhymes are very diverse.

Even so, not all types of educational rhymes have a school background as their context. But in general this pantun alludes to various educational themes. The purpose of educational rhymes is to provide motivation to learn to struggle and foster enthusiasm for learning.

It feels incomplete if you only discuss the meaning of educational rhymes, but don’t discuss examples. In the following discussion, we will discuss examples of educational rhymes.

Examples of Education Poems

Pantun has a very diverse type. One of them is educational poetry. Here are some examples of educational rhymes and their meanings that you can use as a reference to keep your enthusiasm for learning.

1. Example of Missing School Education Rhyme

Sweet words are only on the lips
But always keep the trust
Hopefully the pandemic will end soon
We miss school

Its meaning is that during the current Covid-19 pandemic, all activities or activities are limited. Well, one of them is teaching and learning activities in schools. Therefore, this rhyme is made with the hope that the covid-19 pandemic can end soon and students can return to school together in good health.

2. Examples of Learning Education Poems

No money in hand
Because rich is not always wealth
Your life and death is God’s destiny
Must learn until old.

Its meaning is that the life and death of all human beings is destiny and the will of God Almighty. So, no matter how difficult it is for you to struggle, if indeed God wills something else, of course it will be different. However, on the contrary, even if he doesn’t try and God wills otherwise, he will be lucky.

Even so, learning is the main key that must be carried out until old age and there are no restrictions on learning at any time. Because by learning, it can become your provision for the future.

3. Examples of School Assignment Education Poems

Dusk appears in the red sky.
It’s dark on the north side.
Be diligent in doing school work.
Excitement will surely burn

The meaning is that the student’s most important task is to study and study. One of the things that must be done and also cannot be abandoned is doing assignments from school. By diligently doing assignments from school, of course anyone will have a high and burning enthusiasm for learning.

4. Examples of Diligent Learning Education Poems

Turn on the motorbike until it vibrates.
Legs get sore wounds.
If you study hard,
you can achieve future success

The meaning is that future success can be from various aspects that you must fulfill. However, one important and main thing is to study hard. If someone is diligent in studying, then they can easily achieve that success. Because you encounter many problems and solutions you can make provision for in the future.

5. Examples of Education Demanding Knowledge Poems

Stomach hurts drinking herbal medicine
Until buying type two
Must continue to study knowledge
As a provision in old age

The meaning is that there are various things that can be done and are useful for provision in old age, one of which is studying. Through learning, of course you will get a lot of experience. So that by always learning for life, you will have complete and useful provisions in old age.

6. Examples of Diligent Reading Education Poems

There is a monkey mirror in the mirror
There is a horse like a soybean
Diligent in writing and reading
That is the sign of a smart child

This means that everyone’s intelligence is different. Some are smart because they are used to studying diligently, some are smart because their abilities are above average. One of the indicators of people who are smart or not you can see from diligent reading and writing.

7. Examples of Education Poetry for the Spirit of Learning

Take a walk on a horse
Hungry horse off the saddle
Old age can’t be young anymore
But the enthusiasm for learning is still vibrant

The meaning is that even though you are old, the enthusiasm for learning must remain enthusiastic because learning at an old age is not a reason to stop learning. Precisely in old age you study diligently, so you can hone and train your memory so you don’t become idle and stop thinking.

Educational Pantun Book Recommendations

Here is a book about rhymes that will make you understand more about educational rhymes:

1. A Complete Collection of Proverbs, Pantun, and Figure of speech

In Indonesian literature, it cannot be separated from proverbs, rhymes, and figures of speech. These three things can beautify a literary work. The complete collection of proverbs, rhymes, and figure of speech can be used as a reference in creating aesthetic literary works.

2. Super Complete Proverbs Plus Poetry and Pantun

For elementary school children, proverbs, poetry, and rhymes must be included in the Indonesian language course. For parents who want to find complete proverbs, poetry and rhymes, the book Super Complete Indonesian Proverbs Plus Poetry and Pantun is the answer.

3. Super Complete Book of Indonesian Proverbs and Poems

Want to find a complete book on Indonesian proverbs and rhymes? The Super Complete Book of Indonesian Proverbs and Pantun is perfect for students who want to know more about Indonesian proverbs and rhymes.

This is information related to rhymes, especially educational rhymes and examples of educational rhymes. Hopefully the above information can be an insightful knowledge for readers.

Various Forms of Economic Systems – The economic system as rules and procedures that govern people’s behavior in economic activities. Every country has its own form of economy. And, every economic system used is influenced by various factors, ranging from ideology to economic structure. Check out a more complete explanation of the following economic system:

Definition of Economic System

The economic system is all the procedures used in coordinating people’s behavior including producers, consumers, government, banks and others in carrying out economic activities both in terms of production, distribution, consumption and investment which in an integrated manner form a unified whole, orderly and dynamic so that they are able to avoid chaos in the economic field.

McEachern himself defines the economic system as a set of mechanisms and institutions to answer questions about what, how, and for whom goods and services are produced. The economic system can also be understood as a tool used by a country to manage economic factors and allocate its resources through economic units and institutions in order to avoid chaos in the economic field.

In a country the existence of an economic system is very important because it functions as a driving force for the production system. In addition, the economic system also functions to create a mechanism so that the process of distribution of goods and services runs well. In other words, without a good economic system, economic growth can also be maintained properly.

Indonesia, which is a country where the majority of its people are Muslims, can make a book entitled Islamic Economic System from Dr. Muhammad Sharif Chaudry, MA, LL.M. as a reference.

Understanding of the Economic System According to Experts

Here are some definitions of the economic system according to experts:

1. Dumairy (1966)

The economic system is a system that regulates economic relations between humans and institutional formation in an order of life. The economic system does not have to stand alone, but is related to the views, patterns and philosophy of life. He is also the one who regulates and establishes economic relations between humans with a set of institutions in a resilience.

2. Gilarso (1992)

The economic system is a method used to coordinate the behavior of the entire community in carrying out economic activities, be it production, distribution, consumption, investment, and so on so that it becomes an orderly and dynamic unit, which can also avoid chaos.

3.Mc. Eachern

An economic system can be defined as a set of mechanisms and institutions that answer the questions what, how, and for whom goods and services are produced.

4. Chester A Bemand

The economic system as an integrated unit in which there are parts and each; it has its own characteristics and limits.

5. Gregory Grossman and M. Manu

The economic system is a set of units, agents and economic institutions that are not only interconnected and interact but also influence each other to a certain degree.

6. M. Hatta

A good economic system must be based on the principle of kinship.

7. L. James Havery

The economic system as a logical and rational procedure to be able to design a series of components that are interconnected with one another, with the aim of achieving a predetermined unity and purpose.

Types of Economic Systems

1. Traditional Economic System

The traditional economic system is the most conventional system with two main elements in it, namely respect for tradition and the minimum amount of waste produced. The traditional economic system itself is identically applied in rural communities with economic results in the form of agriculture.

The transaction method used was by exchanging goods because the results of nature and human labor were the main assets in society at that time. In the traditional economic system, the government is not directly involved in economic activities, it only acts as a guardian of order. The main objective of this economic system itself is only to fulfill the daily needs of the people, not to seek profit.

Economic activity is still related to tradition and culture. The production method used is still very simple and does not have a work structure, nor does it use centralized facilities, technology and things that are symbols of progress.

Each member of the traditional economy has a special role so that each member has a close relationship. If conventional business people use this economic system, then they must try to keep their business from stagnating or running in place, here are some of the advantages of the traditional economic system:

Advantages of the Traditional Economic System:

• The purpose of this economic system is to meet the necessities of life, not to make a profit. So it has a very close family nature. Although this family trait usually only appears between people who have known each other for a long time. The characteristics of the thick nature of this kinship is the phenomenon of accounts payable. Because each member involved feels that the boundaries between them are biased so that the debt and credit phenomenon then emerges.
• Rarely occurs fraud or tackle each other for the benefit of one party. Because it has a family nature, the threat of unfair competition can also be kept to a minimum against various types of existing business entities. Unfair competition is an action that can harm many parties. However, because production activities in the traditional economic system are very limited, unfair competition can be avoided.
• The low level of economic inequality is due to fairly evenly distributed income between individuals
• The government is merely a supervisor and does not exercise a monopoly.

Disadvantages of Traditional Economic Systems:

• It is difficult to predict the quality and quantity of production so that in the end standardization is carried out because it relies on natural products.
• Low Work Effectiveness due to the absence of a clear work structure so that all activities carried out are not properly controlled and evaluated. Not only that, work effectiveness also has a considerable impact on the level of community welfare where if the effectiveness is low, it means that the level of community welfare there is also low, and vice versa.
• Economic growth is very slow, because unlike the liberal economic system, the traditional economic system runs as it is, so it is not innovative and tends not to develop. This also happens because the mindset of people in traditional economic systems is generally difficult to accept change.

2. Command Economy System

The command economy system is centralized and dominated. Most of the system will be controlled by the government involved in the production process from equipment to facilities. The domination factor itself is clearly visible in valuable resources, because something that is capable of producing the greatest profit will be controlled by the government and other resources will be managed by the people.

However, if the government is able to make the right policies, there will be many benefits to be gained, such as the creation of equitable development from the utilization of the country’s resources. Countries that implement this economic system include North Korea, the People’s Republic of China, Vietnam and Cuba.

Advantages of the Command Economy System:

• It is easy for the government to supervise and control the prices of goods in the market, when a problem occurs it will be easier to deal with because the government has all the data related to the economy.
• The government can control various economic problems such as high unemployment, poverty, inflation, and others because it acts as a controller. He can also maintain a more stable economic condition because everything is run according to his design.
• There is no gap because all people have relatively stable economic conditions.
• Income equality can be achieved and economic crises are less frequent. Due to income inequality, unemployment, inflation can be handled better, as a result countries following this system rarely experience crises.
• It is easy to control its economic activities not only in production, but also in distribution and consumption because the government understands very well the flow of goods and services.

Disadvantages of the Command Economy System

• Individual rights are not recognized, therefore even if someone has creativity, this is not allowed. The government monopolizes the economy so that other parties are not given the opportunity to get involved. This is very detrimental for residents to increase their capacity.
• Economic growth tends to be slow, even though income distribution can be achieved, but if viewed globally, economic development tends to be slower. Because the economy is only controlled by a handful of people, progress has not been made.
• The market system depends on the quality of its government. If the quality of the government is good, then the economic conditions will also be good. However, if the government does not have high enough quality, it will impact the economy. Therefore, the government then seeks to find competent parties in economic affairs.

3. Mixed Economic System

A mixed economic system or also known as a dual economy because it combines market and command economic systems. As a result, the government and the market then work together in managing existing resources. The government recognizes individual property rights provided that they do not harm the public interest.

The government plays a role in providing boundaries and can intervene. The government makes plans, regulations and policies related to the economy. Competition then occurs in the market within reasonable and clean limits where the government also supervises. The market mechanism will determine the type and quantity of goods produced.

The government controls all vital resources that concern the lives of many people. The government and the private sector have the same role in economic activity. However, this system is also prone to problems, especially when the power of the government increases.

This is triggered by excessive control or difficulty of access and a less flexible economy. In addition, the government is also involved in market mechanisms through various economic policies and monetary policies. The disadvantages of this economic system include the government which has greater responsibility than the private sector, besides that even though the government plays an active role in the economy.

However, economic problems still occur, such as inflation, unemployment, and so on. Equal distribution of income is also very difficult to achieve in this economic system. Economic growth tends to be slower than the liberal economic system.

The private sector cannot maximize its profits because there is intervention from the government as well as restrictions on production sources that are controlled by the government and the private sector are difficult to determine. Countries that adhere to this economic system include: Indonesia, India, the Philippines, Malaysia, Morocco, France, Egypt and Australia.

Advantages of a Mixed Economic System

• Economic fluctuations have become more manageable and stable.
• Individual economic rights can be recognized and supported by the government.
• In the economic sector, the private sector and the government can be clearly distinguished.

Disadvantages of a Mixed Economic System

• If the private sector is more dominating, it can lead to a monopoly.
• If the government is more dominating, it can cause etatism.

4. Socialist Economic System

A socialist economic system is a system in which the people have equality in ownership of the factors of production (workers, entrepreneurs, capital and natural resources owned by the community but whose management is fully regulated by the state).

The government also plays a full role in regulating distribution and production. In Indonesia itself there is a form of Pancasila economy which is based on Pancasila ideology with the meaning of democratic economy and adheres to the principles of kinship and mutual cooperation with the concept of, by and for the people. In the Pancasila system, cooperatives are also used as one of the spearheads by the Indonesian government in advancing the economy.

The book entitled Islamic Public and Social Finance, written by Solikin M. Juhro, will help Sinaumed’s understand Islamic economics and the role of Islamic public and social finance in greater depth.

Advantages of the Socialist Economic System:

• All economic activities and problems are controlled by the government so that it is easy for the government to supervise the course of the economy.
• There is no economic gap between the rich and the poor, because government distribution can be done evenly.
• The government can also more easily regulate the goods and services that will be produced according to the needs of the community. In addition, it is also easier for the government to interfere in price formation.

Disadvantages of the Socialist Economic System;

Turning off the creativity and innovation of each individual. There is no freedom to own resources. Lack of variation in producing goods, because it is only limited to government regulations.

5. Market Economy System

The market economy looks more identical to the free market. In this system, it is the organization run by the community that determines how the economy will run, how supply is generated to what demands are needed. In fact, no country in the world has fully implemented this system. The biggest advantage of this market system is the separation of market and government.

This reduces government dominance and progress and innovation can develop more quickly. With this system, businesses must also be able to respond quickly to various risks from the free market such as the possibility of inflation and quickly understand the causes of this inflation.

6. Liberal Economic System

The liberal economic system is an economic system in which all members of society are given freedom by the state to carry out economic activities. Therefore, this one economic system is often also referred to as the capitalist economic system. The liberal economic system can be regarded as an economic system that prioritizes making profits, so entrepreneurs will always try to be productive so that profits are maintained.

Advantages of Liberal Economic System 

• Easily improve or grow productivity on the quality of products to be produced and sold.
• Entrepreneurs can increase their creativity by innovating the products they produce.
• Only focus on self or group benefits.
• Profit is a top priority, so that it can be used as a motivation in building a business.

Disadvantages of Liberal Economic System 

• Can create a business monopoly, resulting in social inequality, such as rich and poor.
• Business competition becomes unhealthy or unbalanced.
• Instability in the economic sector often becomes unstable.

7. People’s Economic System

The people’s economic system is an economic system based on economic democracy. In other words, all economic activities are under the control of every member of the community, so that the prosperity and welfare of the members of society is the main thing. Therefore, this economic system is often referred to as the Pancasila economy.

Advantages of the People’s Economy System

• Every state resource and finance that will be used goes through a process of deliberation on the people’s representative institutions first.
• The economy is structured in a familial way.
• Every earth and water resource is controlled by the state with the aim of prospering the people.

Disadvantages of the People’s Economy System

• In the economy, the state becomes more dominant, so that it can kill economic sectors that are beyond the capacity of the state.
• Can lead to a monopoly in a particular group.

Economic System in Indonesia

In the 1950s, Indonesia adopted a liberal economic system until communism entered the country and the economy then changed again to a socialist economic system. Furthermore, the old order era was replaced by the new order government, the form of the economy was changed again to become an economic democracy system because it was considered more in line with Indonesia’s self-image.

It didn’t stop there when the reform order rolled around, the Indonesian economy changed again to a populist economic system or Pancasila economy. The populist economic system is a mixed type of system. Until now, Indonesia adheres to the Pancasila economic system which is the development of a mixed system.

The foundation of the Indonesian economic system itself is Pancasila and the 1945 Constitution which are based on kinship and mutual cooperation from, by and for the people under the leadership and supervision of the government. The state controls the factors of production which are strategic and concern the interests of the people at large.

The government plays a role in overseeing economic activities carried out by the private sector. The concrete form of this concept is a cooperative business entity that focuses on the welfare of its members. In addition, there is a difference in roles between state-owned enterprises (BUMN) and privately-owned enterprises (BUMS), which then play a role in facilitating government oversight. Characteristics of the economic system in Indonesia, including:

1. Economic activity is considered as a joint activity by prioritizing elements of kinship or also known as gotong-royong.
2. The production branch which is considered strategic is considered to have a major influence on the people’s livelihood. Then the branch must be controlled or managed by the state for the prosperity of its people.
3. Applying environmentally sound and sustainable principles to all economic activities.
4. The government supervises every economic activity carried out by the private sector. This aims to prevent fraudulent practices, for example: trade mafia, monopoly, and fraud. In this way, an element of justice will be created for all Indonesian people.

The importance of legal support in economic activities in Indonesia, where until now the growth and development of the economy and Islamic financial institutions has been increasing rapidly and significantly in Indonesia. The book entitled Law of the Islamic Economic System by Dr. Mardani is used to find out how the law forms the economy in Indonesia.

Characteristics of the Economic System

To make it easier to understand the 7 economic systems, you need to recognize each of its characteristics. The characteristics of the economic system as follows.

1. The characteristics of the traditional economic system

• Still using simple production tools
• Very dependent on natural resources
• Buying and selling transactions are synonymous with the behavior of the surrounding community
• Often applied in rural communities

2. Characteristics of a command economy system

• Economic regulation is regulated by the government
• Almost all types of work under government regulations
• The price of a product is also determined by the government

3. The characteristics of a mixed economic system

• Resources and goods that have the potential to be regulated and supervised by the government
• The private sector can play a balanced role in the economic sector
• The government makes rules to create healthy economic competition

4. The characteristics of a socialist economic system

• Every means of production is under government control
• Production, consumption, and distribution are regulated by the central government
• Limited proprietorship rights

5. The characteristics of a market economy system

• Every economic transaction is carried out by the public or private parties
• Business capital is a fairly important role
• There is no intervention from the government
• The business built is devoted to making a profit
• Each individual is given the freedom to buy any item

6. The characteristics of a liberal economic system

• Government parties have limitations in interfering in economic transactions
• The price of a product is more often determined by the free market
• Prioritizing the principle of yield
• Entrepreneurs are free to determine their business

7. Characteristics of a populist economic system

• There is no control over a natural resource by certain parties
• Every natural resource that is needed by the community is under the supervision of the government
• Economic growth always prioritizes justice, thereby creating healthy competition
• Consumers get the right to protection

Recommendations for Economic Books and Articles

For those of you who are studying economics, here are some recommendations for studying economics that you can have:

1. Islamic Economic System

2. Pancasila Economic System

3. Indonesian Economic Politics

7 Continents in the World – Continents are vast plains and are surrounded by oceans and are located on earth. Today’s Earth has 7 continents which have their own characteristics. Each of these continents also has several countries in it.

The continent in KBBI is a part of the earth in the form of land or land that is very broad so that the central part of the continent is not affected by sea breezes. Some of the continents on earth are Asia, Africa, North America, South America, Antarctica, Europe and Australia.

Born to Travel is a joint work written by a number of travelers who agree that a narrow space called “the world of work” has no right to limit the desire to explore every corner under the sky. Born to Travel will invite readers to visit eleven countries through eleven extraordinary journeys.

The continents have their respective areas. In this article, we will explain the continents from the largest to the smallest in area. To find out more about the 7 largest continents in the world, let’s look at the following review.

1. Continent of Asia

The continent of Asia is the largest continent in the world. Its land area reaches 44,579,000 square kilometers or about 29.5% of the earth’s area. Because this continent is very broad, this continent has a population of around 4,164,252,000 people or about 60% of the total human population on earth and there are 45 countries in the Asian continent.

Some historians say that the continent of Asia is known as the continent of “East”. The continent of Asia takes its name from the Phoenician/Syrian/Ancient Greek language which means east. This is because the continent of Asia is located east of the Greek kingdom. The Asian continent is also divided into several regions which include, Central Asia, East Asia, West Asia, Southeast Asia, and South Asia.

If seen astronomically, the continent of Asia is located between 26 degrees east longitude – 170 degrees east longitude and 11 degrees south latitude – 80 degrees south latitude. Meanwhile, from its geographical location, the continent of Asia is located between three continents, namely the continent of Europe. Australia Continent, and America Continent. In addition to its geographical location, this continent is also located between several oceans that surround it, namely the Indian Ocean, the Atlantic Ocean and the Arctic Ocean.

The Asian continent has several characters. Certainly different from other continents. Asian Continent characters include.

• The continent with the largest oil producer, namely in the country of Saudi Arabia;
• The continent that has the largest sea area is the South China Sea;
• The Asian continent is the birthplace of several religions such as Islam, Christianity, Hinduism, Buddhism and Confucianism;
• There are many buildings that are included in the seven wonders of the world which include the Great Wall in China, the Borobudur Temple in Indonesia, the Kaaba in Saudi Arabia, and the Taj Mahal in India.
• There are some of the highest mountains in the world which include, the Himalayas, Mount Everest, and the Tibetan plateau. The highest peak is on Mount Everest which has a height of about 8,848 meters above sea level.
• There are several countries with large populations, such as Japan, India, Indonesia, China, Pakistan and Bangladesh.

2. Continent of Africa

The continent of Africa is the second largest continent in the world. This continent has an area of ​​about 30,370,000 square kilometers or about 20.4% of the earth’s area. This continent has a population of 1,020,201,229 people which includes 15% of the human population on earth.

This continent stretches 8,000 kilometers from north to south and 7,400 kilometers from east to west. The northern point on the African Continent is in the city of Al-Ghiran, Tunisia. Then the southernmost point is in the town of Cape Agulhas Gwardafuy, Somalia. Then the westernmost point is in the town of Almadi Point, Cape Verde, Senegal.

The African continent can be said to be the “Mother” continent. This is because Africa is the oldest inhabited continent. The ancestors of humans lived in Africa for the past 5,000,000 years.

Judging from the astronomical lines, the location of the African continent is at 37 degrees north latitude – 34 degrees south latitude and 17 degrees west longitude – 51 degrees east longitude.

Several countries in Africa are passed by the prime meridian that has been used internationally, namely the Greenwich longitude which starts from the North Pole which passes through Greenwich City, England.

The African continent also has its own characteristics. Here are the characteristics to know.

• The continent known as the “Black” continent because the majority of the population on the African continent have black skin.
• It has the largest desert in the world, namely the Sahara Desert which has an area of ​​8,400,000 square kilometers. This desert stretches from the west, namely Senegal, to the east, namely Kenya.
• It has the longest river in the world, namely the Nile which has a length of 6,690 kilometers.
• There are many pyramids which are the tombs of the kings of Egypt. The pyramid is also included in the wonders of the world.

3. Continent of North America

The North American continent is one part of the Americas, but this continent is divided into two parts. This continent has an area of ​​about 24,490,000 square kilometers. The human population on this continent also has a total of 542,056,000 people, which is only 16.5% of the total human population on earth. There are 23 countries that are part of the North American continent.

This continent is the largest continent in the world in third place after the continents of Asia and Africa. In addition, this continent ranks fourth with the largest population after the continents of Asia, Africa and Europe.

Some Europeans say that North America and South America are nicknamed Amerigo Vespucci which does not mean the same as the East Indies. This was said by the first European to discover the Americas.

The North American continent has a land connection with the isthmus of Panama. This relationship is only based on geopolitics, the area of ​​the whole of Panama including the eastern part of the Panama Canal has been considered as part of North America as well. However, some experts say that the land of North America did not originate from the isthmus of Panama, but on the isthmus of Tehuantepec with the area blocking it being considered as Central America which rests on the Caribbean plate.

Many people think of Central America as North America because it is too small to be a continent on its own. Meanwhile, Greenland which is part of North America, even geographically and has the same tectonic plates, is not considered part of the North American region politically.

4. Continent of South America

The South American continent is the largest continent in the world which is in fourth place. This continent has a land area of ​​about 17,840,000 square kilometers. The human population on the continent is 392,555,000 people or about 6% of the world’s population. This continent also has several countries in it, namely around 12 countries.

Geographically this continent is between the Pacific Ocean and the Atlantic Ocean which connects from North America via the Isthmus of Panama. This continent is crossed by the equator, and most of the land is the southern part of the earth. Therefore the climate on this continent tends to be tropical and subtropical.

In the western part of this continent are the Andes mountains that stand from north to south. Whereas in the eastern part is lowland and most of it is the basin of the Amazon River with very dense tropical forest.

South America is thought to have been inhabited by humans at first originating from the immigration of Asian peoples who passed through the Isthmus of Bering which is now called the Bering Strait, they headed to North and South America. Another allegation is through the southern part of the Pacific Ocean and Oceania Islands.

In this book there are 10 historical stories about the journey of world explorers who discovered new continents, supported by original photos and 3-dimensional illustrations.

5. Continent of Antarctica

The continent of Antarctica is the largest continent which ranks fifth. This continent has a land area of ​​about 13,720,000 square kilometers. The population on this continent is only around 4,490 people. The population of this continent is the lowest compared to other continents. Not even a single country exists on this continent, only the continent.

Since the Antarctic Continent was discovered in 1820, this continent is a continent that has absolutely no native inhabitants. Because it has no indigenous people, several countries claim that Antarctica is part of their territory.

But all of that has been overcome with the Antarctic Treaty in 1959 which was signed by 12 countries. The deal is that this continent is made for peace and scientific research. Since then, 41 other countries have signed the agreement.

Besides that, there are several unique facts that this continent has. Here are some unique facts from the continent of Antarctica.

• There are no time zones in Antarctica. At the South Pole has a very different time zone from the other hemisphere, all points meet as one. Even scientists who work use time zones in their respective countries.
• The Antarctic Peninsula is one of the hottest areas on earth. In 50 years, the average temperature on the Antarctic Peninsula has risen 3 degrees Celsius, or five times the increase in temperature in the rest of the world.
• As much as 60% – 90% of fresh water on earth is all frozen on the continent of Antarctica. Antarctica’s ice sheet is the largest ice sheet on earth. If all the ice melts, it can be estimated that the oceans on earth will rise up to 60 meters.
• Antarctica is actually a desert. Deserts don’t have to be hot, they don’t get annual rainfall. On this continent only get annual rainfall that occurs for 30 years with an average of 10 millimeters. Therefore, Antarctica is called a polar desert.

6. Continental Europe

The European continent is the largest continent in the world at number six. This continent has a land area of ​​about 10,180,000 square kilometers. This continent has a population of 738,199,000 people, which means 11% of the world’s population. There are 45 countries on this continent.

Astronomically, this continent is located at 36 degrees North latitude – 71 degrees South latitude and 9 degrees West longitude – 66 degrees East longitude. This continent extends from west to east as far as 5,300 kilometers and 3,950 kilometers across.

This continent is often nicknamed the “Blue” and “White” continent, this is because the majority of the population has blue eyes and has white skin. In the geographical map it is also stated that there are several countries in Europe that unite with several countries in Asia, this is called Eurasia.

The flora and fauna of the European Continent are greatly influenced by human presence. Communities with flora and fauna have coexisted for thousands of years from the time of farming. Except for the Scandinavian and Russian regions which are protected forests, the area has not been touched by humans at all.

Forests in Europe used to be very large, namely around 80% – 90% of the area in Europe was forest. This forest spreads from the Mediterranean Sea to the Arctic Ocean. Although initially there were many, but over time, half of them have been lost from the colonial era that had occurred for centuries. At present the Continental Europe has only a quarter of the world’s forests, namely Scandinavian Forests, pine forests in Russia, rainforests in the Caucasus Chestnuts, and Cork Oak Forests in the Mediterranean.

Deforestation that occurred in Europe has been stopped, then a thorough reforestation is carried out. On the European continent, the country that has the least forest is Ireland with 8% of the forest, then Finland has the largest forest with an area of ​​72%.

7. Continental Australia

The continent of Australia is the largest continent in seventh place. This continent has an area of ​​about 9,008,500 square kilometers. The population of this continent reaches 29,127,000 people, or about 0.4% of the total population in the world. There are 14 countries on this continent.

Astronomically, this continent is located at 113 degrees East Longitude – 115 degrees East Longitude and 10 degrees South Latitude – 43 degrees South Latitude. Meanwhile, geographically, this continent is located in the southern part of Indonesia. This continent is also isolated in the southern hemisphere. The topography is also flat compared to other continents.

The Australian continent is famous for its vast desert. In fact, a third of the continent’s area is desert. Which is one of the factors why there are many deserts on this continent is because the location of this continent is in the zone of descending air masses. In astronomy it is located at 30 degrees North latitude and 30 degrees South latitude.

Then this continent has a plain to the west which is formed by rock faults around the west of the continent. Then, there is also the east coast plateau which makes the area around the coast narrower. Furthermore, in the east of the continent, in Queensland to be precise, it has an area with large and wide coral reefs. The coral reef is the largest and widest coral reef and is nicknamed the Great Barrier Reaf .

• Atmosphere Layer
• Examples of Application of the Concept of Geography
• Structure of the Earth’s Layers
• The 10 Biggest Islands in the World
• 10 Biggest Islands in Indonesia
• The 10 Largest Countries in the World
• 10 Richest People in Indonesia
• 10 Highest Mountains in Indonesia
• 10 Most Popular BTS Songs
• 10 Longest Rivers in the World
• Theory of the Formation of the Earth and the Solar System

Sinaumed’s, thus the presentation of the article about the 7 largest continents in the world. Of course, you are also familiar with the names of the continents that have been mentioned. With this article, I hope you get the knowledge you previously got.

If you want to learn more about the characteristics of each continent, you can buy and read books from sinaumedia. sinaumedia as #Friends Without Limits provides quality books to increase your knowledge. Come on Sinaumed’s, buy the book now!

This latest book introduces you to the field of geography, starting with rocks and their formation; solar system; weather and climate; Ocean; to human population, current population, types of ecosystems and environmental concerns. The book also contains stunning photographs of nature, detailed diagrams of geographic and geological processes, and notes on the inhabitants and subcontinents of each continent.

Causes of High Rainfall – Every year, most areas in Indonesia experience floods, especially in the lowlands. The problem of flooding is currently not completely resolved, in fact it is increasing, both in intensity and frequency.

In general, this flood natural disaster is caused by high rainfall intensity. In addition, the duration of high-intensity rainfall also determines the arrival of floods in an area.

Then, what causes high rainfall in Indonesia? What are the characteristics of rainfall in our country?

So that Sinaumed’s can understand it, let’s look at the following review!

7 Causes of High Rainfall in Indonesia

There are seven causes for the high rainfall that occurs in Indonesia, one of which is the La Nina phenomenon. Well , here is an explanation of the seven causes.

1. Madden Julian Oscillation (MJO)

This phenomenon was discovered by two researchers namely Rolland Madden and Paul Julian in 1971 who at that time were studying periodic oscillations (shaking or vibration) in the tropical Pacific region.

The Madden Julian Oscillation (MJO) is a system of oscillations (wobbles or vibrations) of interaction between the atmosphere and the sea, which propagates from west to east around the Maritime Continent Equator or Benua Maritim Indonesia (BMI) region for about 30-60 days. This MJO phenomenon usually develops and will be dominantly seen around the southern Indian Ocean to the east, passing through Australia and the western Pacific Ocean.

This MJO phenomenon certainly has an impact on the high rainfall in Indonesia during the rainy season. In the period from June to August, this MJO phenomenon has had an impact in the form of:

• Wet and dry periods change
• Monsoon change
• Changes in tropical cyclone activity

Meanwhile, in the period from December to February, the impacts are in the form of:

• Wet and dry periods change
• Expansion of tropical moisture plumes to higher latitudes, eventually causing heavy rains in mid-latitude regions
• Monsoon change
• Changes in tropical cyclone activity
• ENSO Changes through Kelvin Waves in the ocean

2. La Nina

La Nina is a form of natural phenomenon that occurs as a result of the interaction between the sea surface and the atmosphere in the tropical Pacific. What happens in this phenomenon is when the sea surface temperature in the tropical Pacific Ocean, the central and eastern parts are colder than normal conditions, then followed by a change in the atmospheric circulation above it, usually in the form of an increase in the easterly trade wind which is stronger than normal conditions and can last for several months.

This of course has an impact on global climate patterns, especially in tropical regions such as Indonesia where the weather becomes “wetter”. The La Nina phenomenon can significantly increase rainfall from October to November at the start of the rainy season.

3. Tropical Cyclone Seeds

Tropical cyclone is a natural phenomenon in the form of a large force storm. Even the average radius can reach 150 to 200 km!

This tropical cyclone phenomenon is formed over the ocean which has a warm sea surface temperature, approximately more than 26.5 ºC. In addition, strong winds rotating near the center of this storm have wind speeds of more than 63 km/hour.

This tropical cyclone seed can also potentially increase the growth of rain clouds so that it affects high rainfall. When this phenomenon occurs, the public is advised to remain vigilant because several areas in Indonesia will usually be affected in the form of heavy rains and strong winds.

This phenomenon also has local names, for example typhoon (typhoon) in the Pacific region, willy-willy in the Australian region, baguio in the Philippines, and hurricane in the Americas.

4. Intertropical Convergence Zone (ITCZ)

The phenomenon of the ITCZ ​​or Intertropical Convergence Zone is a meeting between trade winds from the northern hemisphere and the southern hemisphere, then surrounds the earth around the equator.

The wind meeting area will form a rain-producing cloud around the area. The rain that is produced from these clouds will later have high rainfall and occur continuously.

The ITCZ ​​phenomenon does not always stay in one area, therefore it will always move depending on the annual sun movement.

In January, usually the ITCZ ​​line will be in Indonesia, so that month will experience hot weather. The hot weather causes the lifting of air masses so that it affects the high rainfall.

5. Kelvin and Rossby

The phenomenon of Kelvin Waves and Rossby Waves is an atmospheric wave phenomenon that actively occurs around the area of ​​South Sumatra and Java Island. Equatorial Rossby Waves and Kelvin Waves are atmospheric dynamics which indicate the potential for the growth of rain clouds on a wide scale around the active phase region they pass through.

Kelvin waves will move from the direction of the Indian Ocean towards the Pacific Ocean, passing through Indonesian territory for 30-40 days along with the MJO ( Madden Julian Oscillation ). Meanwhile, the Rossby wave will move the opposite of the Kelvin wave, namely from the Pacific Ocean towards the Indian Ocean.

So, what do these two phenomena have in common? The similarity is that both of them contribute to the increase in rainfall and the growth of rain clouds in the Indonesian region.

6. Asian Monsoon

Monsoon winds are winds that blow periodically, for at least three months. This phenomenon can cause an increase in the mass of wet air and of course affect the high rainfall around Indonesia.

There are two global monsoons that affect monsoon conditions around the Indonesian Maritime Continent, namely the summer Asian monsoon and the winter Australian monsoon.

The Asian summer monsoon occurs on the Asian continent with the formation of a low pressure center on the continent. Meanwhile, at the same time there is the Australian winter monsoon which is also occurring, so the atmosphere above the continent will be under high pressure.

In the rainy season, this monsoon wind is always there and occurs in Indonesian territory, namely from January to February.

The flow of the Asian monsoon winds can cause the formation of convective clouds which later have the potential for bad weather, heavy rain, thunderstorms and strong winds. There are two types of monsoon winds, namely the west monsoon wind and the east monsoon wind.

7. Warming of Sea Surface Temperatures

The temperature of the sea surface to be warm can be caused by two factors, namely due to the presence of sunlight and the meeting of two hot ocean currents. An increase in sea surface temperature can of course cause evaporation so that later it creates rain clouds.

This evaporation can also increase the intensity of rain, storm waves, and tropical cyclones around Indonesia and globally. So, this increase in sea surface temperature will also be related to the El Nino and La Nina phenomena.

When there is an increase in sea surface temperature, the chances of La Nina will also increase. Conversely, if the sea surface temperature decreases, then the El Nino phenomenon will occur.

Characteristics of Rainfall in Indonesia

Based on the general pattern that often occurs, rainfall in Indonesia can be divided into 3 types, namely monsoon type, local type, and equatorial type.

1. Monsoon Type

This type of monsoon rainfall is influenced by monsoons, especially the west monsoon. The west monsoon is a wind that is driven by high pressure and low pressure around the continents of Asia and Australia alternately, especially from December to February.

In these months, in the Northern Hemisphere there will be winter, the result will be high pressure cells on the Asian continent. Meanwhile, in the Southern Hemisphere there will be summer, so a low pressure cell occurs on the Australian continent.

This difference makes the air pressure blowing on the two continents, so from December to February high pressure winds will blow in Asia towards low pressure in Australia. Well, this wind is called the West Monsoon Wind. The west monsoon will usually be more humid and rainy than the east monsoon.

2. Local Type

The next rainfall characteristic is the local type, which is influenced by local physical environmental conditions, in the form of waterscapes as a source of evaporation to mountains as rain catchment areas.

This local type of rainfall pattern is dependent on the magnitude of the influence of local conditions, which are related to the presence of mountains, oceans, other waterscapes, to the occurrence of intensive local warming.

The forming factor of this type of rainfall is the rise of air towards the highlands or mountains due to intense local heating. Usually, local type rainfall occurs in the areas of Sulawesi, Maluku and Papua.

For its duration, the local type occurs only once the maximum monthly rainfall in one year.

3. Equatorial Type

Furthermore, there is the equatorial type of rainfall, the process of which occurs is related to the movement of the convergence zone to the north and south following the apparent movement of the sun.

The convergence zone is the area where two air masses (wind) meet from the two hemispheres, then the air moves upward. The process of moving the wind towards a point and then moving upwards is called convergence, while the place where convergence occurs is called the convergence area.

The convergence area is relatively narrow and is in low latitudes which is commonly called the Intertropical Convergence Zone (ITCZ).

So, those are the seven causes of high rainfall in Indonesia. Of these causes, indeed everything is the will of nature and we as humans cannot prevent the high rainfall that often occurs.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Source:

http://meteo.bmkg.go.id/

HOME PAGE

https://dpu.kulonprogokab.go.id/

Tukidi. (2010). Rainfall Character in Indonesia. Journal of Geography UNNES, Vol.7, No.2.

Suhardi, Budi. et al. (2018). Effect of Madden Julian Oscillation on Extreme Rainfall Events in West Java Province (Case Study in Sukabumi District). Journal of Geography, Education and Environment (JGEL), Vol.2, No.2

Yulihastin, Erma. (2010). Asian Monsoon Interaction Mechanism and Enso. Aerospace News, Vol.11, No.3.

Benefits of International Trade – In an era that is as sophisticated as today’s technology, of course it will affect various fields in a country, including in the economic field. These technological advances are also related to foreign trade activities or international trade.

Especially at this time, it is also easier to obtain information related to products sold by other countries and there are policies regarding free trade, which in fact further expand the range of export and import activities between countries.

It should be noted that international trade is also a real form of globalization which is growing every time.

Then, what are the forms of contribution from this international trade activity to the country and its people? Come on, see the following reviews!

7 Benefits of International Trade for Countries

The existence of international trade, of course, can provide various advantages and benefits to both the country itself and other countries. This is because international trade is actually a form of mutual transaction or agreement, so that it will benefit various parties.

1. Can Obtain Goods That Cannot Be Produced by the Country Alone

Through the activity of importing goods, people from a country can get a certain product that cannot be produced by their own country. There are many factors that prevent the country from producing certain products, for example geographical conditions, climate, and the level of mastery of science and technology.

For example, our country imports a lot of products from Japan in the form of machinery and spare parts because Japan’s mastery of science and technology is superior. The opposite applies, Japan will import textile products, coffee, and handicrafts.

2. Extending the Gains From Specialization

The second advantage of international trade is that it extends the advantages of specialization. The point is, even though a country can or is able to produce goods of the same type as those produced by other countries, there are times when products produced by other countries are of better quality, so that country will import the same product.

For example, the United States and Japan both have the ability to produce textiles in the form of cloth. However, cloth products produced by Japan are considered to be better and more efficient than the United States. Therefore, to increase the efficiency of the use of factors of production, the United States needs to reduce its production of cloth and import these goods from Japan.

So, the two countries will process international trade transactions, so that each country can benefit in the form of:

• Production factors owned by each country can be used more efficiently
• Each country can enjoy more goods that can be produced domestically (locally).

3. Expanding the Market and Increasing Profits

In this case, the benefits are usually felt by many entrepreneurs. Sometimes, some entrepreneurs do not run their production equipment machines to the fullest because they are worried that overproduction will occur, causing a decrease in the price of their products.

Now, through this international trade, entrepreneurs will be able to run their production equipment machines to the fullest and sell the excess products abroad.

4. Transfer of Modern Technology

Through this international trade activity, later a country can get the opportunity to learn more modern production and management techniques from other countries.

5. Improving Friendly Relations Between Countries

International trade activities are transactions and agreements between countries, so of course it can indirectly create friendly relations between countries, you know…

If the transaction process in international trade can be well established, then of course friendly relations between countries will also be well established. These countries will become more familiar and when a country is experiencing difficulties, other countries will also help meet its needs.

6. Expanding Employment

In this case, if the foreign market expands, the production of goods and services produced will also increase. Well, the increase in the production of goods and services will also increase employment opportunities for the community and reduce the number of unemployed.

For example, currently there are many workers from Indonesia working abroad, both in restaurants, ships, and training centers. In contrast, many workers from abroad have also worked in Indonesia.

7. Encouraging maximum production of goods

It should be noted that one of the objectives of international trading activities is to expand overseas markets. So, if the overseas market is wide, then the production of goods in a country will also increase. This is of course beneficial for entrepreneurs, both old and new.

Cause of International Trade

The process of international trade in this world must rely heavily on interactions with other countries around it. So, it is through interactions, transactions and mutual agreements that can form international trade activities. Then, what are the reasons that cause this international trade to occur?

1. Information Revolution and Transformation

International trade began to develop in line with developments in information and technology, especially in the use of computer-based systems. Not only that, these developments have also led to advances in the use of satellites and digitization of data processing, to the development of communication equipment.

2. Interdependence of Needs

Each country definitely has advantages and disadvantages, in terms of natural resources, human resources, and technology. Through this, of course it will have an impact on dependence between one country and another, in the form of production of goods and services.

3. Economic Liberalization

Freedom in transactions and cooperation also has implications that each country will definitely look for opportunities to interact with other countries, through this international trade activity.

4. The Principle of Comparative Advantage

Almost the same as the second point, a country must have its own uniqueness. This is reflected in what is owned by a country is not necessarily owned by other countries. So, therefore, the superiority of a country can be relied upon as a source of income for the country and its people.

5. Foreign Exchange Needs

International trade and foreign exchange are two things that mutually influence one another. In meeting all its needs, a country must have foreign exchange reserves to carry out development in various fields, both in the economic, education, and infrastructure sectors.

Well, one of the sources of the country’s foreign exchange is income from international trade activities.

6. There are differences in taste

A country with another country must have different tastes for something so that it is possible to carry out international trade transactions.

For example, countries B and C both produce nearly the same amount of beef and chicken. However, residents of country B do not like beef, while residents of country C do not like chicken.

From these differences in tastes, there were export and import activities that mutually benefited the two countries. Namely by way of country B (which does not like beef) will import chicken and export beef. Then, for country C (which doesn’t like chicken meat) it will import beef and export chicken meat.

Indirectly, it looks like a goods swap deal huh…

7. There is a diversity of production conditions

The production of an item in a country will be affected by a variety of conditions, especially its climatic conditions. For example, our country has a tropical climate so that it is able to produce various fruits which will then be exported to other countries, “exchanged” with goods and services from other countries.

8. Differences in Culture and Lifestyle

Every country must have a culture and lifestyle that is different from one another. Through these differences, it can indirectly encourage international trade activities between countries.

For example, many handicrafts from our country are exported to other countries with batik and traditional patterns. Apparently, these handicraft items are in great demand by many people in other countries because in their country there is no art of that style.

International Trade Theory

Many theories regarding international trade activities are put forward by experts. Most of these theories say that international trade activities can bring benefits to the country and make the country and its people more prosperous.

So, here are some theories related to international trade.

1. Theory of Comparative Advantages ( Comparative Advantages )

This theory was put forward by David Ricardo , an economist. He explained that this international trade provides a comparative advantage which is measured in real costs, and reflects the costs of the labor force.

2. Reciprocal Demand Theory

The second theory regarding international trade was put forward by JS Miil , an economist and former member of the British parliament. He argues that this international trade seeks a balance of exchange between two goods by two countries, with the ratio of exchange determining the basis of domestic exchange.

3. Absolute Advantage Theory

The third theory was put forward by Adam Smith . He argued that the country would prosper if it was able to develop its production through trade. In order for production to increase, it is necessary to have an international division of labor in producing these goods.

4. Views of Mercantilism

Mercantilism is a group that reflects the ideals and ideology of commercial capital, and holds the view that the country’s political prosperity will exceed individual prosperity.

Well, these Mercantilists argue that a country can gain prosperity from two sources, namely:

• Precious metal (gold) accumulation. This is because precious metals are believed to strengthen a country’s position in economic development efforts.
• Trade policy, which is aimed at supporting the excess of exports over import values, so that the trade balance will have a surplus or active value.

Types of International Trade

Most people know that international trade is only limited to exports and imports. In fact it is not, because there are many types of activities in international trade. Well, export and import activities are only two of the many international trade activities.

1. Export

Export is the activity of sending merchandise abroad. In this case, export activities are divided into ordinary exports and exports without L/C.

a. Ordinary Export

Ordinary export is the activity of sending goods abroad, in accordance with applicable regulations, and is addressed to overseas buyers. This ordinary export activity will later use an L/C with foreign exchange provisions.

L/C stands for Letter of Credit , which is a special instrument and is issued by an Issuing Bank domiciled abroad. This L/C is “made” based on the Applicant’s request , which later contains the bank’s promise to pay a sum of money to the Beneficiary . Issuing Bank must receive documents that comply with the terms and conditions of the L/C.

b. Export Without L/C

That is, the goods will be sent first, while the exporter has not received the L/C, so a special permit must be obtained from the Ministry of Industry and Trade.

2. Barter

Bartering is the activity of sending goods abroad to be exchanged directly for goods that will be needed domestically. Well, this barter has various types,

a. Direct Barter

Namely the system of exchanging goods for goods, using a value determinant which is usually called the denominator of value . Through this denominator of value, it will act as a foreign currency and solve various barter problems in the balance of trade between the countries concerned.

b. Barter Switches

This system can be applied if it is not possible for one of the parties to use the goods themselves from the previous bartering process, so that an importing country will take over the goods to a third country that needs it more.

c. Counter Purchase

Namely a system of mutual trade between two countries. For example, a country that sells goods to other countries, the other country concerned must also buy goods from that country.

d. Buy Back Barter

Namely the system of applying technology experts from a developed country to a developing country, by helping to create production capacity in developing countries. As a result, production will be accommodated or bought back by developed countries.

3. Consignment _

Namely the process of sending goods that do not have a specific buyer abroad. Well, the sale of these goods can be done through the Free Market ( Free Market ) or Trade Exchange ( Commodites Exchange ) by way of auction.

4. Package Deals

This effort was made to expand the market for produced goods, especially from socialist countries. Later, the government will enter into a trade agreement with one of the countries.

The agreement will determine the amount of goods to be exported to that country, and vice versa the country will import a certain number of goods produced by other countries.

5. Smuggling ( Smuggling )

Usually we know that smuggling efforts are for things that are prohibited, for example smuggling drugs, endangered animals, to illegal immigrants. Therefore, smuggling is a business that aims to transfer wealth from one country to another without fulfilling the applicable provisions. 

In this case, smuggling is divided into two:

• Everything was done illegally
• Administrative smuggling / invisible smuggling / manipulation ( Custom Fraud )

6. Border Agreement

This effort is usually carried out by countries located on the border. For these countries, there will later be a certain agreement ( Border Agreement) which aims to make its residents able to interact with each other and be given convenience in making transactions for a certain amount.

This Border Agreement can occur in two ways, namely through sea borders and land borders.

• Sea Border ( Cross Boundary Sea)

The trading system in Sea Border involves two countries that have sea boundaries, so trade will be carried out by crossing the sea.

• Overland Border

The trading system in the Overland Border will later involve two countries that have land borders. Therefore, the trade transaction process is carried out in a way that every resident of that country will cross the land border in each country for the sake of a trade agreement.

So, that’s an explanation of the benefits of international trade as well as the types of activities. It can also be said that this international trade is a form of the positive impact of globalization that is currently taking place throughout the world to this day.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Source:

Introduction to International Trade. UPN East Java. 

Also Read!

• Understanding and Theory of International Trade According to Experts
• Purpose of Formation WTO, World Trade Organization
• Negative Impacts of International Trade
• Definition and Examples of International Trade
• Absolute Advantage Theory As The Basis For International Trade
• Characteristics of Domestic and International Trade
• Positive Impact of International Trade
• Forms of International Cooperation and Its Benefits
• Kinds of International Payment Instruments
• Examples and Sources of Foreign Exchange
• Definition and History of Mercantilism
• 10 Reasons Why Inflation Can Occur

Definition of Basic Manners – Which of you doesn’t want their children to grow up to be polite, friendly, and empathetic? Of course, we as parents want our children to grow up to be polite and obedient. I believe that everything that we instill cannot be instantaneous. So, I think it’s very important to teach basic manners as early as possible. That is, so that children become more used to it. For me personally, while they are still young, they are introduced to basic manners.

Basic manners itself is one of the important things for parents to teach their children. Children who grow up with basic manners will be able to blend in well in society. This is an important provision for the future. Some basic manners that a child needs to have are used to saying thank you, apologizing, understanding how to share, having a desire to help others, and knowing the right way to communicate with others.

Definition of Basic Manners

Recently, the use of words in utterances and descriptions has become wider and many use words that are rarely used. This sometimes makes us not understand the meaning of these words, as is the case with the use of the word manners . You can see the use of these words in the real world and in cyberspace, such as on social media Instagram, Facebook, Twitter or in chat-based applications such as Line, WhatsApp, and so on.

However, do you know the true meaning of the word manners ? The following is an explanation of the meaning of the word manners based on the Online English-Indonesian Dictionary so that you understand when reading a sentence that contains this word.

The meaning of the word manners in the English-Indonesian dictionary is “manners”.

Knowing a lot of vocabulary can make it easier for you to communicate and convey the opinions you want to convey to certain people. Such is the explanation of the meaning of the word manners . Hopefully the explanation above can add to your insight and knowledge about the vocabulary.

Basic Manners Children Need to Know

Basic manners or basic manners are a person’s good behavior towards other people around him. Someone with good basic manners will have a good social life too. Therefore, parents need to teach basic manners to their children from an early age as a provision for socializing later. There are a variety of behaviors that include basic manners . Some of them that children need to know include:

1. Asking for Help and Saying Thank You

One of the manners that parents need to teach their children is how to ask for help properly and say thank you after being helped by someone else. Parents should set an example by saying the same thing when asking their child for help.

For example, when you ask a child to put his toys away, use the word “please put them first, son”, then after the child puts his toys away, don’t forget to say the word “thank you”. If done every day, over time the children will follow this habit. Don’t forget to also explain the importance of the words please and thank you.

2. Greet Others Well

Greeting others properly is one of the basic manners that is important for children to master. When meeting friends, relatives, or other people he doesn’t know, they must know how to greet properly. Teach children to use polite words, especially if the person being greeted is an older person.

In addition, also teach children to look into the eyes of the other person when chatting. If possible, also teach them to shake hands with people they just met. The best way to practice these manners is to practice them while playing role plays or pretending to be meeting other people.

3. Ask permission before taking something

Children must learn that not all things can be taken for granted. When he sees something he wants to touch, eat, or take, the child must be taught to ask permission first. After successfully getting something they want, they must also be taught to say thank you.

4. Apologize When Making Mistakes

Apart from asking for help and saying thank you, the next basic manners that children should know is how to apologize properly. When making mistakes, children must be taught to honestly admit it and apologize.

5. Don’t Laugh at or Insult Others

Children may hear words of teasing from the environment or from television shows or videos that they watch, then think that it is permissible to do it. To prevent this, parents must ensure that their children know the basic manners of not teasing, laughing at, or insulting other people.

If they are allowed to tease other people under the pretext of joking, even though these jokes hurt other people’s feelings, this behavior can eventually lead to bullying . Teach children that hurting other people’s feelings is an act that is not good and should be avoided.

6. Helping Others

Helping others is a basic manners that needs to be instilled in children from an early age. Teach children to care about the environment around them. This can foster empathy for children and make them grow into unselfish individuals. You can start by getting your children used to helping with household chores, such as cleaning up their own toys or lending their items to other people who need them.

7. How to Communicate Well with Peers

Children must be taught basic manners when playing with their peers. Thus, he can get along well and make his friends feel comfortable. Get in the habit of children speaking calmly, not shouting, and saying what they want or what they mean clearly. When gathering with peers, it is also important to teach children patience, so that they want to take turns when playing.

8. Take Out Trash

You should also always make it a habit that when your child finishes eating anything that has dregs or trash to throw it in the trash itself which is at the back. If necessary, accompany him and wait for him to properly dispose of the trash himself.

9. Put Dirty Plates and Clothes

You also need to emphasize this to children, that is, when finished eating, put your own plate in the back sink. If the child’s height has arrived, stay with him and wait to place it. In addition, also teach to put dirty clothes. So if you want to take a shower, all the clothes that have been taken off are told to put them in their own dirty clothes basket, if necessary, throw the pampers in the trash.

10. Tidy Up

This is something that is very difficult to teach. If he finishes playing, tell them to tidy up, but keep waiting until he wants to tidy everything up. If you haven’t tidied up, don’t allow him to sleep.

11. Sitting When Eating and Drinking

You may be hundreds of times to teach this one thing. It’s hard to forgive. If he eats heavily, he does sit down, but if for example he eats a snack or drinks he must be running everywhere. They will only obey when they are told to sit down if they are just eating ice cubes. The rest, they will run everywhere.

12. Sharing

This is also something that is still very difficult. I understand they are small, but don’t necessarily allow them to be stingy or unwilling to share . Teach and direct children to share with their friends. If they are aware they usually want to, but if their ego is high they don’t want to share , they can’t just hold it. This will be your own homework (PR) for you. He will voluntarily share food or toys that he doesn’t like.

13. Stare and Answer When Talking

Indeed, the name of a child, he babbles all he wants, but still get used to this for them. So, if they are asked something, but they don’t answer, try to keep asking him until he answers and pays attention to you. Don’t get used to them being indifferent and tell him that talking is while the person is watching.

14. Get in line

You can teach this behavior when you are in the playground. So, let him know that we shouldn’t interrupt people who are already in line, and also teach him to be patient. Usually, this can also be taught if you go to a minimarket or supermarket when you are going to pay at the cashier.

15. Receiving and Giving Using the Right Hand

This is usually his father who teaches him very intensively. The problem is that often when Dila eats, she uses her left hand to receive something or give something. Usually, if he’s like that, we tell him ‘use a good hand, Dil’ later he will immediately change to using his right hand. But you still have to be reminded.

16. Enter People’s Houses If You Are Welcome

The basic manners that influence and shape your child’s personality well are if he gets used to entering other people’s homes if he is asked to. Even though it looks very trivial, this has a big impact until he grows up. He came to understand that other than in his own house he could not act carelessly, and indeed this is the basis of politeness.

17. Don’t let people pick you up wait

Being late, stalling for time, and making people wait are often done by people, especially close colleagues. But it feels like it’s not ethical if it continues because it doesn’t seem to respect them. Try to be ready earlier than the person who picked you up.

18. When You’ve Borrowed or Asked for Something More Than Three Times It’s Time to Buy Your Own

As humans, we certainly live a life full of limitations, borrowing and borrowing is not a strange thing to do. Sometimes we borrow and even ask for something that belongs to someone else to meet our needs. When you have borrowed three times, you should buy it yourself.

19. After Filling Gasoline at the Gas Station, Go First and Close the Tank and Turn on the Engine

It’s tiring when you have to queue at gas stations. The long queues that make us even more tired actually come from people who finish their business at the refueling point and don’t move on before their business is done, including tidying up their wallets after getting change or just closing the motorcycle tank which is a bit time consuming. Therefore, let’s change this habit by moving from the charging point first and then finishing business with the motorbike. Come on, let’s respect other people’s time, too!

20. Use Polite and Good Grammar When Talking to Strangers or Not Too Close

There’s nothing wrong with speaking formally when meeting strangers or people who are not very close to us. Avoid slang names like elo, me, ngab, and others to avoid misunderstandings. Because there are some people who are not comfortable talking informally with strangers.

21. Hold The Door If Someone Is Behind

If you’ve ever sat behind someone who is about to leave the room (convenience store, ATM, mosque, etc.), keeping the door open for the person who is leaving is good manners. Not impossible; they’ll appreciate it, whether it’s a smile or a thank you. Besides, if you close the door without looking back it will endanger the person behind you and it’s not polite.

22.Respect Other Opinions

Another thing that you must pay attention to when you want to show your good manners to others is that you must respect the opinions of others. There are times when other people’s opinions may differ from our personal opinions, therefore if you want to show your good manners then you must give your respect to other people who have different opinions from you. Why is that because every person is different and unique! (Everyone is different and unique!) , so don’t ever feel emotional or upset because your opinion differs from that of your friends or other people.

Tips for Teaching Basic Manners to Children

Teaching basic manners to children is not an easy matter. It takes patience and a little time. Here are some tips to simplify the process of teaching basic manners to children that parents might be able to follow.

1. Give clear instructions

When teaching something to children, you must give clear instructions. Explain the reason behind your instructions and the importance of him executing them well. Look the child in the eye when explaining and use soft words.

2. Adjust to the age of the child

Not all types of basic manners can be taught directly to children. When your child is new to talking, you can start teaching him simple things, like saying thank you, sorry, and please. When he enters school age, you can teach him basic manners about how to get along well with peers.

3. Give an example

Children will imitate most of the behavior of their parents. If you want your kids to be people who always say thank you, please, and sorry, then you have to practice the same.

4. Give praise if the child is successful

The more often the child gets positive attention from you when doing basic manners well, the more he will be happy to practice it. Praise can be a positive motivation for children to get used to good behavior.

5. Often practice

In order for children to get used to doing basic manners, parents should invite them to practice actively. You can create scenarios and role play with children. For example, acting as a child’s new friend at school during the new school year. If the child is still difficult to have basic manners even though you have tried various methods, you can consult a child psychologist to get more specific tips according to the conditions of your little one’s development.

7 Early Humans Found in Indonesia – Early humans were humans who lived in the prehistoric era, when writing had not yet been discovered. How to know human life in that era? At least, there are two ways to find out about human life in prehistoric times.

First, namely through the remains of humans, plants and animals that have been petrified or what are referred to as fossils. Second, through relics as a result of human culture at that time, for example household appliances, buildings, artifacts, jewelry, weapons, and ancient human fossils that have been found.

Early humans are thought to have lived during the Pleistocene era. The Pleistocene is the era that lasted 2,580,000 to 11,700 years ago. The Pleistocene era is further divided into three, namely early Pleistocene (lower layer), middle Pleistocene, and late Pleistocene (upper layer).

The researchers found various human fossils that lived in each of these periods. There are several types of early humans found in Indonesia. Ancient humans found in Indonesia are often referred to as Java man or Javanese man.

Early Man in Indonesia

Early human life spread across various regions, including Indonesia. Fossils from ancient times are found in the archipelago. The fossils include the skull, body and legs. Skull fossils and cranium capacity can show the thinking ability of humans at that time compared to modern humans. This also applies to the shape of the jawbone, arms and legs which can be compared with the shape of the bones of modern humans or with apes.

From various studies it is known that ancient humans have differences with today’s modern humans. However, for certain types of early humans there are those who have a higher level of intelligence than apes.

At least, there are several ancient human fossils found in Indonesia. Here’s the review.

1. Meganthropus palaeojavanicus

The fossilized mandibular bone of Meganthropus palaeojavanicus was discovered by a German-Dutch researcher named Gustav Heinrich Ralph von Koenigswald in 1941 near Sangiran Village, Bengawan Solo River Valley. Meganthropus found by von Koeningswald comes from the early Pleistocene (lower layer). Meganthropus or often referred to as Sangiran Man is the oldest ancient human found in Indonesia.

The characteristics of this ancient human are having a large body, prominent forehead, and thick cheekbones. The jaws and teeth are large. Roughly about the same size as a gorilla’s jaw. Based on the age of the soil layer where the discovery was made, it is estimated that the fossils found were 1,000,000–2,000,000 years old. Meganthropus is thought to live by food gathering (gathering food). The main food is plants. Because they don’t know fire.

The following are the characteristics of Meganthropus :

• Well-built with a sharp protrusion on the back of the head;
• Thick cheekbones with a prominent forehead;
• Chinless;
• Chewing muscles, teeth and jaws are large and strong.

In the human genus, this species is named Meganthropus paleojavanicus , which means the oldest large human originating from Java. Mega means big, anthropus means human, palaeo means old, and javanicus means Java. However, many experts later classify it as Homo erectus paleojavanicus s.

2. Pithecanthropus mojokertensis

Other ancient human species also found in Indonesia are Pithecanthropus robustus and Pithecanthropus mojokertensis . This ancient human was discovered by Tjokrohandojo or Andojo who worked under Ralph von Koenigswald in 1936 in the Brantas River Valley. This ancient human is a generation younger than Meganthropus palaeojavanicus . This ancient human type is considered ape-like, so it is called pithe which means monkey.

Andojo initially thought the skull belonged to an orangutan, so he was named Pithecanthropus or ape man. However, von Koeningswald recognized the fossil as an ancient human skull. The fossil is from the early Pleistocene (lower layer) and is named Pithecanthropus mojokertensis . This type is the oldest Pithecanthropus .

Based on the age of the soil layers, namely the lower and middle layers, it is estimated that Pithecanthropus lived between 30,000 and 2,000,000 years ago. Pithecanthropus live in groups and hunt and food gathering (hunting, fishing and gathering food).

Pithecanthropus already uses tools to find food. The tools are very simple, namely stone or wood found. Some examples of stone tools used by Pithecanthropus are hand axes, chopping axes, and scraping axes. These tools can be found in Pacitan Regency, East Java Province. Even though they have used tools, they have not processed or cooked food.

This controversial discovery raises debate about the classification of early humans. Von Koeningswald also changed the species name from Pithecanthropus mojokertensis to Homo mojokertensis .

Following are the characteristics of Pithecanthropus mojokertensis :

• Straight-bodied, but not as straight as Meganthropus;
• He is about 165–180 centimeters tall;
• The jawbones and molars are strong;
• The forehead protrudes;
• The nose is wide and chinless;
• Brain volume is not perfect, its capacity is only 750-1300 cc;
• The bones of the roof of the skull are thick and oval in shape;
• The chewing organs and nape muscles have shrunk;
• Chewing muscles are not as strong as Meganthropus ;
• The food is still rough or raw with little processing;
• The food varies, namely plants and game meat.

3. Pithecanthropus erectus

This pre-literate human group was discovered by Eugene Dubosi in 1890–1892 in Trinil Village, Ngawi Regency, East Java Province. Pithecanthropus erectus is known to have lived around 1 million to 600,000 years ago. Based on Dubosi’s findings, the characteristics of this early human can be identified, namely:

• Well-built with strong chewing apparatus;
• Height ranges from 165–170 centimeters with a body weight of around 100 kilograms;
• walk upright;
• The food is still rough with little processing;
• Having low thinking ability;
• The brain volume of the head is still 900 cc, while the brain volume of modern humans is more than 1000 cc and the highest ape brain volume is only 600 cc.

4. Homo erectus soloensis

Another early human found in Indonesia is Homo soloensis . As the name suggests, these early human fossils were discovered along the Bengawan Solo (Ngandong, Kontakmacan, and Sangiran) by C. Ter Haar, Gustav Heinrich Ralph von Koenigswald, and WFF Oppernoort in 1931–1933. Homo soloensis is thought to have lived from 900,000 to 200,000 years ago.

Von Koenigswald found many fossils and prehistoric artifacts in the area, including children’s skulls, mammals and various tools. He then divided the Bengawan Solo valley into three layers, namely:

• Jetis Layer (Lower Pleistocene), where Pithecanthropus robustus , Homo mojokertensis , and Meganthropus paleojavanicus were found ;
• The Trinil layer (Middle Pleistocene), where Pithecanthropus erectus was found ;
• The Ngandong layer (Upper Pleistocene), where Homo soloensis and Homo wajakensis were found.

For Homo e. soloensis , von Koenigswald found 11 fossil skulls. Some of them have been destroyed, but there are some that are still worthy of being the object of further research, even though the jaw bones and teeth of the eleventh skull are gone.

According to von Koenigswald and R. Weidenreich, these early humans had a higher level than Pithecanthropus erectus . They even deserve to be called homo (human). It is estimated, this creature is the evolution of Pithecanthropus mojokertensis or Homo mojokertensis .

5. Homo wajakensis

Meanwhile, Homo wajakensis was discovered by Von Rietschoten in Wajak Village in 1888 and Eugene Dubois in 1889. These early humans lived around 60,000 to 25,00 years ago. Wajak Man is thought to be the ancestor of the indigenous people of Australia (Aborigines). These two types of ancient humans are called homo because they have similarities with today’s modern humans. His brain volume has also grown, even reaching 1300 cc.

The fossils found were femur, maxilla, mandible, tibia, and skull fragments with a volume of around 1,600 cc. Rietschoten’s findings are classified as the first Homo sapiens in Asia. The fossil was then examined by Eugene Dubois.

In a study it was stated that these early humans were able to make tools from stone and bone. Not only that, Homo wajakensis is also known to know how to cook.

From a physical perspective, the characteristics of Homo sapiens are as follows:

• Flat and wide face;
• Wide nose with protruding mouthparts;
• Body weight around 30–150 kilograms;
• Height approximately 130–210 centimeters;
• The brain is already more developed;

The skull of Homo wajakensis is known to have similarities with the skull of Aborigines in Australia, so E. Dubois estimates that this type of Homo sapiens is grouped into modern humans who belong to the Australoid race. Fossils from Homo wajakensis have similarities with Niah humans in Sarawak (Malaysia) and Tabon humans in Palawan (Philippines).

Talking about Homo wajakensis , we will always be reminded of Eugene Dubois, a doctor from the Netherlands who had a strong desire to come to the Dutch East Indies (Indonesia) to prove or seek evidence for Charles Darwin’s theory of evolution as stated in his book entitled The Origin . Of Species , even though at that time it was still full of academic polemics.

By registering as a Dutch soldier for medical personnel, with his wife and children, Dubois was finally sent
to Sumatra. Dubois always found time to carry out his “main mission”, which was to look for fossils and the remains of human ancestors during his time as a Dutch army doctor.

Unfortunately, the Sumatra expedition apparently had not been successful and he turned his attention to Java. This was also triggered by information regarding the discovery of fossilized human bones in Campurdarat Village, Tulungagung Regency, which later became known as the Wajak I fossil. Based on this data, Dubois conducted excavations around the location where the Wajak I fossil was found and succeeded in finding the Wajak II human fossil.

In addition to the bones from Campurdarat above, Eugene Dubois’ important findings during his research in Java were several hominid bone fossils which he confirmed were human ancestor creatures that had been sought after by followers of Darwin’s theory of evolution. The finding of a hominid species called Pithecanthropus erectus which was later called Homo erectus is the missing link that he managed to find in Trinil, Madiun, East Java, not far from the Bengawan Solo stream.

The findings that shocked the world of science in question were the hominid cranium, femur and teeth fossils which were confirmed to be from the same individual. As an anatomist, Dubois succeeded in reconstructing it and concluded that the cranium, teeth and femur belonged to a hominid that had walked upright, although the facial shape resembled that of an ape. The publication stated that the hominid was an ape-man creature that walked upright.

Teuku Jacob in his research entitled Evolution of Man in Southeast Asia (1977) explains that Wajak humans, who are classified by Dubois as proto-Australoid, are the result of a mixture of the Australomelanesid and the Mongoloid races. Although the absolute dating of the Wajak human fossils has not yet been found, if we refer to Teuku Jacob’s statement, it can also be concluded that the arrival of the Mongoloid race in Java approximately took place at least 10,000 years ago.

This is in accordance with the results of the C-14 dating analysis of the Wajak fauna fossils. Meanwhile, based on the stratigraphic position of the site, it is known relatively that the Wajak man is estimated to have existed between 40,000–25,000 years ago.

Remains of the Australomelanesid Wajak Man are still found in Australia. This is why the sample used for research is the Melanesian archipelago, an area in the Pacific which is close to the Australian continent. The Melanesian Archipelago includes several island groups, namely Papua New Guinea, New Britain, the Bismarck Archipelago, the Island of New Ireland, the Solomon Islands, the Fiji Islands, and other small islands totaling around 341 clusters.

The division of the territory between Melanesia, Polynesia and Micronesia is based on cultural or cultural characteristics. Culturally, among the three regions, Melanesia is the closest to Indonesia. Therefore, in studying Melanesian prehistory, we will not be separated from the context of the process of migration of peoples who currently inhabit several areas such as Southeast Asia, Oceania, and Australia.

6. Homo mojokertensis

The next ancient human found in Indonesia is Homo mojokertensis . This human group was discovered by Ralph von Koenigswald in 1936 in Mojokerto. The fossils found are the skulls of children under the age of five. This early human discoverer estimates the Homo mojokertensis fossils to be those of Pithecanthropus children .

7. Homo floresiensis (Liang Bua Man)

Homo floresiensis was discovered by Peter Brown and Mike J. Morwood in September 2003. Liang Bua Man was considered the discovery of a new species which was then named after the place where it was found, namely in Liang Bua, Flores.

The characteristics of Homo sapiens found in Flores are as follows:

• The head and body are small;
• Brain size is also small;
• Brain volume of about 380 cc;
• Jaws protruding or narrow forehead;
• Body weight about 25 kilograms;
• Height about 1.06 meters.

The grouping of Homo floresensis as modern humans is still being debated by many experts. Some conclude that this type is the result of the evolution of Pithecanthropus, but other experts suspect that Homo floresensis coexisted or even lived in the same era with Homo sapiens .

This ancient human resembles the hobbit, the human race created by JRR Tolkien in The Lord of the Ring and The Hobbit films . Scientists suspect that Homo floresiensis was a dwarf due to environmental influences. Their position that was confined to the island of Flores for thousands of years made their descendants smaller and smaller.

So, that’s a brief explanation of ancient humans found in Indonesia. Through the explanation above, it can be seen if early humans had differences from modern humans today. However, for certain types of early humans there are those who have a higher level of intelligence than apes.

Sinaumed’s can visit sinaumedia’s book collection at www.sinaumedia.com to obtain references about early humans, starting from their characteristics to the process of their distribution in the world. The following is a recommendation for sinaumedia books that Sinaumed’s can read to learn about early humans so they can fully interpret them. Happy reading.

Find other interesting things at www.sinaumedia.com. sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always present interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

Recommended Books & Articles Related to Early Man

Ancient animals are animals that lived in the past, then became extinct. However, not all ancient animals experienced extinction. There are several ancient animals that still survive, both at sea and on land. Examples of extinct animals are the megalodon, dinosaurs and titanoboa. These animals lived in various eras and were very large in size.

Talking about ancient animals, humans are also responsible for the environment. These animals are endangered because their population is decreasing. Several animals have become extinct due to human hunting, tree cutting, fires, and difficulty finding food.

Humans have helped push some animals that are predicted to experience extinction. Examples of ancient animals in Indonesia that are experiencing extinction, namely orangutans, proboscis monkeys, Sumatran elephants, Sumatran tigers, rhinos, bulls, and many more.

Ancient Animals in Indonesia

Indonesia has interesting biodiversity and animals to know. There are various species of ancient animals in Indonesia. These animals are scattered in various regions in Indonesia.

1. Ancient Komodo Dragons

Komodo dragons or complete Komodo dragons ( Varanus komodoensis ) are large monitor lizard species found on the islands of Komodo, Rinca, Flores, Gili Motang and Gili Dasami in East Nusa Tenggara Province. This monitor lizard by the natives of the island of Komodo is also called by the local name “ora”. Another name for the Komodo dragon is land crocodile, although the Komodo dragon is not a species of crocodile.

Komodo dragons are the largest species in the Varanidae family , as well as the largest lizards in the world, with an average length of 2–3 meters and can weigh up to 100 kilograms. The Komodo dragon is the top predator in its habitat because so far there is no known large carnivore other than this monitor lizard anywhere in its geography.

Their massive body and terrible reputation made them one of the most famous ancient animals in the world. Now, the real habitat of the Komodo dragon has shrunk due to human activities, so that the IUCN agency includes the Komodo dragon as a species that is vulnerable to extinction. The Komodo dragon has been designated as a protected animal by the Indonesian government and its habitat has been made into a national park, namely the Komodo National Park, whose purpose was established to protect them.

2. Crocodile Ancient Animal

Crocodiles are large-bodied reptiles that live in water. Scientifically, crocodiles include all species of members of the Crocodylidae tribe , including the sepit crocodile ( Tomistoma schlegelii ). However, this name can also be used loosely to refer to alligator, caiman and gavial crocodiles; namely relatives of crocodiles of different tribes.

Crocodiles generally inhabit freshwater habitats such as rivers, lakes, swamps and other wetlands. However, there are also those who live in brackish water such as estuarine crocodiles. Crocodile’s main food is vertebrates such as fish, reptiles and mammals, sometimes it also preys on mollusks and crustaceans depending on the species. Crocodiles are ancient animals, which have changed little due to evolution since the time of the dinosaurs.

There are also several regional names to refer to crocodiles, such as buhaya (Sundanese); danger (Banjar); baya or bajul (Javanese); bicokok (Betawi), bekatak, or crocodile frog to call a small, fat crocodile; senyulong , crocodile jolong-jolong (Malay), or crocodile julung-julung to call a fish crocodile; pandan crocodile , which is a greenish crocodile; copper alligator , a tawny alligator; and others.

In English crocodile is known as crocodile . The name comes from the mention of the Greeks for the crocodile they saw in the Nile, krokodilos ; the word formation is rooted from the words kroko , which means “pebbles”, and deilos which means “worms” or “people”. They called it “rock worm” because they observed the habit of crocodiles sunbathing on the rocky banks of rivers.

3. Turtle

Sea turtles are sea turtles that are found in all the world’s oceans. According to data from scientists, turtles have existed since the end of the Jurassic period (145-208 million years ago) or are the same age as dhinosaurs. At that time, Archelon , which was six meters long, and Cimochelys were already swimming in ancient seas like today’s turtles.

Turtles have a pair of forelimbs in the form of rowers’ feet which give them the agility to swim in the water. Even though they have wandered in the water all their lives, the vertebrate group of animals, the reptile class, still has to occasionally rise to the surface of the water to take a breath. That’s because turtles breathe with lungs. Sea turtles generally migrate long distances in not too long a time. A distance of 3,000 kilometers can be covered in 58-73 days.

Sea turtles experience various egg-laying cycles, from 2-8 years. While male turtles spend their entire lives in the sea, females occasionally come ashore to lay their eggs. Female turtles prefer sandy beaches devoid of humans and sources of noise and light as a place to lay their hundreds of eggs, in holes dug with their hind legs.

When landing to lay eggs, disturbances in the form of light or sound can make turtles discourage them and return to the sea, also turtles use the earth’s magnetism as an aid to return to their hometown when they are still hatchlings, and return when they are adults to lay eggs.

Turtles that hatch in Indonesian coastal waters have been found around the Hawaiian Islands. Turtles are known to be disloyal to their place of birth. Not a lot of regeneration produced by a turtle. Of the hundreds of eggs laid by a female turtle, only a dozen hatchlings (baby turtles) make it back to the sea and grow to maturity. It also doesn’t take into account hunting by humans and their natural predators such as crabs, birds and rats on the beach, as well as large fish once the hatchlings touch deep waters.

4. Arowana fish

Asian Arowana ( Scleropages formosus ) or Siluk Merah is a freshwater fish species from Southeast Asia. This fish has a long body; the anal fin is located far back on the body. Asian Arowana generally has a silvery color. Asian Arowana is also called “Dragon Fish” because it is often associated with dragons from Chinese Mythology.

Asian Arowana is a native species of rivers in Southeast Asia, especially Indonesia. There are four color varieties found in the location, namely green, found in Indonesia, Vietnam, Burma, Thailand and Malaysia; gold with a red tail, found in Indonesia; gold, found in Malaysia; and red, found in Indonesia.

The Asian Arowana was listed on the list of endangered species with “endangered” status by the IUCN in 2004. The number of this species is declining due to frequent trade due to its high value as an aquarium fish, especially by Asian people. Feng Shui followers can pay a heavy price for this fish.

Arowana is a freshwater bony fish from the Osteoglossidae family , also known as bonytongues . Arowana is actually a type of ancient fish that has not yet become extinct. Many names are attached to it, including Siluk Fish, Kayangan Fish, Kalikasi Fish, and Kelasa Fish.

5. Pangolin

The anteater or pangolin (also known as the scaly anteater) is a mammal of the order Pholidota. One extant family, Manidae, has three genera, namely Manis , which contains four species living in Asia, Phataginus , which consists of two species living in Africa, and Smutsia , which consists of two species also living in Africa. This species ranges in size from 30 centimeters to 100 centimeters. A number of extinct pangolin species are also known. The name pangolin comes from the Malay word “roller”. Pangolins are found naturally in tropical areas throughout Africa and Asia.

6. Sea King Fish

The Indonesian coelacanth ( Latimeria menadoensis ) or also known in Indonesia as the king of the sea fish, is one of two living species of coelacanth, a type of ancient fish, which still exist today. The Indonesian coelacanth has a characteristic brownish body scales. This rare fish is included in the IUCN Red List with the vulnerable category. One other species, namely Latimeria chalumnae (West Indian Ocean Coelacanth) is listed as critically endangered.

The habitat of the Indonesian coelacanth is around the waters of the Sulawesi Sea, especially around Manado Tua Island, Malalayang waters, Manado Bay, and in Talise waters, North Minahasa. The coelacanth fish habitat is at a depth of more than 180 meters with a maximum temperature of 18 degrees Celsius.

In Indonesia, dry preserved Indonesian coelacanth specimens are stored in glass cases and exhibited at Seaworld Indonesia, Jakarta. Meanwhile in Indonesia, there are at least two wet preserved Indonesian coelacanths, namely those kept at the LIPI Biology Museum in Cibinong and in Manado.

The discovery of this fish began when Arnaz and Mark Erdmann traveled to Indonesia for their honeymoon on September 18, 1997. They saw strange fish being sold at the Manado Tua market, in North Sulawesi. Mark thought the fish was a gombessa (Comoros coelacanth), though it was brown instead of blue.

An expert noticed their photos uploaded to the internet and realized how significant this discovery was. Erdmann then contacted local fishermen and asked them to immediately send fish like this, if there is a catch of this fish in the future. The second Indonesian Coelacanth specimen measuring 1.2 meters long and weighing 29 kilograms was caught alive on 30 July 1998.

The fish lived for six hours, allowing scientists to document by photo its colouration, fin movements and general behavior. This specimen was later preserved and donated to the Zoologicum Bogoriense Museum (MZB), part of the Indonesian Institute of Sciences (LIPI).

DNA tests showed that this specimen was genetically distinct from the coelacanth population on the Comoros islands, West Indian Ocean. In plain view, the appearance of the Indonesian coelacanth, which the locals call the king of the sea, is similar to the Comoros coelacanth. The main difference is the color of the background scales of this fish, the Indonesian coelacanth is grayish brown, while the Comoros coelacanth is blue-gray.

This fish is mentioned in the French scientific journal Comptes Rendus de l’Académie des sciences Paris, published in 1999, by Pouyaud et al. This fish was then a new species which was given the scientific name Latimeria menadoensis . In 2005, a molecular study estimated the time of branching between the two coelacanth species to be around 40–30 million years ago.

On several occasions direct research in its natural habitat, Coelacanth was found dwelling in the mouth of a cave of underwater lava rock. Physically, at first glance the living fossil looks like a tiger grouper. Sharp-toothed dark stripes. The Indonesian coelacanth at first glance looks very much like the West Indian Ocean (Comoros) coelacanth, but the color of the Indonesian coelacanth is brownish, while the Comoros coelacanth is bluish.

The most obvious uniqueness of this fish is the presence of a pair of pectoral fins, pelvic fins, one anal fin (lower back), and one dorsal fin which is not attached to the body, but sticks out, lobes, and fleshy like limbs. To stay in position, the coelacanth moves its pelvic and pectoral fins like oars.

The forward motion comes from the anal fin and the dorsal fin. The coelacanth’s upper jaw can move open like the lower jaw. With that ability, the coelacanth, a carnivorous fish, can prey on larger fish. Coelacanths hatch their eggs in their stomachs, not outside their bodies.

7. Belangkas

Mimi or Belangkas (Limulidae tribe) includes four types of segmented animals (arthropods) that inhabit shallow waters in marshy areas and mangrove areas. All of them are members of the Limulidae tribe and are the only representatives of the Xiphosurida people who still survive on earth. These animal fossil prints have not changed significantly since the Devonian period (400-250 million years ago) compared to their present form, although the types are not the same.

The Javanese call mimi for the male sex and mintuna for the female. This animal is monogamous, so it is often used as a symbol of the longevity of married couples. The British know it as the horseshoe crab or “horseshoe crab” because of its shape which is considered to be like a horseshoe. Belangkas is a protected animal in Indonesia.

Its blood plasma extract ( Haemocyte lysate ) is widely used in biomedical and environmental studies. In the United States, China and Japan this blood extract is used as an endotoxin test material and to diagnose meningitis and gonorrhea. Anti-toxin serum using cashews has been developed in Europe, the United States, Japan, and West Asia.

The color of scarlet blood is blue, formed from a compound similar to hemoglobin in humans, called hemocyanin. If hemoglobin has an iron atom as a center, hemocyanin has a copper atom as a center.

Cassava meat and eggs can be consumed. The Malay community in Kota Tinggi, Johor, is familiar with sour and spicy dishes and stir-fried belangkas. Belangkas is also eaten by simply grilling or grilling it. However, shortbread produces a kind of poison that can be intoxicating. Only certain parts are allowed to be eaten and only a person who is used to it and an expert knows how to serve this rare seafood safely.

Well, Sinaumed’s. These are just a few stories about ancient animals that still live in Indonesia. It turns out that the way these animals survive is very unique. However, even though most of these animals are wild animals, we must not hunt these animals so that the natural ecosystem is preserved.

For those of you who want to keep abreast of information from sinaumedia, don’t forget to download the sinaumedia Digital application on your device. Lots of exciting information that will be shared every day. Besides that, interesting promos about cool sinaumedia products will always be present through your digital space. Also get attractive discounted prices for each promo. sinaumedia Digital is here for you, because sinaumedia Digital is #FriendsWithoutLimits.

Recommended Books & Articles Related to Ancient Animals

• 14 Endangered Animals in Indonesia that are Protected
• Oviparous Animals: Definition, Types, and Examples
• Getting to Know Herbivorous Animals: Characteristics and Examples
• Getting to Know Animal Fiber and Other Types of Fiber
• Definition of Carnivorous Animals: Types and 4 Examples

Words of Islamic Marriage – Marriage or marriage is part of the sunnatullah in Islam for all living things, including humans. Marriage means more than just meeting biological needs.

Therefore, marriage is something that almost every human being needs. Marriage itself becomes a bond that will live together forever. There is a process of uniting two souls to form a new family.

Unfortunately, many consider marriage to be such a complicated arrangement that it prevents people from getting married. Actually, there are several reasons why marriage is important.

One of the reasons why marriage is important is because it embodies the union of two people. This is the meeting of two souls in one. Dedicate your life not only to your partner, but also to your family.

Marriage also teaches humans to love one another. Make life more complete because there are other people who will always be there for you. Islamic wedding words can give Sinaumed’s motivation to stay wise.

Especially in the face of a wedding ark. That’s why you can get a lot of lessons from wise and meaningful Islamic marriage words to practice daily with your partner.

 

Collection of Islamic Marriage Words

Here is a collection of Islamic wedding words that you can use as a reference to awaken yourself and motivate yourself to be a good person again, especially in building a household in a marriage:

Wise Marriage Words

1. A wife should keep her husband’s honor inside and have a comfortable place to lean on after work.
2. The strongest bond between a man and a woman is not only about love, but how much religious knowledge is attached to both of them.
3. Know that all the pain experienced during pregnancy and childbirth is the forgiveness of sins for women. When you raise children, it becomes a never-ending field of rewards.
4. A good partner is not someone who is looking for someone who is perfect, but someone who is willing to accept imperfections that exist to complement each other.
5. Remember to always be grateful for all the goodness that you have and Allah SWT will always take care of you.
6. Serving a husband well is worship. Washing husband’s clothes and preparing food is also a noble act. Be patient with this and do the best you can, hoping for the mercy of Allah SWT.
7. The happiest wives are those who are blessed with husbands who are patient, warm, helpful and loyal.
8. Respect your wife like a mother, and remember that your wife is still the mother of your children.
9. Parents are not always the strongest. Husbands still need wives behind their backs, and no matter how smart a woman is, she still needs a man’s guidance.
10. There is no relationship between a man and a woman that is most beautiful and pleasing to Allah, except marriage.
11. Marriage is the longest and longest worship because of that, marriage can complete the religious journey and half of your life.
12. Good people do not forge the sacred bonds of marriage because they know they have great responsibilities in the hereafter.
13. True love begins after marriage.
14. Marriage does not only bind two people who love each other, but is also a place of sustenance for life in this world and the hereafter.
15. Family life will always be blessed by Allah SWT if they always obey His commands and stay away from His prohibitions. One of the easiest ways is to love each other in marriage.
16. Love your partner because of Allah and get pleasure and pleasure. In this way the existing bond of love will never die.
17. Marry someone who always wakes you up before dawn.
18. In fact, no human is perfect in this world. Each has advantages and disadvantages. Therefore, men and women must be able to complement each other.
19. Please do not take out on others the shame or family problems you are experiencing.
20. Women are like blooming flowers. They should be treated with kindness, tenderness and affection.
21. A shalihah wife is a woman who always follows her husband’s advice and is a reminder every step of the way.
22. A pious husband is a person who can lead his wife in a way that pleases Allah and His Messenger.
23. Remember, men’s success can never be separated from the greater role of women. So don’t forget to always glorify its existence in several ways.
24. How you treat your partner is your responsibility in this world and the hereafter. Therefore, the husband must be able to be the head of the family and provide physical and emotional support.
25. The best husband is one who always obeys Allah, is loyal to his wife, treats his wife well, does not reveal his shame to others, and is able to raise her in a way that pleases Allah.
26. As you build your home, remember that no home is without challenges. Be patient and grateful in the face of trials.
27. Building a house is like a small boat that needs to be rowed together. If only one of the couple is rowing the boat, the boat cannot dock on Happiness Island.
28. It will take a long time to actually build a house, but everything will work out.
29. A man is like a house. If you obey Him, He will protect you and provide for you. But if you betray him, he will turn his back on you.
30. No matter how strong a husband is, he needs a wife behind him. No matter how smart a woman is, she needs a man’s guidance.
31. If your husband wants you to be a good wife, don’t complain. for your husband will bear the burden of your reckoning before God.
32. Wife is like a rib, she is not a woman who can be ordered around. Mak treat him with gentleness, then he will be more gentle than your treatment.
33. There is no most beautiful promise heard by a woman from a man’s mouth, except for the promise of her marriage contract.
34. When a husband and wife look at them with love, Allah will look at them with mercy.
35. You know, without you knowing it, a wife always puts her husband first in everything, one of them is eating.
36. Don’t demand this and that to your husband. Be a patient wife who is always by his side in any condition.
37. Marriage is a process of accepting the shortcomings of a partner that you don’t meet when ta’aruf with him.
38. A man who wastes his wife and children is the worst man in his life.
39. Shalihah women are those who take care of themselves when their husbands are not around because God has taken care of them.
40. There is no beautiful courage in a man, except the courage to propose to a woman.
41. Be a householder with religion, knowledge, and mutual trust as the main pillars. Avoid jealousy and mutual suspicion because they will become termites for even a strong building.
42. A husband can be the door of heaven for his wife as he can also be the door of hell for his wife.
43. The most important obedience of a wife after her obedience to Allah, then the Messenger, is obedience to her husband.
44. In marriage not only accept perfection, but also accept the partner’s shortcomings.

 

Marriage Words in Al-Quran and Hadith

1. “Marry other women who are lawful for you to marry; (whether) two, three, or four. However, if you are worried that you will not be able to act fairly (between wives if you have more than one wife), then marry only one wife or be content with the slave girls you have. It is closer to not doing wrong- QS. An-Nisa’: 3
2. “Associate with them properly, then if you don’t like them, (then be patient) because maybe you don’t like something, even though Allah SWT has made him a lot of goodness – QS. An-Nisa’: 19
3. Among the signs of His power is that He created for you wives of your own kind, so that you are inclined to and feel at ease with him, and He made them between you with affection. Verily in that there are signs for people who think – QS. Ar-Rum: 21
4. O you who believe, protect yourself and your family from the fires of hell whose fuel is humans and stones, guardians of angels who are rough, harsh, and do not disobey Allah in what He commands them and always do what He commands them to do. QS. At-Tahrim: 6).
5. Know, each of you is a leader and each of you is responsible for what he leads. A man is a leader for his family, and he is responsible for his family- HR. Bukhari and Muslim.
6. Whoever loves for God’s sake, hates for God’s sake, gives for God’s sake and does not give for God’s sake, his faith is truly perfect – HR. Abu Dawud and At-Tirmidhi.
7. A sholihah wife, a spacious place to live, a kind neighbor, a comfortable vehicle. And four include misery: a bad wife, a cramped living space, a bad neighbor, and a bad vehicle-HR. Ibn Hibban no: 4032, see Ash-Shahihah no: 282.
8. This world is jewelry and the best jewelry is a pious woman – HR. Muslim.
9. There have never been love flowers between two people who are making love as between two people who are married – HR. Ibn Majah no: 1847, authenticated by Al-Albani in Sahih Ibn Majah no: 1497.
10. I’ll guarantee a house on the edge of heaven for anyone who leaves the debate even if he’s the real HR. Abu Dawud no. 4800 and endorsed by Al-Albani in Saheehul jami’ no.1464.
11. The Messenger of Allah did not criticize any food at all. If he likes it, he eats it. If he doesn’t like it, he leaves it (does not eat it) – HR. Bukhari no. 5409 and Muslim no. 2064.
12. If a servant does a marriage, then half of his religion is complete and fear Allah SWT for the remaining half-HR. Al Baihaqi in Syu’abul Faith.
13. O young people, if you are able, then get married. Indeed marriage is more reassuring view and gender. For those who can’t afford it, then let him fast because fasting can be a shield for him – HR. Bukhari no. 5056, Muslim No. 1400.
14. Marriage is my sunnah, whoever does not practice my sunnah is not part of me. Then marry you, because I am proud of the large number of my people (on the Day of Resurrection later-HR. Ibnu Majah No. 1846.
15. There are four things that are included in the sunnah of the Apostles, namely shame, wearing perfume, wearing a face, and marrying – HR. At-Tirmidhi No. 1086.
16. If a Muslim provides a living for his family, and he hopes for a reward from that, then that income will be worth alms-HR. Bukhari no. 5351.
17. Women are married for four reasons, namely wealth, offspring, beauty, and religion. So, choose a woman who is religiously devout, surely you will be lucky-HR. Al-Bukhari No. 5090 and Muslim No. 1466.
18. Who wants to meet Allah in a state of purity and purification, then marry free women – HR Ibnu Majah
19. Seek sustenance by marrying-HR. Ad-Dailami.
20. There are three groups of people who will be helped by Allah, namely mujahids in the way of Allah, young people who marry to protect their self-respect, slaves who try to free themselves (so that they can worship more freely-HR. Ahmad No. 7416.
21. Have fun with him over the crook that is on top of him-HR. Ibn Hibban.

Quotes of Islamic Aphorisms About Marriage

1. If your partner is angry, then calm down. If one is fire, then the other must be water-Umar Bin Khattab (RA).
2. There is no greater love between two souls than the love between spouses-Tafsir Ibn Kathir 3/525.
3. Men dream of the perfect woman and women dream of the perfect man and they don’t know that Allah created them to perfect each other-Ahmad Al Shugairi.
4. Your task is not to seek love, but only to seek and find all the barriers within yourself that you have built to fight it-Rumi.
5. Lovers don’t end up meeting somewhere but they are with each other all along-Rumi.
6. A husband should be able to appear before his wife like a child, but when the wife needs him, then he must appear like a mighty man – Umar bin Khattab.
7. Never love someone who doesn’t love Allah, so if Allah leaves him, what about you? -Imam Syafi’i.
8. When talking about marriage, Allah says that your spouse is a garment for you. A dress may not fit perfectly-but nevertheless, it covers imperfections, protects and beautifies them-Yasmin Mogahed.

Marriage Words in English

1. True love doesn’t end in death. If Allah wills it, it’ll continue in Jannah -True love does not end at death, if Allah wills it, then it will continue to heaven.
2. Marrying someone who Loves ALLAH, will show you more about your future than anything else you’ll hear or see -Marrying someone who loves ALLAH Will show you more about the future, than what you see and hear now.
3. You will never find true love until you first learn to love Allah -You will never find true love until you first learn to love Allah (Boonaa Mohammed).
4. Our love is the best love because you make my imaan rise, you help me in the dunya and for that reason I want to meet you again in Jannah -Our love is the best. Because you awaken my faith, help me in this world. Because for that reason, I want to meet you again in heaven.
5. Oh Allah, do not attach my heart to what is not written to be mine -O Allah, do not attach my heart to something that is not destined to be mine
6. The couple who pray together, stay together – Couples who pray for each other, will continue to last forever.
7. When a man says “I accept” at a marriage ceremony he is saying I accept the responsibility of providing for my wife, loving her and protecting her that I am ready to accept the responsibility to serve my wife, love and protect her.

So, that’s a collection of Islamic marriage words that you can use as motivation to build a new household with your partner. Sinaumed’s can also learn a lot about wisdom in marriage in the sinaumedia book collection which can be found at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

BJ Habibie’s words about love – BJ Habibie is the 3rd President of Indonesia who is very much loved by the Indonesian people. Because BJ Habibie is not only a President, but also an idol thanks to his inspiring life story. Moreover, his love story with his beloved wife Ainun.

That is why BJ Habibie’s words about love are very popular, especially among the younger generation. As beautiful and romantic as the love story of Habibie and Ainun, Habibie has a very popular book about his love story with his wife. In fact, the book has also been made into a feature film and remains very popular today.

In the film ” Habibie Ainun “, Sinaumed’s can feel how the love story of Habibie and Ainun is romantic, touching and full of tears. For those who want to show affection for loved ones, BJ Habibie’s words about love can express your feelings. You will also get meaning and meaningful lessons from the wise words of the father of this nation which are very inspiring.

 

 

BJ Habibie’s words about love

The following are BJ Habibie’s words about love taken from various sources that will touch you:

1. Sometimes what you need is not someone who is good at advising, but someone who sincerely listens and understands you
2. True love looks at weakness and then turns it into an advantage to continue loving
3. Friendship can end up being love, but love sometimes ends not being friendship
4. You don’t need to be afraid of losing me, because we are one
5. Love is a positive energy that can move life to be more beautiful
6. Whether you want to be handsome or not, if your heart is not on the same frequency, then what should you do?
7. Loyalty is sincerity to keep one heart in the heart and will promise not to betray it
8. Indonesia’s future will be determined by the superiority of its human resources who have cultural values, understand and master the mechanisms for the development and application of good science and technology
9. If you import glasses, tables and mics, then you pay for the working hours of the people there so that all the people can be independent
10. The meaning of true love is to look at weakness and then turn it into an advantage to always love
11. Love can be seen through a telescope, while jealousy can only be seen through a microscope
12. Love can be interpreted as a feeling that arises in partners, parents, neighbors, the environment to the nation and state
13. I never promise for a feeling, but I try to promise for loyalty
14. If you love someone, then always pray for him even though he is not by our side now
15. Achieving a bright future will not be obtained easily, so you must be willing to make sacrifices to achieve it
16. Love is not finding someone who is perfect, but seeing someone who is not perfect in a perfect way
17. My past is mine, your past is yours, but the future is ours
18. Behind someone’s smile there is something you will never understand
19. If you trust each other then an agreement of two things will suffice. While not trusting each other, even a written agreement as thick as a book will not help him
20. If someone insults you, take it as a compliment because they have been thinking about you for hours and you don’t have to think about them even a second.
21. Farewell dear, who is the light of my eyes, the conditioning of my soul, farewell to my heavenly angel candidate
22. The peak of longing for someone is when you no longer see each other, you no longer greet each other, but instead pray for each other in your heart
23. One of the keys to being happy is using your money for experiences, not just desires
24. Perfection does not come by itself but must be strived for. Perfection must be assessed and work processes and results must be monitored
25. Be a productive young person until you become a professional person by not forgetting two things, namely faith and piety
26. The quality of human resources is the key to the success of the nation’s future and superior and competitive human resources will lead Indonesia to be equal to other respected nations
27. Determine to be a useful person for the environment by using what you have to help others
28. Experience cannot be learned, but must be passed
29. Without love, that intelligence, is dangerous and without intelligence, love is not enough
30. You don’t need someone who is perfect and just find someone who always makes you happy and makes you mean more than anyone
31. A man will not be a big man without a great woman by his side who will always give support and hope in every step and decision he takes.
32. I used to be very afraid of death, but now I’m not afraid anymore because the first person to meet me was Ainun
33. Love is sincerity, there is no coercion or feeling of release
34. My past is mine, yours is yours, but the future could be ours
35. Ainun, I love you very much, but Allah loves you more, so I will let you go
36. I can’t promise much. But I will be the best husband for Ainun
37. Ainun, I love you very much. But Allah loves you more, then I will let you go
38. Love does not take the form of gazing at each other, but looking outward together in the same direction
39. Continue to be consistent in pursuing a discipline that you study because consistently, you can be like me
40. Weaknesses in a partner are something that makes a relationship supposed to complement each other
41. Even though this body has been separated by death, true love will still be stored eternally in the recesses of the heart
42. Democracy is basically related to the quality of human resources. The better the quality of human resources, the more open they will be to disseminate and practice the idea of ​​democracy
43. If not the children of this nation who build the nation, then who else? Don’t you just expect someone else to come to build our nation
44. The development of the Indonesian nation should be like two wings on an airplane. The right wing represents faith and piety to God. While the left wing is the development of technology and science
45. We must not be tired and lose because the future of Indonesia is in the hands of young people. Young people should be led to positive things
46. There is no point in having a high IQ but being lazy and lacking in discipline. The important thing is that you are healthy and willing to sacrifice for a bright future
47. If you have decided to pursue a field, be consistent. That is the real key to success
48. I believe that a person does not have the right as a human being to end one’s life because that is the prerogative of God Almighty
49. Wherever you are, always be the best and give as much as possible from what we can give
50. Live like you will really die tomorrow and be happy like you will live forever
51. The success of a man and a woman is largely determined by the positive synergy of the man and woman
52. Whatever is served before you, then that is your reality
53. If there is no shoulder to lean on, then there is still a floor to prostrate
54. Why are we in the world? Because God gives us the opportunity to enjoy this short life
55. I may not be able to promise many things to Ainun. But one thing is clear, I will be the best husband for Ainun
56. Between me and Ainun, we are two bodies but in one soul
57. I’m not going to complain, but it feels like you’ve been here too long. They think I’m a good lover to you, baby. Without them realizing that you are the one who makes me a good lover
58. You are the most stubborn and most incomprehensible person I have ever known. But if I had to redo my life, I would still choose you
59. How can I be loyal if my tendency is to be ambiguous. But you taught me the meaning of love, so that I can love you like this
60. If the wife likes to grumble a lot, is fussy and chatty, then the husband will not be sociable. Finally he could not get ahead in the job
61. It is better for the husband to be free from household complications so that he can think freely about work
62. We both are husband and wife can live each other’s thoughts and feelings without speaking
63. Lust brings momentary happiness, but love gives forever
64. Happiness and sadness depend on how we react to it
65. In this life I learn to have a mentality like a person who rides a bicycle, if I don’t ride a bicycle, I will fall, if I stop working, I will die.
66. Experience cannot be learned, but must be passed
67. Learn to give thanks for the good things in your life. Learn to be strong from bad things in your life
68. Actually failure only happens when we give up

 

 

The Love Story of Habibie and Ainun

Based on BJ Habibie’s words about love above, it shows that his love story is also very touching. If Sinaumed’s idolizes BJ Habibie, surely his love story with his wife is also very inspiring. During his lifetime Habibie was known as a smart, charismatic and loyal person.

As is well known, Mr. RI Technology was a romantic and loved his late wife Hasri Ainun Besari. In fact, their love story was released on the big screen in 2012. What about the love story of BJ Habibie and Ainun? Check out his inspiring story below:

1. Have Known Since Childhood

Habibie and Ainun seem to have known each other since childhood. They both attended the same high school, but Habibie was one level better than Ainun. Habibie and Ainuns were known to be equally intelligent, so they were often matched by their friends.
Although he often met Ainun, young Habibie apparently did not find the Semarang-born woman attractive. In fact, Habibie once mocked Ainun by calling him ” ugly and fat like Javanese sugar “.

 

 

2. Meet again after eight years

After high school, Habibie studied at the Bandung Institute of Technology. Habibie then continued his education in Germany for less than a year. For nearly eight years he did not return to his country and certainly did not see Ainun. Returning to Indonesia, Habibie was surprised to see Ainun grow to be very beautiful.

Habibi immediately melted when he saw it. He also joked that if Ainun was called brown sugar because of her dark skin, then Ainun was like granulated sugar. Javi Bie chases after Ainun who has returned to Jakarta. Both live in Jakarta and make their love bloom even more. The two often meet and miss each other.

 

 

3. Beautiful Period Until Marriage

Despite her beauty, Habibie finally proposed to Ainun and married her on May 12 1962. After marriage, Ainun went with Habibie who had to finish his doctorate in Germany. Their early life there was marked by extraordinary struggles.

They both have to bear a little income from the Habibie scholarship. However, the battle was sweetly rewarded. From this marriage, Habibie and Ainun were blessed with two sons, Ilham Akbar and Thareq Kemal.

4. Habibie faithfully accompanies Ainun, who is sick to death

Ainun was able to balance and be a responsible mother of two children while building a house with Habibie, who remained loyal to Ainun until her death. Ainun teaches children to live frugally and familiarizes them with discussing and expressing opinions.

However, Habibie and Ainun’s luck faced a big test in March 2010 when Ainun was diagnosed with ovarian cancer. Habibie did everything to heal his wife. In fact, Ainun was immediately flown to Germany for intensive care. Since then, he never left Ainun until his wife died in May 2010.

5. Habibie’s last letter to the late Ainun

Ainun’s death was a heavy blow to Habibie. His heart was broken when he let go of his wife of 48 years. Habibie also wrote a last letter full of love and emotion to the late Ainun.

 

 

6. Depression after Ainun left

Immediately after Ainun died, Habibie acted like a child. He was crying, screaming looking for his wife barefoot and wearing only nightgowns. His condition at that time could be said to be depressed because he was abandoned by his soulmate. Habibie accepted the opinion of his doctor, one of whom made a personal note.

Habibie also started writing a book about his love for Ainun and finished it in just two months. After writing his story, the condition of the third President of the Republic of Indonesia improved and he finally accepted his wife’s departure. The book was then adapted to the big screen in 2012.

7. Routine Pilgrimage to Ainun’s Tomb

Habibie was a true lover who remained loyal even though death left him. Over the years, Habibie has always been at the Heroes Cemetery in Kalibata. He visits Ainun’s grave every Friday. Habibie and his helpers brought fresh flowers to Ainun’s grave.

There are many lessons to be learned from the love story of Habibie and Ainun. One of them is a loyal and loving person to his partner. To this day, Habibie has left many achievements and beautiful memories in the eyes of the Indonesian people. Let’s pray that the deceased rest in heaven.

So, that’s a collection of BJ Habibie’s words about love that are full of meaning and very inspiring. There are many things that you can emulate from the figure of BJ Habibie. If you want to know more about BJ Habibie, you can read books at sinaumedia via sinaumedia.com. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Examples of Adjective Phrases – Phrases are one of the elements that form complete sentences that we often find in Indonesian discourse or writing, while adjectives are words used to express a characteristic or condition of a noun (noun).

So, what is meant by an adjective phrase? What are included as examples of adjective phrases? All these questions will be answered in this discussion.

In general, an adjective phrase is a combination of two or more adjectives or circumstances. One of the words from the combination functions to explain another word which is the essence of the nature or condition. According to Verhaar (2001), the core element of an adjective phrase is a superior constituent, while the limiting element is called a subordinate constituent.

On this occasion, the sinaumedia editor will share a discussion regarding the meaning and examples of adjective phrases in sentences. However, it is better for us to know in advance about the meaning of phrases and adjectives before discussing further about the types of adjective phrases and their examples.

 

Definition of Adjective Phrases

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) , a phrase means a combination of two or more words that are non-predicative in nature, for example, high mountain is called a phrase because it is a non-predicative construction (not related to the predicate).

As for the meaning of the adjective according to KBBI, it means an endocentric phrase with one parent whose main is an adjective and its modifier is an adverb. Adjectives or adjectives are words that describe nouns (nouns) and in general can be joined with the words more and very. So, adjective phrases are phrases that contain elements of adjectives, for example very beautiful, very tall , and very stupid .

As the information quoted from the book entitled Smart Speech: Tips to Become a Great Orator by Arif Yosodipuro, adjective phrases are phrases that are formed by combining adjectives and adding adverbs, for example somewhat, most, very, and must. This phrase in linguistics can be interpreted as an endocentric phrase with one parent whose main is an adjective and its modifier is an adverb.

Check out the following examples!

” Actually, parents are willing to pay, but it is more important for their household needs to be met .”

The more important phrases in the sentence above include the adjective phrases. The core element, namely the word important , is categorized as an adjective combined with the word more .

Definition and Examples of Adjective Phrases

The easy definition of an adjective is a word that provides more specific information about something stated by a noun in a sentence.

Check out the following examples!

• Little boy .
• heavy load.
• Red shirt .
• round table .
• faerie .
• Double player .

Adjectives are also the core of phrases called adjective phrases. As the core of a phrase, adjectives can be delimited by various markers, such as the aspectuality marker and the modality marker placed to the left of it.

Example:

• No fool.
• Not stubborn
• Must be able to satisfy.
• Have to calm down.
• Not interested yet.
• It would be untidy.

Adjectives in adjective phrases can be followed by a delimiter positioned to the right.

Example:

• Toothache . _
• Stupid back .
• Rich too .

You can use this adjective phrase in writing descriptive paragraphs. If you want to understand more about adjectives, try a book called Indonesian Standard Grammar .

 

 

Features of Adjective Phrases

This phrase has several characteristics that distinguish it from other phrases. What are they?

• This phrase can be changed, canceled, or rejected with the word “no”. For example: can’t , not good, not like that, and so on.
• Provide comparative words such as more, less, most, and so on.
• Bind additional information such as very broad, very true, very heavy, very good, lowest, highest, and so on.

Types of Adjective Phrases

Adjective phrases are divided into five types, namely attributive, predicative, modifying, coordinating, and appositive adjective phrases. The following reviews and examples.

1. Attributive Adjective Phrases

Attributive adjective phrases, namely phrases that consist of a core element (adjective) and an element being explained (noun). The adjectives in these phrases usually describe the nouns they follow, such as little girl, old chair, round table, and black hat.

Here are some examples of attributive adjective phrases in sentences.

• The information desk at the shopping center announced a little girl who had lost her parents.
• We all agreed that we would attend the reunion next month. We will wear blue dresses.
• He came to my house wearing a red shirt .
• Father forbade throwing away the old chair on the back porch. According to him, the chair has a lot of memories.
• Brother took the broken bike to the repair shop to be repaired.
• The round table looks beautiful when placed in a dining room that is not too wide.
  
• The lazy young man just asked his parents for money every day.
• I don’t know whose black hat was left in front of the mosque.
• After the flag ceremony, the principal will introduce a new teacher to replace our sick biology teacher.
• Little brother was so happy when mom bought him a new watch  as a birthday present.
• In the rainy season like this, every day mother provides warm water for us to bathe.

2. Predicative Adjective Phrases

Predicative adjective phrases, namely phrases whose adjectives or adjectives describe the elements of the predicate. The phrase usually refers to a condition or event, for example good, healthy, soft, and wet.

Here are some examples of predicative adjective phrases in sentences.

• No one thought that his life so far overseas was not good .
• Since his family was identified as a case of bird flu, he is now aware of the importance of living a healthy life and exercising.
• His speech was very soft , no wonder the children really liked him.
• All of his textbooks were splashed with drinking water in his bag.
• Her condition was very bad since she was kicked out of her workplace.
• His company’s finances  were in turmoil when his son took over.
• His injuries were so severe that he could no longer be helped.
• When it rains, the roads are very slippery .
• Even high school graduates are having a hard time getting jobs.
• His calm demeanor amazed many people with his demeanor.

3. Modifying Adjective Phrases

This adjective phrase is a limited adjective, so it becomes more specific. A modicative adjective phrase serves to clarify a condition of the adjective itself. This phrase is usually followed by information such as very, somewhat, most, and so on.

Here are some examples of modifying adjective phrases in sentences.

• That building is the tallest building I found in this city.
• Cendrawasih is one of the animals that is almost extinct in Indonesia.
• Anoa is one of the animals that is almost extinct in Indonesia.
• Lorises are animals that move very slowly.
• Snail animals run very slowly.
• Yono is the stupidest student in his class.
• Budi’s house is the biggest house in the Sanur housing complex.
• Racing motorbikes go very fast on that circuit.
• Compared to Budi’s house, Danang’s house is indeed closer to the school.
• Rania is the most active student in this class.
• Andi is considered the smartest student in our school.
• After starting the business, Dani became a very rich person in this village.
• The corruptor immediately became very poor after his wealth was confiscated by the state.
• She is the most beautiful woman I have ever seen.
• Avelin is the sexiest girl in Kampung Durian Runtuh.
• Bali Island is one of the islands that has very beautiful panoramas and views .
• The headmaster’s speech was longer than usual.
• After seeing his father working hard, Dinda’s eyes became a little teary.
• I found a very large house in the new housing.
• The ball player runs very fast.
• The athlete swam very quickly.
• He is the tallest student on our campus.
• He became very rich because he inherited from his parents.
• The former director became very poor because his company was bankrupt.

4. Coordinating Adjective Phrases

Coordinating adjective phrases are phrases that are composed of adjectives or adjectives that complement one word to another. This phrase combines the two adjectives with the examples in the sentences as follows.

• The mall’s condition was under control after the rioters were caught by the police.
• Several eggs shattered after falling to the floor.
• The government hopes that the younger generation can create something creative and innovative.
• He really likes sweet and sour carp food.
• The big and magnificent house is the home of the Governor.
• Mr. Alex really likes employees who have the ability to work quickly and neatly.
• Public transport managers apply the same rates for short distances.
• The conditions of Hiroshima and Nagasaki 74 years ago were very devastated and melted.
• He is a smart and wise person.
• The condition of this park is very clean and beautiful.  

5. Apositive Adjective Phrases

An appositive adjective phrase is a phrase that consists of two or more adjectives. The word describes the previous word. Just like a coordinating adjective phrase, this phrase also complements one word with another.

Here are some examples of appositive adjective phrases in sentences.

• The program is watched by many young people.
• Towards the end of the month, many people start to live frugal and efficient.
• Putri is my beautiful coworker .
• Many construction workers complain that their lunch rations are less and less.
• Many like Agus because of his friendly and polite nature.
• The plant withers and dies because it hasn’t been watered for a long time .
• At night, the atmosphere of the village is quiet and quiet.
• The dance moves are graceful. After years of suffering from malnutrition, now his body has become emaciated.
• He did it carefully and cleverly.

Examples of Other Adjective Phrases

Here are some other examples of adjective phrases in Indonesian.

• I found a very large rock by the side of the road (modifying adjective phrase).
• The bird of paradise is one of the birds that is almost extinct in Indonesia (modifying adjective phrase).
• Mother is cooking sweet and sour gourami (coordinating adjective phrase).
• He works quickly and neatly (coordinating adjective phrase).
• My father took his broken motorbike to the nearest repair shop (attributive adjective).

In a phrase there is a core, namely an element explained by another element, which functions as an explaining element. According to the concept of understanding adjectives, adjective phrases are elements that explain nouns in a sentence.

Difference between Verb Phrases and Adjective Phrases

Verb phrases and adjective phrases have differences. Yusri and Mantasiah in a book entitled Micro Linguistics Internal Studies of Language and Its Application (2020) write that something can be called a verb phrase because its main constituent element is a verb or verb. Examples of verb phrases are: “cooking vegetables”, “drying clothes”, “counting money”. Meanwhile, adjective phrases are the main constituent elements of which are adjectives or adjectives. The following are examples of adjective phrases: “darkness”, “huge”, “very smart”.

Conclusion

The use of adjective phrases as one of the sentence-forming elements contained in grammatical arrangements is an important component that influences the understanding of intent in written communication. Chaer (2015) divides word classes into two kinds, namely words from open classes and words from closed classes.

It is called an open class because the members of this class can increase or decrease at any time according to cultural and societal developments. The position and function of the open word class, namely as a filler for syntactic functions. Meanwhile, from closed class members it is unlikely to increase.

Words categorized as adjectives are open word classes, meaning that members of the class of adjective words can increase or decrease at any time, according to cultural and societal developments. The position of the adjective in the syntactic function is as a filler for the predicate function, in addition to being a “accompanist” for the noun category.

One type of phrase that is still often discussed today is an adjective phrase because some experts’ opinions suggest that the meaning is not in harmony. Kridalaksana (2007) states that adjectives behave similarly to verbs, that is, they can both be accompanied not in construction, but different from verbs, they can also be accompanied somewhat in construction. Meanwhile, Ramlan (1985) argues that adjectives are subordinate to verbal.

An adjective phrase or adjective ( Latin : adjectivum ) is a class of words that modify a noun or pronoun , usually by clarifying it or making it more specific . Adjectives can describe the quantity, adequacy , sequence, quality, or emphasis of a word . Several Indonesian language experts provide definitions or definitions of Indonesian adjectives.

The criteria set forth by each Indonesian language expert differ from one expert to another. The definition of adjectives put forward by Wirjosoedarmo in Hasyim ( 1993 ) that adjectives are words that describe the state of nature, character, character of an object or something that is considered an object. The explanation according to Alwi, et al (2003) , “adjective is a word that provides
more specific information about something stated by a noun in a sentence .

Adjective phrases are constructions that belong to the endocentric type of phrases. This endocentric nature causes, so that in the construction of adjective phrases we recognize that there is a central element and an attribute element. If you pay attention to the structure of the adjective phrase, the attributes in the construction are generally only filled with adverb categories (adverbs ). Furthermore, ” adverbs are categories that accompany adjectives, verbs, numerals, or prepositions in syntactic construction “ (Kridalaksana, 1986).

Reference

Book

• Anwar, Miftalhairah; Ridwan, Sakura (2015). Syntax: Understanding Functional Perspective Sentence Units . Jakarta: Earth Script. ISBN 978-602-2175-32-2.
• Chaer, Abdul (2015). Indonesian Syntax: Process Approach. Jakarta: Rineka Cipta . ISBN 978-979-5189-09-1.

Internet

• ” 20 Examples of Adjective Phrases in Sentences “. Language Lecturer. Retrieved December 1, 2022.
• ” Definition and Examples of Adjective Phrases “. Educated. Retrieved December 1, 2022.
• ” Definition and Examples of Adjective Phrases [Full Explanation] “. Let’s speak. Retrieved December 1, 2022.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Heroes of Independence – Friends of Sinaumed’s, do you know the meaning of heroes? According to the definition of the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), a hero is someone who stands out because of his courage and sacrifice in defending the truth. They are brave warriors.

In addition, a hero is also a nickname for someone who provides services for his nation. Through these figures, the symbol of struggle and sacrifice continues to be passed on to future generations.

Indonesian independence, on the other hand, cannot be separated from the struggle of the heroes in expelling the invaders. For their services, the state appointed these heroes of independence to be recognized as national heroes.

So, to commemorate their services, we will review some of the pioneering heroes of independence who have provided great services to the Indonesian people.

Let’s see the list below!

1. Ir. Sukarno

Soekarno when he was a student of HBS Soerabaja.

Soekarno was born in Blitar on June 6 1901, the son of a public school teacher named Raden Soekami and a Balinese woman of royal blood, Ida Ayu Nyoman Rai. He was born with the name Koesno Sosrodihardjo which was given by his parents.

As a noble child, he was able to receive higher education and graduated from the Technische Hoogeschool te Bandoeng (now the Bandung Institute of Technology) in 1925 majoring in civil engineering. Soekarno was declared to have passed the engineer exam on May 25, 1926.

After graduating from college, he published his political ideas in the mass media with an article entitled “Nationalism, Islam and Marxism”. This paper emphasizes the importance of the ideas of inter-group unity, which later marked political thought throughout his career.

His political struggle continued by forming the Algemeene Studie Club (ASC) in Bandung in 1926, which was the result of inspiration from the Indonesische Studie Club by Dr. Soetomo. This organization later became the forerunner to the founding of the Indonesian National Party (PNI) in 1927.

He adopted a non-cooperative attitude with the Dutch which landed him in detention several times. His activities in the PNI caused him to be arrested by the Dutch on December 29, 1929 in Yogyakarta, and the next day he was transferred to Bandung to be thrown into Banceuy Prison.

In 1930, he was transferred to Sukamiskin and read out his phenomenal plea for Indonesia suing at the Bandung Landraad court on December 18, 1930, until he was released again on December 31, 1931.

On August 17, 1945, shortly after Japan surrendered to the Allies, at the urging of the youth activists who had kidnapped him at Rengasdengklok, Soekarno and Hatta were appointed as Indonesia’s first vice-presidents.

2. KH Ahmad Dahlan

Portrait of KH Ahmad Dahlan.

KH Ahmad Dahlan was born in Kauman, Yogyakarta on August 1, 1868 and died on February 23, 1923. He was the son of KH Abu Bakar bin Kiai Mas Sulaiman (a scholar who served as preacher at the Yogyakarta Grand Mosque) and Siti Aminah or Nyai Abu Bakar bint KH Ibrahim (religious official who served as the head of the Sultanate of Yogyakarta)

He is the fourth of seven children, namely Nyai Chatib Arum, Nyai Muhsinah (Nyai Nur), Nyai Soleh, Muhammad Darwis, Nyai Abdurrahman, Nyai Muhammad Faqih, and Muhammad Basir.

KH Ahmad Dahlan had the real name Muhammad Darwis and received the honorary name Raden Ngabehi Ngabdul Darwis from Hamengkubuwana VII, because his father had a high position in the empire.

The education he received was informal education from his father. When he was eight years old, he had finished reading the Qur’an. He never received formal education because of the belief in infidels in the Kauman community for parents who sent their children to Dutch public educational institutions.

Towards adulthood (around 1870), he studied fiqh from KH Muhammad Saleh and nahwu shorof (Arabic grammar) from KH Muhsin. Other teachers are KH Muhammad Nur, KH Abdul Hamid, R.Ng. Sosrosoegondo, and R. Wedana Dwijosewojo.

Almost all of KH Ahmad Dahlan’s thoughts departed from his concern for the rigid global situation of Muslims at that time. This condition was exacerbated by the Dutch colonial politics. The background gave rise to the idea of ​​​​the update.

His intellectual contact with Islamic reform thinkers led him to form the Al-Ma’un study in his hometown. .

This is what is later referred to as the ethics of compassion by various Muhammadiyah groups. That spirit becomes the force that drives Muhammadiyah members to take social action to defend fellow human beings.

3. Ki Hadjar Dewantara

Soewardi Soerjaningrat, Ernest Douwes Dekker, and Tjipto Mangoenkoesoemo (Three Triads) when exiled in the Netherlands in 1914.

In the narrative of Indonesian history, the name Ki Hadjar Dewantara is always associated with his various activities in the world of education and Indonesian culture through Taman Siswa. He was born on May 2, 1889 with the name Raden Mas Soewardi Soerjaningrat. His father’s name was GPH Soerjaningrat and his grandfather was GPH Sasraningrat (Paku Alam III).

He became the first person trusted by the government of the Republic of Indonesia to serve as the 1st Indonesian Minister of Teaching. However, as experienced by most of the nationalist activists, prison is part of his life.

Together with Tjipto Mangoenkoesoemo and EFE Douwes Dekker, the three founded Budi Utomo, the first group to be imprisoned by the colonial authorities. They finally had to live in exile when the national struggle had just begun.

Not long after he died on April 26, 1959, Ki Hadjar Dewantara was declared a national hero, as well as the Father of Indonesian Education. In addition, the date of his birth is also used symbolically as a commemoration of National Education Day.

A fragment of Ki Hadjar Dewantara’s motto, which reads Tut Wuri Handayani, later became part of the logo of the Ministry of Education, Culture, Research and Technology. Gadjah Mada University also awarded him an honorary doctorate in cultural sciences.

The dominance of elements of education and culture over Ki Hadjar Dewantara is believed to be one of the main reasons why his political activities do not become a narrative.

4. Goddess Sartika

Portrait of Dewi Sartika.

Dewi Sartika lived during the Dutch East Indies era. He was born into a well-known Sundanese family, namely R. Rangga Somanegara and RA Rajapermas in Cicalengka on December 4, 1884. After his father died, he lived with his uncle and received an education according to Sundanese culture.

She is considered a figure in modern education for girls in West Java and so far has often been compared to RA Kartini. Both of them were pioneers in the emancipation of girls through modern education, which were both supported by the regent and the Dutch East Indies government, which carried out ethical politics.

Even though RA Kartini and Dewi Sartika had the support of the Dutch East Indies government, they moved on impulse to solve real problems faced by women.

Kartini looked at the problems of feudalism and colonialism which were seen and felt in the sphere of residence with the lens of solutions through feminism and nationalism. Meanwhile, Dewi Sartika saw how women were treated as if they were easily disposed of at her uncle’s house.

Dewi Sartika’s views on the idea of ​​feminism are not as clear as Kartini’s, even though she broke with tradition by opening a modern school. However, this was done within the framework of giving bargaining power to women so they could become wives and mothers.

Her struggle can be seen from the name of the school that was founded, namely Sakola Istri, which later changed its name to Sakola Kautamaan Istri. Dewi Sartika believes that mastering women’s skills will set them free. Skills that will protect women when their partners throw away or leave them.

Dewi Sartika went to school at Eerste Klasse School only until she was nine years old, so she did not finish elementary school. However, he managed to become a competent educator and school manager. Dewi Sartika’s students are numerous and the majority of them are from families with low incomes.

Dewi Sartika sees the strategic role of educators to elevate their degree. Despite being the son of a noble, he carries the stigma of an outcast and a rebel. This is what made him wasted by being placed in the backyard of his uncle’s house with the courtiers .

However, it was from there that Dewi Sartika started her career as an educator. He considered this profession to be of high standing apart from being a parent and working with the government.

After independence, Dewi Sartika’s health began to decline. When the Dutch Military Aggression occurred during the War of Independence, he was forced to flee to Tasikmalaya. He died on September 11, 1947 in Cineam and is buried there. After the situation was safe, his grave was then moved to Jalan Karang Anyar, Bandung.

Dewi Sartika succeeded in becoming a female educator figure, so that the Dutch East Indies government awarded her a silver award in 1922 and a gold award in 1939. In addition, she was also awarded the Order van Oranje-Nassau title on the 35th anniversary of the Kaoetamaan Isteri School, as a reward for her services in fighting for education.

The Indonesian government also awarded him the title of hero on December 1, 1966. Now, his name is used as a street name in various Indonesian cities, including the location of the school he founded.

5. RA Kartini

Negative reproduction of RA Kartini’s portrait (1890s photo).

RA Kartini is a woman who comes from the priyayi or Javanese aristocratic class. She is the daughter of Raden Mas Adipati Ario Sosroningrat, a governor who was appointed regent of Jepara. His mother was named MA Ngasirah, daughter of Nyai Haji Siti Aminah and KH Madirono, a religion teacher in Telukawur, Jepara.

Kartini was a new Indonesian pioneer in a democratic system of government, who lived only 25 years during the Dutch colonial era. He was there wholeheartedly when the early ideas of ethical politics began to open up to the natives through modern education and books.

His free, critical young soul is perhaps what makes it easy for him to capture a revolutionary spirit.

Apart from Prince Diponegoro, Kartini has been the inspiration for Budi Utomo to create study clubs and movement organizations against colonialism and imperialism. She has inspired many women’s movements such as Sujatin Kartowijono, who was the initiator of the First Indonesian Women’s Congress.

Kartini’s ideas came as a response to women entering the modern world through anti-imperialism and colonialism, which became the soul of the national movement. His courage and words have been a source of inspiration since ancient times until now.

However, on the other hand he is not shown as a battering ram of feudalism who is an enemy of democracy. The perspective of men may not be able to see their superiority.

Unfair view. If not discouraging, the possibility is negating reality or comparing things that are not comparable.

Fortunately, Kartini left so many papers. Today’s intellectuals can refer to their work to study and become the basis for placing themselves proportionally in the independent Indonesian movement.

In his opinion, for the nobility to realize its obligations, education and knowledge had to expand. In Kartini’s note to the Ministry of Dutch Colonies in 1903, he emphasized the problem.

Furthermore, if it is not possible to simultaneously educate a nation of 27 million people, for the time being only the top class will be given education and knowledge. This was considered useful because the people were loyal to the nobility.

The importance of education is what Kartini emphasizes to promote women. With education, a woman does not need to be secluded. Education will complement skills that can sustain life and determine the way of life in matters of marriage.

Rebelling against feudalism, strongly opposing polygamy, and fighting for access to education for women were the main points of his struggle. He knows this effort is not easy and takes a long time.

However, he believes his struggle will pay off. “ Change is coming in Bumiputera ”, he wrote to Stella on January 9, 1901. “ If not for us, it must be from someone else. Emancipation has flown in the air – it is destined ”.

6. Mgr. Albertus Soegijapranata

Soegijapranata in 1946.

Soegija was born in Surakarta on 25 November 1896. He was the fifth child of nine children. His father’s name is Karijosoedarmo, while his mother’s name is Soepiah. Soegija grew up in a kejawen family.

He is the first Indonesian to be appointed Archbishop, having previously been named the Apostolic Vicar of Semarang.

As well as being a monk, Soegija was a teacher of mathematics, Javanese, and religion at the Xaverius Muntilan College. He got the name Albertus Magnus after the baptism procession that was carried out by Pastor Meltens, SJ while studying at the Xavier Colosse.

After finishing school, he wanted to become a priest. This is what caused him to be sent to attend priesthood activities in 1916 and began studying Catholicism, Latin, Greek, and philosophy at the Gymnasium, Uden, the Netherlands under the tutelage of the Order of the Holy Cross or the Order of Sanctae Crucis (OSC).

After attending the Gymnasium, Soegija then entered the SJ Novitiate in Mariendaal. He studied philosophy at Berchman College, Oudenbosch from 1923 to 1926. Until 1928, Soegija devoted himself to Xaverius College as a teacher because after that he returned to the Netherlands to study theology at Maastricht.

In 1931, Soegija received the Sacrament of Order ordained by Bishop Roermond in Maastricht and added his name to Pranata. Two years after that, he returned to Indonesia and was assigned as assistant pastor in Bintaran. Shortly thereafter, he was appointed parish priest.

Based on a telegram from MGR Montini in Rome, Soegijapranata was appointed as Apostolic Vicar who assumed the position of diocese. As well as being the first Archbishop in Indonesia, Soegijapranata is known as the first Catholic priest to adapt and develop Catholic teachings based on eastern customs.

During the Dutch colonial period, he not only fought for the survival of the St. Carolus, but also fought against the notion that the church was synonymous with the Dutch colonialism. He died in the Netherlands in 1963 and was buried at TMP Giritunggal, Semarang. He was declared a national hero in 1963.

So, that’s a brief explanation of the struggles and services of the 6 Inspirational Heroes of Independence . Appreciating the services of the heroes is not only by remembering and thanking them in their hearts, but also by imitating their attitudes and actions.

sinaumedia can visit sinaumedia’s book collection at www.sinaumedia.com to obtain references about these heroes, starting from their life background, education, and struggle history.

The following is a recommendation for sinaumedia books that Sinaumed’s can read to learn about Indonesian history so they can fully interpret it. Happy reading.

Author: Fandy Aprianto Rohman

• The Concept of Historical Thinking, A Complete Review of How to Analyze the Past
• After the Proclamation, Why Should the Indonesian Nation Defend Independence?
• Definition of Periodization: Purpose, Types, and Influencing Factors
• Definition of History: Elements, Functions, and Benefits
• History and Meaning of the Proclamation of Independence for Indonesia

6 Types of Religious Places of Worship in Indonesia – Indonesia as a plural country has various ethnicities, cultures, religions and beliefs. The six officially recognized religions in Indonesia certainly have different holidays, ways of worship and places of worship.

Indonesia gives freedom to its people to embrace religion and practice worship according to their respective teachings. This is stated in Article 28E paragraph 1 of the 1945 Constitution which reads, “Every citizen is free to embrace a religion and worship according to his religion”.

Religious differences in Indonesia have existed since ancient times. The Indians initially introduced Hinduism and Buddhism into Indonesia. Then followed by the arrival of the Gujarat people who brought Islam.

Furthermore, Protestant Christianity and Catholic Christianity were introduced by Europeans who came to Indonesia. Lastly, the Chinese came and began to bring Confucian religious teachings.

In matters of belief, Indonesia is a country that respects religious differences. The six recognized religions in Indonesia have their own characteristics.

Indonesia recognizes religion or belief as an important element to the Creator. This makes Indonesia known as a country rich in social values.

The first precept of Pancasila which reads “Belief in the One and Only God” is proof that Indonesia respects various religions or beliefs as important elements in life. Talking about religion is certainly closely related to houses of worship.

Every religion embraced by Indonesian people requires a place of worship to fulfill their spiritual needs. Each place of worship certainly has a shape and arrangement that is characteristic.

Communities often interpret houses of worship as important religious facilities for every adherent of a religion somewhere. Then the house of worship itself is synonymous with the symbol of “existence” of religious adherents.

Aside from being a symbol, a house of worship is also used as a place to worship and broadcast religion. As a place of worship, a house of worship is expected to be able to provide strong and directed encouragement to its congregation.

It aims to improve the spiritual life of the adherents of this religion. As important facilities, places of worship are a top priority so that the comfort of the people in worship is guaranteed.

In carrying out the obligation to worship God Almighty, places of worship are built to meet the spiritual needs of religious people. This article will discuss various places of worship in Indonesia. Curious what are the names of places of worship in Indonesia? Come on, see this article to the end.

6 Places of Religious Worship in Indonesia

1. Mosque (Islamic)

Illustration of the Baiturrahman Great Mosque in Banda Aceh (source: sidoharind.co.id)

The symbol of a place of worship for Muslims is the mosque. The mosque or in the English equivalent is called a mosque is a place of worship for Muslims or Muslims. The word mosque itself comes from the Spanish language, namely mezquita.

Apart from functioning as a place of worship, the mosque is a place of deliberation for Muslims to solve problems that arise in society. Then the mosque also functions as a place to increase the intelligence and knowledge of Muslims, you know, Sinaumed’s.

Not only that, mosques are often useful for celebrating holidays, fostering the integrity of congregational ties, a place for consultation, and so on. In general, a dome is characteristic of the exterior of mosques in Indonesia.

For the interior, Indonesian mosques often use calligraphy decorations on the walls and pulpits where the preacher delivers lectures. Indonesian people have a special designation for mosques that are smaller in size. They used to call it with the names musala, surau, and langgar.

In Islamic history, mosques have played an important role in social and military activities. Indonesia itself has several famous historic mosques, namely:

• Baiturrahman Grand Mosque Banda Aceh,
• Great Mosque of Al-Mashun Medan,
• Sheikh Burhanuddin Grand Mosque,
• Pekanbaru Great Mosque,
• Banten Grand Mosque,
• Great Mosque of Kauman Yogyakarta,
• Jami Kudus Mosque, and so on.

2. Church (Protestant Christianity)

Illustration of the Minahasa Bible Church (source: www.gmim.or.id)

The church is a place of worship for Protestant Christians to communicate with God. Besides being used as a place of worship, the church building is useful for building relationships between congregations and the wider community.

The church as a building or structure is built with the primary aim of facilitating gatherings. The church also has social and community functions that play an important role in helping others.

The word church itself comes from the Greek, namely “Ekklesia” which means an assembly or people who are called out. The use of the cross on the outside of the building is a very distinctive feature of a church.

In addition, traditional churches usually have a dome or tower at the top of the building. Meanwhile, more modern churches usually have layout and architectural variations.

The history of the church in Indonesia is inseparable from the influence of the Dutch. The Protestant Church in Indonesia thrived under the supervision and responsibility of the VOC during the Dutch colonial period.

For the Dutch government, the church building at that time was very special. It can be said that the Indonesian congregation is the embodiment of the Dutch congregation with Calvinist teachings. Indonesia itself has several well-known historic Protestant churches, namely:

• Protestant Church in Maluku,
• Protestant Church in Ternate and Tidore,
• Protestant Church in North Sulawesi,
• Evangelical Protestant Church in Minahasa, and
• Protestant Church in Sangir Talaud.

3. Church (Catholic Christianity)

Illustration of the Surabaya Kepanjen Church (source: www.wisataidn.com)

Adherents of Catholic Christianity call their place of worship the name of the church. The difference between a Protestant church and a Catholic church lies in the design of the building. Catholic churches generally have a more classic building design.

Then Catholic churches usually have an acute angle pointing upwards on their outbuildings. In the Catholic church there is a cross and a statue of Jesus Christ which is placed in the middle of the facade of the building.

The Catholic Church in Indonesia has communion with the Pope or the Bishop of Rome who holds the highest authority with the Council of Bishops. The arrival of the Portuguese to Maluku in 1534 marked the beginning of the history of the Catholic church in Indonesia.

Then in 1546-1547, Saint Francis Xavier visited Ambon, Sapuara and Ternate to baptize several thousand local residents. The word church in Indonesian has several meanings, namely “people”.

First, the church is not a building but a fellowship of Christians. Second, the church can be interpreted as a meeting or assembly of Christian worship. Indonesia itself has several well-known historic Catholic churches, namely:

• Kepanjen Catholic Church in Surabaya
• Sikka Maumere Old Church
• St. Peter’s Cathedral Church or Bandung Cathedral Church
• St Paul’s Church
• Jakarta Cathedral Church

4. Temple (Hinduism)

Illustration of Besakih Bali Temple (source: tripsavvy.com)

Hinduism as the officially recognized religion in Indonesia has places of worship known as temples for Hindus. While the designation of Wasi as a Hindu religious place of worship is devoted to its religious leaders.

The Hindu religion which spread throughout the archipelago entered at the beginning of the year AD. This is evidenced by the discovery of inscriptions against the Kingdom of Kutai in East Kalimantan.

Hinduism itself has a long history compared to other official religions in Indonesia. Most Hindus live in Bali. In general, temple buildings in Indonesia are designed as open buildings surrounded by walls.

Then the temple building has gates that are interconnected with many sculpted carvings. In Indonesia alone, temples are concentrated in Bali which has a majority population of Hindus.

The word “pura” as a place of worship for Hindus comes from Sanskrit which means city, city with towers or palaces, and fortified city. The temple building has a structure with the concept of trimandala which is closely related to the degree of its sanctity.

The structure of the temple is divided into three, namely the nista mandala, the middle mandala, and the main mandala. Let’s discuss them one by one. The nista mandala or jaba pisan is the outermost zone which is the entrance to the outside environment.

The zone is usually a park or field which is often used for dance performances or preparation for various ceremonies. Then the madya mandala or middle jaba section is a supporting facility or middle zone where the people’s activities are.

The zone is usually filled with bale gong, bale kulkul, wantilan, orangutan bale, and pesantrendekan bale. Finally, the main part of the mandala or jero is the most sacred zone in the temple. In this zone, Sinaumed’s will find padmasana, piyasan bale, meru pelinggih, pepelik bale, pawedan bale, murda bale, and gedong storage bale.

Apart from functioning as a place of worship for Hindus, temples are often used as a place for moral education, a place to manifest devotion to God, and a place to teach skills. Indonesia itself has several famous historical temples in Bali, namely:

• Besakih Temple,
• Uluwatu Temple,
• Tanah Lot Temple,
• Taman Ayun Temple,
• Gua Lawah Temple,
• Ulundanu Bratan Temple,
• Ulundanu Batur Temple,
• Lempuyang Temple, and
• Watu Klotok Temple.

5. Vihara (Buddhist)

Illustration of Avalokitesvara Temple (source: pinterest.com)

Buddhism as the oldest religion in the world has a place of worship called a monastery or temple. Vihara as a place of worship for Buddhists comes from the Pali language of ancient India which means a place to live or a place to perform devotional service.

In general, a monastery as a place of worship is a complex consisting of dhammasala , uposathagara , kuthi , and bhavana sabha . In addition, monasteries usually have a typical Chinese architectural style that has blended with local wisdom.

Apart from functioning as a religious center, the monastery also functions as a center for education, cultural development, social development, and a place for meetings or inauguration of Buddhist organizations. Praying, meditating, and reading parrita are activities that are often carried out in the monastery.

The monastery complex which is surrounded by a fence has several reliefs with its uniqueness. Indonesia itself has some of the oldest monasteries that are quite famous, namely:

• Talang Temple,
• Avalokitesvara Vihara,
• Hok Tek Ceng Sin Temple,
• Goddess of Compassion Temple,
• Hok Tek Bio Temple, and
• Sacred Dharma Temple.

6. Temple (Confucianism)

Illustration of Kwan Sing Bio Temple (source: visitingtuban.blogspot.com)

Confucianism as the officially recognized religion in Indonesia has a place of worship called a temple. In some areas, the temple is often called by the name of Tokong. The name is taken from the ringing of bells during the ceremony.

Apart from being a place of worship, the temple also functions as a symbol of religious beliefs, a source of spiritual teachings, a center for social activities, a center for the assimilation of arts, and a historical marker for the development of Chinese society. In general, the temple has a typical Chinese-style building.

The emergence of an old building where the worship of Confucius was held in Pontianak was the beginning of the development of the Confucian religion in the 17th century. Indonesia itself has several famous historic temples, namely:

• Kwan Sing Bio Temple in Tuban,
• Chandra Nadi Temple in Palembang,
• Tek Hay Kiong Temple in Tegal,
• Hong Tiek Hian Temple in Surabaya,
• Tay Kak Sie Temple in Semarang, and
• Sam Poo Kong Temple in Semarang.

• Definition of Culture
• Traditional game
• Benefits of Living in Harmony
• Religion in Indonesia
• Definition of Norm
• Regional Dance
• Buddhist Hindu Temple
• List of Tribes in Indonesia
• The Positive Negative Impact of Science and Technology
• Famous Japanese Culture
• Indonesian Cultural Diversity
• Definition of Culture
• Social Integration
• Civil Society
• Benefits of Gotong Royong

It is a place of worship for various religions recognized in Indonesia . As a pluralistic nation, Indonesia is certainly involved in managing religious life. Each adherent of religion has the same opportunity to create a religious life according to his teachings. Hopefully the existing diversity can become a source of national cultural wealth.

Elements of advertising – Advertising is a form of promotional media that is used to attract the attention of the general public. In general, advertisements can be poured using various types of media, for example, audio and video advertisements, classified ads, and others.

However, not just any advertisement can attract the interest of the general public or trigger attention. Therefore, advertisements created and released to the general public must go through several processes. One of the processes is editing and checking whether the advertisement is in accordance with the elements of a good and correct advertisement or not. Because the elements of the advertisement can determine whether the ad will be successful in attracting new prospective buyers or the attention of the public. Therefore, Sinaumed’s needs to know the elements of advertising in order to make good advertisements. Here’s the full explanation.

Definition of advertisement

Before reviewing more about the elements of advertising, it is better if Sinaumed’s understands the meaning of advertising first. Advertising is all forms of messages intended to carry out promotions or services delivered through various types of certain media. The message is aimed at the majority of the public, the goal is that people are persuaded to pay attention to the advertised product or service.

Advertising is used as a means to introduce a product or service to potential customers. Therefore, advertising can drive product sales.

Definition of Advertising According to Experts

In order to understand more clearly about advertising, the following is the definition of advertising according to experts.

Kotler and Armstrong

Advertising is a promotional mix that can convey product messages to the public. Suggestions for introducing the product to the community, can be through various media, both print and online media .

Furthermore, Kotler and Armstrong explained that advertising or advertising is something different. Advertising is all forms of costs that need to be incurred by sponsors to make presentations and promotions that are non-personal in nature in the form of ideas, goods or services.

Supriyanto

Supriyanto explained that advertising is an effort to promote ideas, goods from companies and services that need to be paid for by sponsors. The sponsor is a party that is willing to cooperate to make the promotion come true.

Durianto

According to Durianto, advertising is all forms of activity aimed at presenting and promoting goods, ideas and services non-personally which are paid for by certain sponsors.

Sutisna

In contrast to Supriyanto and Durianto, Sutisna argues that advertising is an attempt to direct a group of people or someone who agrees to achieve certain goals by using certain media.

Meanwhile, advertising carried out by companies or individuals can be referred to as advertising and the person who advertises is referred to as a sponsor who must pay a certain amount of money to certain media that can advertise these goods or services.

Ibnu Sukotjo and Basu Swastha

A different perspective on the meaning of advertising comes from Ibnu Sukotjo and Basu Swastha. According to both of them, advertising is a form of non-individual communication that requires a number of costs with several media carried out by non-profit institutions, both individuals and companies.

There are differences of opinion from Ibnu Sukotjo and Basu Swastha regarding advertising, namely that sponsors have a specific task, namely to disseminate news to the general public, so that advertising becomes an advertisement. Advertising and advertising are two different things. Advertising tends to place more emphasis on process, while advertising places more emphasis on news.

Full Moon Linga

Lingga Purnama defines advertising more specifically. According to Lingga, advertising is a form of non-personal or mass presentation and promotion of ideas, services, goods in mass media that are paid for by certain sponsors.

Shapiro and Krishnan

More specifically, Shapiro and Krishnan explained about making advertisements, which certainly requires creativity. Advertisements must be made creatively, because advertisements will positively influence the effectiveness of advertisements as well as advertising brands.

Prof. Rhenald Kasali

According to the professor from the Faculty of Economics, University of Indonesia, Prof. Rhenald Kasali explained that advertising is a message that offers a product or service aimed at the general public using certain media.

From the definition of advertising according to the experts above, it can be concluded that advertising is a message that is trying to convey non-personally to the general public and the sponsor needs to pay a price for the advertisement.

Advertising Features

Sinaumed’s, you need to know that advertising has quite specific characteristics. Among them is containing persuasive sentences in the form of invitational sentences, so that someone will feel moved after seeing the advertisement. In addition, advertisements must also contain certain advertising elements such as informative and communicative.

Not only that, advertisements usually follow trends in society and social media. For example, by following trending topics of conversation or having unique concepts. The goal is of course to easily attract the attention of the general public. In this case, trends are commonly used, such as words that are often spoken, an event or phenomenon, and so on.

Usually, advertisements will combine several elements at once, for example, elements such as images, text, videos to music in one advertisement. The combination of these elements will make the ad more interesting. Then, the selection of colors used in advertisements is also important, because certain colors will attract the eye and attract attention.

In order to be clearer about the characteristics of the ad, the following is an explanation.

Using Short Words

Ads must be made by copywriters or ad makers in a very selective way, especially regarding diction or word choice. The first characteristic of advertising is to use short words, but still polite, logical and interesting.

Using Diction That Has Suggestive Properties

Advertisements have the characteristic of using diction that is suggestive or can influence other people. In other words, the diction used in advertisements is in the form of an invitation to the public. Although, the invitation in this advertisement cannot be seen directly, in writing advertising material, there is what is called hard selling and soft selling .

Informative

There are important elements that must be present in advertisements and become one of the characteristics of advertisements. In addition to using solicitation diction, advertisements must also be informative and highlight information. Whether it’s about the advertised product or service or the moral message the sponsor wants to convey.

Have Targets

The fourth characteristic of advertising is that it is made according to the target audience. For example, advertisements about dairy products, these advertisements are aimed or targeted at parents who have children and are in the process of growing up.

Ad Types

Based on Elements

As explained earlier, that advertising has one element, namely soft selling and hard selling. These two elements are used depending on the needs and desires of the advertiser. In addition, certain advertising elements can also be used according to the type of advertisement to achieve certain goals. Here’s an explanation.

Informative Ads

The first type of advertising is informative advertising. Informative advertisements are advertisements that have a focus on building education for potential consumers regarding the product. Provide information about the benefits and uses of the advertised product. Informative advertisements place more emphasis on the usability and benefits of products that will be sold to the general public.

For example, such as vitamin products, in order to highlight these vitamin products, advertisers must explain informatively the contents and benefits of vitamins.

Persuading Ads

Persuasive advertising or persuasive advertising is advertising that invites, influences and leads potential customers to buy products offered by soft selling or subtly.

This type of persuasive advertising is usually used for companies that have a fairly high level of competition in product sales and certain brands.

Persuasive advertising indications can be identified by comparing a product with other products. This is done in order to find out how far the comparison of one product with another product. For example, by comparing the advantages of products in terms of price, attributes and others.

The characteristics of persuasive advertising are that it contains promises to potential customers, so that potential customers are increasingly interested in buying it. For example, by giving a discount with a larger nominal if consumers make purchases in a certain amount.

Reminder Advertising

Reminder advertising or reminder advertising is an advertisement that gives a warning to potential consumers about the product being marketed. This form of warning in advertisements is not always negative, but it can also remind you of imitations of the same product or warnings about deception in the name of the product.

In general, this type of advertisement is more often used to advertise products whose properties expire quickly. For example, like don’t slam things, avoid certain objects. There are also advertisements that remind you, such as the sale of certain drugs, so that buyers can find out which drugs are about to expire.

By Shape

The types of advertisements can also be differentiated based on their forms, such as notifications, offers and others. The following is an explanation of the types of advertisements based on their shape.

Announcement or Notice Advertisement

Announcement or notification advertisements are usually made to attract the attention of the general public with a specific target or target with information or notification. For example, such as advertisements for condolence news or advertisements for certain campus alumni reunions.

Commercial Ads or Offers

The second type of advertising is advertising aimed at offering products or services to consumers. For example, advertisements offering clothing products, cosmetics, perfumes, bags, and others. In addition, advertisements offer services in the field of services, such as courier services, house cleaning services or others.

Public service announcements

The purpose of this type of public service advertisement is to provide information and education to the public regarding certain issues. Public service advertisements are usually made by the government or non-profit organizations. For example, such as the ban on the use of narcotics and the use of masks during the Covid-19 pandemic.

Print Media Advertising

Print media advertisements are usually placed on media that use printing or printing techniques. Whether it’s in the form of screen printing, laser or letterpress . Examples of print media advertising are newspapers, magazines, posters to tabloids.

Electronic Media Advertising

As the name implies, electronic media advertising utilizes media based on electronic devices, for example radio, television, film to interactive digital media such as the internet. Here are some electronic ads.

• Digital advertisements are advertisements displayed on digital media in various online media that have many visitors. Several types of advertisements that exist in digital media include email ads , contextual ads , social media ads , sponsorships , banner ads , websites , classified ads and so on.
• Television advertisements are advertisements that are on television media and have several elements at once such as images, motion, text and sound, so that they are much more attractive to potential consumers. Examples of television advertisements are running text backdrops , credit titles , ad libs , promo ads , live action , program sponsors, animation , stop action, music and superimposed .
• Film advertisements are advertisements that are shown on film media and can be seen when someone watches a film. Usually advertisements will appear before, in the middle or at the end of the film in the form of live action advertisements or credit titles and endorsements .
• Radio advertisements are advertisements that can only be heard and cannot be seen, because radio advertisements are in the form of sound. For example, such as spot ads , ad libs and program sponsors.
• Outdoor advertisements are advertisements that are outside the room and their position can be seen by the general public. For example, such as standard outdoor , mobile billboards , transit advertisements, displays and so on.

Advertising Elements

A company advertises its products or services to achieve certain goals such as getting attention from the public and attracting new consumers. However, to achieve the objectives of the advertisement, the advertiser must first fulfill the elements of the advertisement, along with the explanation.

Using Descriptive Sentences

Descriptive sentences are sentences that have a function to explain a product and service to be advertised. Descriptive sentences need to be structured very efficiently, so they don’t create the impression of being wordy. Persuasive sentences are one of the most important elements of advertising because these persuasive sentences function to persuade people to use a product or service that is being advertised.

Attention or Attention

Attention or attention is the second element in advertising. Ads that are well made will be able to attract the attention of the general public. Therefore, advertisers need creative ideas so that people who see them are interested enough to buy or use the advertised services.

Interest or Interest

After the advertiser has succeeded in attracting the attention of the public, the next step is that the advertisement must be able to attract the interest or desire of potential consumers to find out about the product or even buy the product. This element must exist because without the interest of consumers, an advertisement will run in vain.

Desire or Desire

Desire or desire is an element of advertising that functions to move the hearts or desires of potential consumers. This fourth advertising element has to do with the segments and preferences of the people who are used as the target market or advertising targets.

Trust or Conviction

Trust or conviction is an element in advertising that functions to gain the trust of potential consumers. Therefore, advertisements must be made to achieve a certain goal, such as to provide education instead of deceiving. Therefore, advertisers must make product or service advertisements that are true to reality and not exaggerate them.

Trust

One of the most important elements of advertising is to create a sense of trust in potential consumers. Although the ad is persuasive advertising that delivers promises. However, advertisers may not exaggerate the properties or benefits of the advertised product or service. By generating this feeling of trust as well, it will be easier for the company to get loyal customers.

Those are some of the advertising elements that must be in the ad, so that the ad that is made can achieve the goals desired by the sponsor. If Sinaumed’s wants to know more about advertising or marketing, then Sinaumed’s can find out more information by reading books. As #SahabatUnlimits, sinaumedia.com of course provides books related to advertising and marketing. So don’t hesitate to buy the book at sinaumedia.com and together with sinaumedia, make your life #MoreWithReading!

Author: Khansa

Also read:

Religion in Indonesia – The Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia as we know has various ethnicities, cultures and beliefs. Each belief itself has differences between one another which often creates differences of opinion between one belief and another.

In Indonesia itself, there are six religions that have been recognized and live side by side in society by respecting the values ​​shared by one another. Six religions that have been recognized in Indonesia are Islam, Protestant Christianity, Catholic Christianity, Hinduism, Buddhism, and Confucianism. The following is an explanation of each of these religions.

Get to know 6 Religions in Indonesia

1. Religion of Islam

a. A Brief History of Islam

Islam is the religion that forms the majority of the people in Indonesia and it is estimated that the emergence of Islam occurred around 1400 years ago, namely 610 AD which was marked by the acceptance of the first revelation of the Qur’an in Mecca by Muhammad Saw.

In Indonesia itself, Islam was first entered around the 7th or 8th century through Arab and Persian traders who came to Indonesia at that time.

Based on data released by the Central Bureau of Statistics, it is estimated that there are 207.2 million people who embrace Islam in Indonesia, with a percentage of 87.2 percent of the entire Indonesian population and being the largest religion in Indonesia.

To find out more about Islamic history and its explanation from an Islamic perspective, such as during the time of the Prophet Muhammad, the Fourth Caliph, the Umayyad Dynasty, the Abbasid Dynasty, to the present. The Smart Book of Islamic History is here to explain it all and summarize it in one book.

b. The Holy Book of Islam – Al Qur’an

In Islamic teachings the holy book used is the Al-Qur’an which consists of 114 chapters, 30 juz, and 6236 verses according to the history of Hafsh, 6262 verses according to the history of Ad-Dut, as well as 6214 verses according to the history of Warsy.

Here are some sequentially the 114 letters in the Qur’an, namely, Al Fatihah or Opener, Al Baqarah or Cow, Ali Imran or Imran’s Family, An Nisa or Woman, Al Ma’idah or Banquet, Al An’am or Livestock, Al-A’raf or the Highest Place, Al-Anfal or the Spoils of War, At-Taubah or Forgiveness, Yunus or Prophet Yunus, Hud or Prophet Hud, Yusuf or Prophet Yusuf, Ar-Ra’d or Thunder , Ibrahim or Prophet Abraham, Al-Hijr or Mount Al Hijr, An-Nahl or Bees, Al-Isra’ or Night Journey, Al-Kahf or Cave-dwellers, Maryam, Ta Ha, Al-Anbiya, Al-Hajj, Al-Mu’minun or Believers, An-Nur or Light, Al-Furqan or Discriminator, Asy-Syu’ara’ or Poets, An-Naml or Ants, Al-Qasas or Stories, Al-‘Ankabut or the Spiders, Ar-Rum or the Romans, Luqman or the Luqman Family,As-Sajdah or Sajdah, Al-Ahzab or Groups allied to Saba’ or the Sabaeans, Fatir or Creator, and many more.

c. Islamic Religious Holidays

Islam has several big days, including:

• Eid al-Fitr or what we know better as Eid, which in 2021 falls on May 13, 2021.
• Eid al-Adha, which in 2021 falls on July 20, 2021, is done to commemorate the sacrifice made by Prophet Ibrahim AS.
• Hijriyah New Year, which in 2021 falls on August 9, 2021. This celebration is carried out to continue to remind Muslims of the history of the Prophet Muhammad’s migration.
• Isra Mi’Raj, which in 2021 falls on March 11, 2021. This celebration is carried out to commemorate the night journey undertaken by Rasulullah SAW.

2. Protestant Christianity

a. History of Protestant Christianity

Christianity is a religion that first appeared around 2000 years ago. The first appearance of this religion occurred in Holland in the 16th century which was influenced by the teachings of Calvinism and Lutheranism.

Based on data released by the Central Bureau of Statistics, it is estimated that there are 16.5 million people who embrace Protestant Christianity in Indonesia, with a percentage of 6.9 percent of the total Indonesian population and being the second largest religion in Indonesia.

In learning more deeply about the values ​​of Protestant Christianity, the Protestant Christian Church in Bali (GKPB) issued a book Rooted, Growing, Fruitful in Christ.

b. Protestant Christian Bible – The Bible

Holders of the Protestant Christian religion call us holy as the Bible which consists of 66 parts which are divided into two parts, namely 39 which enter into the Old Testament and 27 which enter into the New Testament.

The Old Testament and New Testament in the Bible can be further grouped into several sections based on the style of writing and content. The Old Testament consists of five parts, namely:

• The Torah consists of 5 books
• The Book of History which consists of 12 books
• The Book of Poetry which consists of 5 books
• The Book of the Major Prophets which consists of 5 books
• And finally, the Book of the Minor Prophets which consists of 12 books.

Furthermore, the New Testament is grouped into four parts, namely:

• The Bible consists of 4 books
• The Book of History which consists of 1 book
• The Epistles of the Apostles which consists of 21 books
• And finally, the Book of Revelation which consists of 1 book.

c. Protestant Christian Holidays

• Christmas is a celebration that is held to commemorate the birth of Jesus which falls on December 25,
• Easter is a celebration held to commemorate the resurrection of Jesus.
• Pentecost is a celebration held to commemorate the outpouring of the Holy Spirit which took place 50 days after Easter.
• The Ascension of Jesus Christ is a celebration that commemorates the ascension of Jesus which took place 40 days after Easter.
• Death of Isa Almasih is a celebration which is held to commemorate the death of Jesus which is done 3 days after Easter.

3. Catholic

a. History of the Catholic Religion

Catholicism is a religion that first appeared in the Maluku islands with the arrival of the Portuguese to Indonesia with a mission to look for spices. The people of Maluku also became the first followers of Catholicism in Indonesia.

Based on data released by the Central Bureau of Statistics, it is estimated that there are 6.9 million people who embrace Catholic Christianity in Indonesia, with a percentage of 2.9 percent of the total Indonesian population and being the third largest religion in Indonesia.

As a means and tool to explore values ​​and have an understanding of the Catholic Faith, the book Catholic Faith: Information and Reference Books can be used by Sinaumed’s as a source of information.

b. The Holy Bible of the Catholic Religion

In Catholic Christianity the mention of the Scriptures is also the same as Protestant Christianity, namely the Bible. The Bible in the teachings of Catholic Christianity is divided into 73 books which are further divided into 46 which enter into the Old Testament and 27 which enter into the New Testament.

Almost the same as the Protestant Christian Bible, the Old Testament and New Testament in the Catholic Bible are also divided into several sections. The Old Testament consists of four parts, namely:

• The Pentateuch is divided into 5 books, namely Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, We Numbers, and Deuteronomy.
• The Book of History is divided into 16 books namely, the Book of Joshua, the Book of Judges, the Book of Ruth, the Book of 1 Samuel, the Book of 2 Samuel, the Book of 1 Kings, the Book of 2 Kings, the Book of 1 Chronicles, the Book of 2 Chronicles, the Book of Ezra , Book of Nehemiah, Book of Tobit, Book of Judith, Book of Esther, Book of 1 Maccabees, and Book of 2 Maccabees.
• The Poetic and Wisdom books are divided into 7 books, namely, the Book of Job, the Book of Psalms, the Book of Proverbs, the Book of Ecclesiastes, the Book of Song of Solomon, the Book of Wisdom of Solomon, and the Book of Prince Sirach.
• The Books of the Prophets are divided into 18 books namely, Isaiah, Jeremiah, Lamentations, Baruch, Ezekiel, Daniel, Hosea, Joel, Amos, Obadiah, Jonah, Micah, Nahum, Habakkuk, the Book of Zephaniah, the Book of Haggai, the Book of Zechariah, and the Book of Malachi.

Furthermore, the New Testament is grouped into five sections, namely:

• The Bible is divided into 4 books namely, Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John.
• The Acts of the Apostles which is a form of record regarding faith, its growth and how the early Church lived.
• Epistula or Epistles, which are divided into two groups namely, Paul’s Epistles and Apostolic Epistles.

Paul’s letters are letters written by Saint Paul and his disciples in 54 AD to 80 AD Paul’s letters are divided into 14 parts, namely, Romans, 1 Corinthians, 2 Corinthians, Galatians, Ephesians, Philippians, Colossians, 1 Thessalonians, 2 Thessalonians, 1 Timothy, 2 Timothy, Titus, Philemon, and Hebrews.

Furthermore, the Apostolic Letters which are written by several writers in 65 AD to 95 AD. The Apostolic Letters are divided into 7 parts namely, James, 1 Peter, 2 Peter, 1 John, 2 John, 3 John, and Jude .

• The Book of Revelation which is the last book in the New Testament written in 90 AD.

c. Catholic Holidays

• Christmas, like Protestant Christians, celebrates the birth of Jesus Christ on December 25th.
• The Solemnity of the Blessed Virgin Mary is a celebration held to commemorate the Church’s belief that Our Lady was conceived without blemish which falls on December 8th.
• The Ascension of Isa Al Masih is a celebration held to commemorate the ascension of Jesus Christ to heaven which falls on the 40th day after Easter.
• The Easter Holy Triday is divided into three holy days, namely Maundy Thursday which is held to commemorate the Last Supper of Jesus with his disciples, Good Friday which is done to commemorate the death of Jesus Christ on the cross, and Easter day to commemorate the resurrection of Jesus Christ.

4. Hindus

a. History of Hindu Religion

Hinduism first came to Indonesia through a trading network stretching from China to India, which is estimated to have occurred around the beginning of the fourth century. The emergence of Hinduism was marked by the establishment of the Ktai and Tarumanegara kingdoms which adhered to Hindu values.

Based on data released by the Central Bureau of Statistics, it is estimated that there are 4 million people who embrace Hinduism in Indonesia, with a percentage of 1.7 percent of the total population in Indonesia and being the fourth largest religion in Indonesia.

b. Vedas – The Holy Scriptures of Hindu Religion

In Hinduism, the Scriptures used as teachings are the Vedas or Vedas. Veda itself has a meaning that comes from the Sanskrit language, namely Vid which means knowing or knowledge. So that the Vedas or Vedas have the meaning as sacred knowledge which is perfect and eternal and originates from Hyang Widhi Wasa.

The Veda in its division consists of two major groups called the Sruti Veda , which contains revelation and the Smrti Veda , which is a guide or manual originating from the Sruti Veda .

The Sruti Veda in the teachings of Hinduism is a book of revelation that was directly sent down by God. Weda Sruti also has another name, namely Catur Veda which is divided into several parts, namely:

• Rg. Veda or Rg Veda Samhita
• Same Veda Samhita
• Yajur Veda Samhita
• Atharwa Veda Samhita

The Veda Smrti, whose content is a form of systematic arrangement and grouping of material, is divided into two major groups, viz

• The Wedangga group consists of six areas, namely Siksa or Phonetika, Wyakarana or Grammar, Chanda or Song, Nirukta, Jyotisa or Astronomy, and Kalpa.
• The Upaweda group consists of five types, namely Itihasa, Purana, Arthasastra, Ayur Weda, and Gandharwa Weda.

c. Hindu Religious Holidays

• Nyepi is a celebration held to commemorate New Saka year which is done once a year.
• Kuningan is a holy day which is celebrated every six months which falls right after the ten day celebration of Galungan day.
• Galungan is celebrated every six months as a holy day which is carried out as a celebration of the victory of virtue over evil.

5. Buddha

The arrival of Buddhism in Indonesia occurred in the fifth century AD, this is estimated by looking at the remains of the inscriptions found. Buddhism was first thought to have been brought by the traveler Fa Hsien who came from China. In the 7th century, there was a Buddhist kingdom that flourished in Indonesia, namely the Sriwijaya Kingdom which became the center of the development of Buddhism in Southeast Asia which existed until 1377.

Based on data released by the Central Bureau of Statistics, it is estimated that there are 1.7 million people who embrace Buddhism in Indonesia, with a percentage of 0.7 percent of the total population in Indonesia and being the fifth largest religion in Indonesia.

b. Buddhist Scriptures

Buddhism or what is often called Buddha Dhamma has a holy book which is often known as the Pitaka or Basket. The Pitaka is divided into three major groups consisting of the Vinaya Pitaka, the Sutta Pitaka. And the Abhidhamma Pitaka.

1. Vinaya Pitaka, is a section that contains matters and rules for adherents of Buddhism or better known as Bhikku and Bhikkuni divided into three parts, namely the Suttavibhanga, the Khandhaka which has two books (Mahavagga and Cullavagga), and finally the Parivara.
2. The Sutta Pitaka is divided into five sections in book form.
3. The Digha Nikaya consists of 34 suttas, which are divided into three sections, namely, the Silakkhandhavagga, Mahavagga, and Patikavagga.
4. Majjhima Nikaya which consists of intermediate discourses, which are divided into three parts, namely the first Two Pannasa which contains 50 suttas, and the last Pannasa which contains 52 suttas.
5. The Anguttara Nikaya consists of eleven sections which include 9,557 suttas.
6. The Samyutta Nikaya consists of 7,762 suttas.
7. Khuddaka Nikaya which consists of a collection of 15 books.

The Abhidhamma Pitaka consists of seven books, namely Dhammasangani, Vibhanga, Dhatukatha, Punggalapannatti, Kathavatthu, Yamaka, and Patthana.

c. Buddhist Holidays

• Vesak Day is carried out by holders of Buddhism in commemorating the birth of Buddha.
• Magha Day is a celebration carried out by adherents of Buddhism which is celebrated in the form of religious ceremonies.
• Asadha Day is a celebration held to commemorate the first time Gautama Buddha taught Dhamma to five ascetics. In 2021 it falls on July 24, 2021.

6. Confucianism

a. History of Confucianism

The teachings of Confucius or Confucianism which later turned into Confucianism as we know it today first appeared in Indonesia in the 17th century, where one of the evidences is an old building in Pontianak which was used as a place of worship for adherents of this teaching.

Based on data released by the Central Bureau of Statistics, it is estimated that there are 0.1 million people who embrace Confucianism in Indonesia, with a percentage of 0.05 percent of the total population in Indonesia and being the sixth largest religion in Indonesia.

b. Confucianism Scriptures

Confucianism has two main books, namely the Book of Si Shu and the Book of Wu Jing which are divided into several parts.

The Si Shu Book, which is directly sourced from the Confucian Prophet to Meng Zi, has several chapters, namely:

• The Book of Great Teachings or what is called Da Xue / Thai Hak
• The Perfect Middle Book or what is called Zhong Yong / Tiong Yong
• The Book of the Holy Word or what is called Lun Gi / Lun Yu
• And finally, the Bingcu Book or what is called Meng Zi / Bing Cu

The Wu Jing Scriptures, which originate from the Ancient Prophets and Holy Kings, consist of:

• The Book of Poetry or what is called the Shi Jing
• The Book of Hikayat or what is called Shu Jing
• The Book of Changes, also known as the Yi Jing
• The Book of Morality or what is called Li Jing
• The Book of Chun Chiu or what is called Chun Qiu Jing

c. Confucian Religious Holidays

• Chinese New Year which falls on the first day of the first lunar month. In carrying out this celebration, usually the younger people give greetings to the elders.
• Cap Go Meh is a holiday that is commemorated by carrying out a prayer ceremony which falls on the 15th of the first lunar month as a form of gratitude and starting a new life to God.
• Cheng Beng, which falls on April 5 or the third lunar month, is an activity to clean tombs and menaka damaged tombs.

So, that’s an explanation of the various religions in Indonesia along with their respective Holy Scriptures and Big Celebration Days. The diversity of religions in Indonesia is not a source of division for every society. However, it becomes a strength for the State of Indonesia because of this diversity and the tolerance of each religion.

If Sinaumed’s is interested in knowing more about religious teachings in Indonesia, you can look for religious books that can broaden your horizons which are only available at www.sinaumedia.com as #Friends Without Borders. Hope it is useful!

Now. such is the explanation of the various guitar chords available along with tips for playing the guitar for Sinaumed’s who are interested in playing the instrument.

Author: Andrew